Home

GR 47/GR 48 Technical Description - conrad

1. MID Dal LOvX uonenpon po9 asind COON yous Addne OOLX P YOUMS NOS eusa A k sl ysel ZOLX LOvX ulod Iesel LOldL Bulmes YAMS Ameol vOLMS Figure 14 1 Switch and Jumper Settings 75 LZT 123 7589 R2B USING THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT 1 pe H WIS DOEN SCHER L 10 2 UU0 D WIS 00pf yoer euuajuy XOWW Zorr yoer euuazuy VINS Lovr dune zzng 09X veu u yoer SUIN O olpny olpny oipny 002X Loer GO0cH Lu ssedkg Joylduiy olpny LOZS YOUMS ssedig dwe ld oipny r ZOZS 7 L agl 10 e9Ipu Lyvn Bury Alepuodas LOSHO GE soepoju WEN YOUMS JOpesH JoyOauUOy umopinyus umop nys JoyOaUUOD wWa shS SIEMWDIEL SaIEMWDIELH sw sS S uld 0t LOVHO 00S Uld 0V 008X LOEdr C O ri UA Spo LYvN aql YOUMS abeyon uoljes8dQ AU yse 4 yse 4 A ddns LOSS Loser COLUO LOLS yOLMS JoyoouU0D pedfsy OVX Jo OaUUOD wa skS Uld 09 Z09X 10 2 3uu0 9 yer 1 MOd Od FOL wa shS Uld 0V 00edr da OIA Sh eee Aqpueis CL Ste e ess OT 48M0d LOLYO YOUMS 44O NO ENG Figure 14 2 Switches Indicato
2. Figure 5 9 125 us Cik Sync 45 Us Data Figure 5 8 16 bit word within 24 bit frame PCM signal timing is shown in Figure 5 9 The signals characteristics are described in the tables following Figure 5 9 PCMCLK tess PCMSYN eal i i Iren 1 1 i Loan PCMIN pr ae SS MSB D14 D13 i teoie PCMOUT X X MSB X D14 X D13 Figure 5 9 PCM Timing Diagram Name Description Typ Unit tess PCMSYN setup to PCMCLK fall 2 5 US Iren PCMSYN pulse length 5 US tos PCMI setup to PCMCLK fall 2 5 US tosH PCMI hold from PCMCLK fall 2 5 us tepLP PCMO valid from PCMCLK rise 2 5 US Name Description Typ Unit Feemcik PCM clock frequency 200 kHz 37 SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE TPcmcLk PCM clock period with 50 50 mark space ratio 5 US Fecmsyn PCM sync frequency 8 kHz Typical Rise Fall times Rise Time Fall Time Unit PCMCLK 19 18 ns PCMSYN 19 15 ns PCMOUT 900 900 ns PCMDLD 20 19 ns 5 9 Serial Data Interfaces Pin Signal Dir Description RS232 CCITT 41 TD l Serial data to radio device UART1 103 42 RD O Serial data from radio device UART1 104 39 RTS l Request To Send UART1 105 109 VO General purpose input output 9 40 CTS O Clear To Send UART 1 106 KeyCOL4 O Key column 4 04 O General purpose output 4 37 DTR l Data Terminal Ready UART1 108 2 KeyROW1 l Keyboard row 1 IN1 General purpose inpu
3. lt scts gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Service Centre Time Stamp in time string format refer lt dt gt lt mr gt Description Integer type GSM 03 40 TP Message Reference in integer format 208 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT 16 8 AT CMGC Send Command PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses Send command AT CMGC lt length gt lt CR gt if PDU mode message lt pdu gt lt ctrl Z ESC gt CMGF 0 and sending successful CMGC lt mr gt lt ackpdu gt if sending fails CMS ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the AT CMGC OK command is ERROR supported Description Sends a command message from a TE to the network SMS COMMAND The entering of PDU is as specified in the send message command CMGS Message reference value lt mr gt is returned to the TE on successful message delivery Optionally when CSMS lt service gt value is 1 and network supports lt ackpdu gt is returned Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code If sending fails in a network or an ME error final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned This command is abortable lt length gt Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode CMGF 0 the length of the actual TP data unit in octets i e the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length lt pdu gt Descriptio
4. Description Command Possible Responses Request monitor speaker ATL lt value gt OK loudness ERROR Show the current setting ATL L lt value gt Show if the command is ATL L list of supported supported lt values gt s Description Included for compatibility It is recommended to use the AT E2EAMS command which provides comprehensive control of all the audio settings The settings from AT E2EAMS can be saved using AT E2APR but those from ATL cannot be saved ATL can be used to modify the volume during a call but any changes are lost at the end of the call lt value gt Description 0 14 dB minimum speaker volume 1 10 5 dB 23 2 CALL CONTROL 2 7 dB 3 3 5 dB 4 0 dB nominal speaker volume 5 3 5 dB 6 7 dB 7 10 5 dB 8 14 dB maximum speaker volume 2 6 ATO Return to Online Data Mode Description Command Possible Responses Return to on line data ATO lt value gt CONNECT mode CONNECT lt text gt NO CARRIER ERROR Description Switch to the on line data mode from the on line command mode during an active call Returns ERROR when not in on line command mode lt value gt Description 0 Return to on line data state from on line command 2 7 ATP Select Pulse Dialling Description Command Possible Responses Select pulse dialling ATP OK Show if the command is ATP OK supported Description Command is ignored and is implemented for com
5. Stand by Transmit Operation GSM 850 amp 900 MHz lt 5 mA 275 mA 2A peak GSM 1800 amp 1900 MHz lt 5 mA 250 mA 1 75A peak Note The power consumption during transmission is measured at maximum transmit power 1 2 7 Other features e 07 10 Multiplexing e GPS interoperability e SIM application toolkit class 2 release 96 compliant e Embedded applications see section 6 e Onboard TCP IP stack using both AT commands and embedded applications see section 7 1 2 8 Development Kit Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications provides the opportunity to test the module in a limited scale before ordering a large quantity 1 2 8 1 M2mpower Package With the M2mpower package you can quickly get started with the module The developer s Kit as part of the M2mpower Package includes necessary accessories software and hardware that you will need for your test purposes It also includes the following e GSM module GR47 or GR48 e Integrators Manual LZT 123 8081 Ric GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION e M2mpower IDE e M2mpower application guide The Integrator s Manual provides you with all the information you need to be able to integrate the module with your application The Embedded Applications software IDE is supplied ready to run on a suitable PC and comes with extensive help files training course and support 1 2 8 2 Developer s kit As an alternative the Integrator s Manual and Universal Development Board
6. CGPADDR list of defined lt cid gt s OK ERROR LZT 123 7590 R1F 89 6 7 AT CGQMIN Description 6 DATA GPRS Returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers The test command returns a list of defined lt cid gt s lt cid gt Description Integer type Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition see CGDCONT command If no lt cid gt is specified the addresses for all defined contexts are returned lt PDP_address gt Description String type A string that identifies the MS in the address space applicable to the PDP The address may be static or dynamic For a static address it will be the one set by the CGDCONT command when the context was defined For a dynamic address it will be the one assigned during the last PDP context activation that used the context definition referred to by lt cid gt lt PDP_address gt is omitted if none is available Acceptable LZT 123 7590 R1F Quality of Service Profile Minimum Description Command Possible Responses Set minimum acceptable profile Show the current setting Show if the command is supported CGQMIN lt cid gt L lt precedence gt lt delay gt lt reliability gt lt peak gt lt mean gt CGQMIN CGQMIN e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR CGQMIN lt cid gt lt precedence gt lt delay gt lt reliabil
7. CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command refers to CLIR service according to GSM 02 81 that allows a calling subscriber to enable or disable the presentation of the CLI to the called party when originating a call Set command overrides the CLIR subscription default is restricted or allowed when temporary mode is provisioned as a default adjustment for all following outgoing calls Using the opposite command can revoke this adjustment If this command 268 19 13 LZT 123 7590 R1F Note 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES is used by a subscriber without provision of CLIR in permanent mode the network will act according GSM 02 81 The setting shall be per logical channel When the MS is turned off and then turned on again the parameter setting lt n gt shall turn back to default i e the presentation of CLI shall be used according to the subscription of the CLIR service lt n gt is 0 Read command gives the default adjustment for all outgoing calls given in lt n gt and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the CLIR service given in lt m gt Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value On a per call base CLIR functionality is explained in subclause ITU T V 25ter dial command lt n gt Description 0 Presentation indicator is used according to the subscription of the CLIR service 1 CLIR invocation 2 CLIR suppression lt
8. Note RTS 109 CTS O4 can not be controlled with AT E2IO at this stage Note This status is not saved by the AT amp W command Abortability This command may not be aborted Defined values Table 1 lt Val gt parameter lt ind gt Description 0 full rs232 functionality all control lines used by RS232 as default on powerup 1 Hardware handshake only RTS CTS DCD RI DSR DTR converted to IO usage asO1 O2 O3 IN1 2 All Rs232 control lines swapped out for general use by IO see table above 142 LZT 123 7590 bit LZT 123 7590 R1F 12 INPUT OUTPUT Unsolicited Response Codes none Unsolicited Response parameters none 143 13 Interface 13 1 AT CPIN PIN Control See 3 29 AT CPIN PIN Control 13 2 AT amp C Circuit 109 DCD Control Description Command Possible Responses Set behavior of carrier AT amp C lt value gt OK detect ERROR Description Determines the behaviour of the carrier detect lt value gt Description 0 DCD always on 1 DCD follows the connection Default value Note If in online command mode while running a TCP IP session through AT Commands DCD will only be updated when returning to online data mode using ATO 13 3 AT amp D Circuit 108 DTR Response Description Command Possible Responses Control actions from AT amp D lt value gt OK DTE ERROR Description Controls all actions initiated by data terminal ready from DT
9. OK ERROR AT CNMI CNMI list of supported lt mode gt s list of supported lt mt gt s list of supported lt bm gt s list of supported lt ds gt s OK ERROR 213 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT Description Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from the network are indicated to the TE when it is active e g DTR signal is ON If TE is inactive DTR signal is OFF message receiving is carried out as specified in GSM 03 38 3G TS 23 038 If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or network the final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned lt mode gt Description 3 Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE TA TE link specific inband technique used to embed result codes and data when TA is in on line data mode lt mt gt Description 0 No SMS DELIVER indications are routed to the TE No class Class 0 class 1 and class 3 use lt mem3 gt as preferred storage Class 2 messages shall be stored in the SIM If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an error message accordingly to GSM 03 38 1 SMS DELIVER is stored into ME TA and the indication of the memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result code CMTI lt mem gt lt index gt 2 Class 0 class 1 and class 3 SMS DELIVERs are routed directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code CMT lt oa
10. 50 mm 33 mm 6 82 mm without system connector pins length 18 59 Power supply voltage normal operation Voltage Tolerance Ripple 3 6V Nominal 0 2 0 4V lt 100mV 200KHz lt 20mV gt 200KHz Voltage must always stay within a normal operating range ripple included Power consumption RTC accuracy Speech mode lt 250 mA lt 2 A peak Idle mode lt 5 mA Powered off lt 100 uA Max lt 37ppm Typical lt 20ppm The powered off current quoted is with a fully discharged capacitor on the VRTC pin this reduces to 50uUA if no capacitor attached While powered off the RTC is still running and still able to activate alarms however the unit is not able to respond to AT commands Radio specifications Frequency range Maximum RF output power GR 47 GSM 900 EGSM 900 MHz and 1800 MHz Dual Band GR 48 GSM 850 MHz and 1900 MHz Dual Band 2W 1W Antenna impedance 500 SIM card SIM card interface external only 3Vor5V Environmental specifications Operating temperature range Operating temperature reduced specification Storage temperature range Maximum relative humidity Stationary vibration sinusoidal 20 C to 55 C 30 C to 75 C 40 C to 85 C 95 at 40 C Displacement 7 5 mm Acceleration amplitude 20 m s 40 m s Frequency range 2 8 Hz 8 200 Hz 200 500 Hz LZT 123 8081 Ric 52 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
11. Description Used to play one of the sound types which are available as ring signals message signals on the module The signal volume may not be chosen as step with an increasing volume for each signal If value 1 is chosen for parameter lt volume gt nothing should happen Signal volume may be chosen as a selected level lt volume gt Description 0 Off 1 Step Not supported 2 n Volume settings Refer to the AT ERIN command for the lt sound type gt parameter 80 5 Data CSD HSCSD Note Since the module does not support V42bis compression the following commands have not been implemented e AT DS e AT DR 5 1 AT CBST Select Bearer Service Type LZT 123 7590 R1E Description Command Possible Responses Select bearer service AT CBST lt speed gt OK type lt name gt lt ce gt ERROR Show the current setting AT CBST CBST lt speed gt lt name gt lt ce gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CBST e CBST list of supported supported lt speed gt s list of supported lt name gt s list of supported lt ce gt s OK ERROR Description Selects the bearer service lt name gt with data rate lt speed gt and the connection element lt ce gt to be used when data calls are originated Values may also be used during mobile terminated data call setup especially in the case of single numbering scheme calls Test command returns values supported by the TA as
12. Stationary vibration random Acceleration spectral density m s 0 96 2 88 0 96 Frequency range 5 10 10 200 200 500 60 min per axis Non stationary vibration including Shock response spectrum I peak acceleration 3 shocks in shock each axis and direction 300 me 11 ms Shock response spectrum II peak acceleration 3 shocks in each axis and direction 1000 m s 6 ms Bump Acceleration 250 m s Free fall transportation 1 2m Rolling pitching transportation Angle 35 degrees period 8s Static load 10 kPa Low air pressure high air pressure 70 kPa 106 kPa The extended range is defined as 30 C to 20 C and 55 C to 75 C Operation in these temperature extremes is according to basic minimal performance criteria defined as follows e Extended operation in this range shall not cause permanent damage to the unit e The unit shall be capable of registering with the network and making a call under 85dBm signal conditionals on a high percentage of attempts gt 90 e The Transceiver and Transmitter shall not violate GMS requirements for spurious emissions maximum transmit power levels frequency error and occupied bandwidth while operating in the extended temperature ranges e Reduced Transmit output power and reduced receiver sensitivity are possible during operation at these extremes Storage SMS Storage capacity 40 in ME In addition the unit can handle as many SMS as the SIM can
13. lt index gt Description integer type Values in the range of location numbers of phonebook memory lt number gt Description string type ME number of format lt type gt lt type gt Description integer format Type of address octet default 145 when dialing string includes international access code character otherwise 129 refer to GSM 04 08 subclause 10 5 4 7 129 ISDN telephony numbering plan national international unknown 145 ISDN telephony numbering plan international number 161 ISDN telephony numbering plan national number 128 255 Other values refer GSM 04 08 section 10 5 4 7 lt text gt Description 196 LZT 123 7590 R1F 15 PHONEBOOK string type Field of maximum length lt tlength gt character set as specified by the select TE character set command CSCS lt nlength gt Description integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field lt number gt lt tlength gt Description integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field lt text gt Example AT CPBW 1 44123456789 145 Test Number OK AT CPBW 2 440987654321 145 Test number 2 OK AT CPBW 3 449876543210 129 Test Number 3 OK 197 16 Short Message Services Point to Point 16 1 AT CGSMS LZT 123 7590 R1F Select Service for MO SMS Messages See 6 10 AT CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages 16 2 AT CPMSPreferred Message Storage Common for both PDU Protocol Data Uni
14. 0 35 Max 200 3 0 Unit ms ms ms ms S The GR47 measures the voltage at VCC during the power up sequence It is important that both VCC and ON OFF reach a minimum of 3 2V before the ON OFF low pulse is initiated In SERVICE mode 28 SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE Turning the Radio Device Off ON OFF Ce 1 Software controlled VIO i tspp shutdown SE Performs GSM Network detach and SIM power management Figure 5 3 Off timings and VIO performance Symbol Parameters Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Lon Time for software 800 ms pulse detection which initiates a software shutdown fouer Application 100 ms ON OFF pulse 0 width tscso Software controlled 2 5 10 s shutdown deactivates VIO torr Time when VCC VIO is 0 ms power supply can DISABLED be disabled 2 It is a requirement from most GSM network providers that GSM products properly detach from the network during a power down sequence In order to achieve this it is important that the VCC supply is not removed or turned off before VIO has been deactivated by the module 29 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE Hard Shutdown Sequence 1 J i Jeu sg ON OFF e l tusp VIO Figure 5 4 Hard Shutdown Sequence Symbol Parameters Conditions Min Typ Max Unit tho Time to complete 2 11 s hardware shutdown Iess 2 Application ON OFF low be 10 S ON OFF pulse until V
15. 6 1 AT CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate Description Command Possible Responses Activate or deactivate CGACT lt state gt CME ERROR lt err gt the specified PDP lt cid gt lt cid gt OK context s ERROR Show the current setting CGACT e CGACT lt cid gt lt state gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CGACT lt cid gt lt state gt ERROR Show if the command is CGACT e CGACT list of supported supported lt state gt s OK ERROR Description Used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context s After the command has completed the MS remains in V 250 command state If the MS is already in the requested state the command is ignored and OK is returned If the requested state cannot be achieved ERROR or CME ERROR is returned If the MS is not attached to the GPRS service when the activation form of the command is executed the MS first performs a GPRS attach and then attempts to activate the specific contexts If no lt cid gt s are specified the activation form of the command activates all defined contexts If no lt cid gt s are specified the deactivation form of the command deactivates all active contexts lt state gt Description 0 PDP context activation deactivated 1 PDP context activation activated 85 LZT 123 7590 R1E 6 DATA GPRS lt cid gt Description Integer type A numeric parameter which specifies a specific PDP context definitio
16. AT ELIN ELIN lt line gt e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR ELIN lt line gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR 254 19 6 AT E2SSD LZT 123 7590 R1F 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES Show if the command is AT ELIN ELIN list of supported supported lt line gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description Note This command requests the ME to set the current line to lt line gt The following command reads its value from the current line and is thus affected by the use of ELIN AT CACM Accumulated Call Meter lt line gt Description 1 L1 2 L2 M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch Description Command Possible Responses Send Supplementary AT E2SSD lt SS_String gt OK Service command ERROR Show if the command is AT E2SSD OK supported ERROR Description This command allows the user to send a Public MMI command string in order to activate deactivate interrogate or modify settings for Supplementary Services Once a string is sent the command will return OK if parsed and sent successfully otherwise ERROR is returned The command does not verify that the operation executes successfully use the AT E2SSI command to gain feedback of the operation status Refer to GSM 02 30 for Public MMI services and codes lt SS_ String gt Description String Type String in double quotes containing a Public MMI command to modify activat
17. Description 4 AUDIO Used to set sound for incoming voice line L1 and L2 fax data calls and alarm For each of the incoming call types and alarm voice on line 1 voice on line 2 fax calls and data calls and alarm a sound type is selected The type of sound is either a ring signal selected from a predefined set a melody selected from a predefined set or an own melody selected from a set specified by the user Line 1 is the default for lt call type gt if the parameter is not given lt calltype gt Description 1 Line 1 2 Line 2 3 Fax 4 Data 5 Alarm lt soundtype gt Description 0 Off Not supported 1 Low ring signal 2 Medium ring signal 3 High ring signal 4 Mixed ring signal 5 Beep Not supported 6 Alarm Not supported 7 Calendar Tone Not supported 8 Calendar Click Not supported 9 10 Reserved Not supported 11 20 Melody 1 Melody 10 reserved for preset melodies 21 30 Reserved Not supported 31 38 Own melodies 1 8 39 5 Reserved for own melodies Not supported 79 4 AUDIO 4 14 AT ERIP Ericsson Ring Signal Playback Command LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Plays the selected sound AT ERIP CME ERROR lt err gt type at specified volume lt volume gt lt sound type gt OK level ERROR Show if the command is AT ERIP ERIP list of supported supported lt volume gt s list of supported lt sound type gt s OK ERROR
18. Message reference value lt mr gt is returned to the TE on successful message delivery Optionally wnen CSMS lt service gt value is 1 and there is network support lt scts gt is returned Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code If sending fails in a network or an ME error final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned This command is abortable lt fo gt Description 0 First octet of SMS DELIVER in integer format 1 First octet of SMS_ SUBMIT in integer format 2 First octet of SMS STATUS REPORT in integer format 3 First octet of SMS COMMAND in integer format lt ct gt Description Integer GSM 03 40 TP Command Type Default value is 0 lt pid gt Description 210 LZT 123 7590 bit Note 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT 0 255 Protocol Identifier in integer format Default value is 0 according to 07 05 section 9 2 3 9 lt mn gt Description Integer GSM 03 40 TP Message Number lt da gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Destination Address Value in string format BCD numbers or GSM default alphabet characters are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character refer command CSCS Type of address given by lt toda gt lt toda gt Description String type GSM 04 11 TP Destination Address Type of Address octet in integer format when first character of lt da gt is IRA 43
19. Safety considerations should be taken into account For example monitoring the temperature of the battery If the temperature of the battery exceeds its specification limits battery charging must be stopped immediately If the battery temperature continues to rise the application should be suspended or the battery disconnected When charging Lithium batteries the battery pack must have an internal protection circuit in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 27 5 6 LZT 123 7589 R2B Turning the Radio Device On SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE vcc ON OFF tpuLse vio Figure 5 2 On timings and VIO performance through 39kQ H d H 1 H 1 1 d H H 1 1 1 1 1 ON OFF pulled up internal Turning the Radio Device ON OFF and the External Power Signal Symbol to ton tvo tpus tersr tcrs Parameters Reference time when VCC is within working limits Time after tO when the ON OFF pulse can begin Time after start of ON OFF pulse when VIO is active Application ON OFF pulse width Internal Power on reset signal initiates software Time when software controlled CTS signal indicates module READY Conditions VCC gt 3 2V ON OFF VCC VCC gt 3 2V VCC gt 3 2V ON OFF held low until detected by software CTS signal configured for RS232 hardware flow control not GPIO pin Min 400 100 45 0 500
20. Saves active message service settings to a non volatile memory A TA can contain several settings profiles Settings specified in commands Service Centre Address CSCA Set Message Parameters CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast Message Types CSCB if implemented are saved Certain settings may not be supported by the storage e g SIM SMS parameters and therefore can not be saved Test command shall display the supported profile numbers for reading and writing of settings lt profile gt Description 0 255 Manufacturer specific profile number where settings are to be stored Default value is 0 62 LZT 123 7590 bit 3 CONTROL AND STATUS Note It is recommended that the AT amp W command is used in preference to AT CSAS This is only included for compatibility 3 34 AT CSQ Signal Strength Description Command Possible Responses Show the Signal AT CSQ CSQ lt rssi gt lt ber gt Strength e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CSQ CSQ list of supported supported lt rssi gt s list of supported lt ber gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description Returns the received signal strength indication lt rssi gt and channel bit error rate lt ber gt from the ME Test command returns values supported by the TA as compound values lt rssi gt Description 0 113dBm or less 1 111dBm 2 30 109 53dBm 31 51dBm or greater 99 N
21. cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 28 3 Control and E TEEN 30 3 1 ATQ Result Code Suppression cccccccccseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 3 2 ATSO Automatic Answer Control eege de Eege GE 30 AA ATS2 Escape Sequence Characher AAA 31 3 4 ATS3 Command Line Termination Characher 31 3 LZT 123 7590 R1F 3 5 ATS4 Response Formatting Characher 32 3 6 ATS5 Command Line Editing Character BACKSPACE ee 33 3 7 ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Copal 3 nescence tones ennnnnnnne een 33 3 8 ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout cccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 34 3 9 ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control 34 3 10 ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control 35 3 11 AT ECAM Ericsson Call Monttormg 35 3 12 AT ECIND Expanded Indicator Control 37 3 13 AT ECLCC List Current Calis EE 39 3 14 AT EDST Ericsson Daylight Saving Time 44 3 15 AT EMAR Ericsson Master Reser 45 3 16 AT E2RESET Restart Kell ethesch ee eeh ee eege 45 3 17 AT EPEE Ericsson Pin EVM cts eene et sense 45 3 13 AT ACALA Set BE 46 9 19 SAI FCALD Alarm Eiere 48 3 20 AT CCLK Set Clock and Date acct sev ececestenlotesavetaieetuo testaniaveeednatn 48 3 21 AT CEER Extended Error Report 49 3 22 AT CFUN Set ME Functionality cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeess 50 3 23 AT CIND Indicator COMMOl cca oces pic cedsoleicecdheostodigeaeebicenn ikea 50 3 24 AT CLAC List all available AT Commande nnnsnnenaannnnnneneennnnnn
22. lt PDP_type gt list of supported lt pd1 gt s list of supported lt pdN gt s LZT 123 7590 R1F 87 6 DATA GPRS OK e ERROR Description Specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by the local context identification parameter lt cid gt When entered in the data is automatically saved to flash lt cid gt Description Integer type PDP Context Identifier a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition The parameter is local to the TE MS interface and is used in other PDP context related commands The range of permitted values minimum value 1 is returned by the test form of the command Supported values Ericsson specific lt PDP_type gt Description IP Internet Protocol IETF STD 5 lt APN gt Description String type Access Point Name a string parameter which is a logical name that is used to select the GGSN or the external packet data network If the value is null or omitted then the subscription value will be requested lt PDP_address gt Description String type A string parameter that identifies the MS in the address space applicable to the PDP If the value is null or omitted then a value may be provided by the TE during the PDP startup procedure or failing that a dynamic address will be requested lt pdN gt Description String type Zer
23. AT E2PHFB AT E2PHFB ERROR OK E2PHFB lt op gt E2PHFB list of supported lt op gt s ERROR Description This command allows the user to set the functionality for a PHF portable handsfree button as used on simple handsfree equipment When set to ON the MS will detect the short circuit of the ATMS and AFMS lines and interpret this as a PHF button press This has the effect of answering hanging up a call without recourse to AT commands Note lt op gt Description 0 Disable PHF button Default value 1 Enable PHF button 4 7 AT ELAM Ericsson Local Audio Mode LZT 123 7590 R1F At present this functionality does not work in the software Description Command Possible Responses Set local audio mode Show the current setting Show if the command is supported AT ELAM lt mic gt L lt loudspeaker gt AT ELAM AT ELAM e ELAM lt mic gt lt loudspeaker gt OK ERROR ELAM lt mic gt lt loudspeaker gt ELAM list of supported lt mic gt s and lt loudspeaker gt s parameters 74 4 AUDIO Description Included for compatibility No functionality lt mic gt Description 0 Off 1 Microphone analogue lt loudspeaker gt Description 0 Off 1 Loudspeaker analogue 4 8 AT EMIC Ericsson Microphone Mode Description Command Possible Responses Enables disables the ME AT EMIC lt mode gt CME ERROR
24. Audio to Mobile Station Audio from Mobile Station Cell Broadcast Message Cell Broadcast Service Circuit Switched Data Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Developer s Kit Data Terminal Equipment Dual Tone Multi Frequency Embedded Application Enhanced Full Rate Electro Magnetic Compatibility European Telecommunication Standards Institute Full Rate General Packet Radio Service Global Positioning System Global System for Mobile Communication Half Rate High Speed Circuit Switched Data Integrated Development Environment Internet Protocol International Telecommunication Union Telecommunications Standardisation Sector Sony Ericsson s powerful support environment Mobile Equipment Micro Miniature Coax 16 LZT 123 7589 R2B MO MS MT PCM PDU RF RFU RLP RTC SDP SIM SMS TCP UDP ABBREVIATIONS Mobile Originated Mobile Station Mobile Terminated Pulse Code Modulation Protocol Data Unit Radio Frequency Reserved for Future Use Radio Link Protocol Real Time Clock Service Discovery Protocol Subscriber Identity Module Short Message Service Transport Control Protocol User Datagram Protocol 17 4 Mechanical Description 4 1 Interface Description The pictures below show the mechanical design of the radio device along with the positions of the different connectors and mounting holes The radio device is protected with AISI 304 stainless steel covers that meet the env
25. E2IPI lt IPAddr gt OK Shows if the AT E2IPl E2IPI list of supported command is lt InfoType gt s supported OK ERROR Description This command allows information about the current IP Status of the module to be reported The command will only succeed when an IP Session is Active see AT E2IPA Abortability This command may not be aborted 104 LZT 123 7590 bit 7 DATA TCP IP Defined values lt InfoType gt Description 0 IP Address of Module 1 IP Address of Primary DNS Server 2 IP Address of Secondary DNS Server Unsolicited Result codes None Execution Time Executed immediately not time critical Example AT E2IPI 0 E2IPI 120 211 22 102 OK 7 5 AT E2IPRH M2M IP Resolve Host Description Command Possible Responses Request an IP AT E2IPRH lt URL gt ERROR Resolve Host E2IPRH lt IPAddr gt OK Shows if the AT E2IPRH OK command is ERROR supported Description This command allows an IP lookup on a given URL string denoting an IP Host The command will only succeed when an IP Session is Active see AT E2IPA and if the string is 32 characters or less Abortability This command may not be aborted Be aware this function can take up to 125 140 seconds to return if the URL does not exist 105 LZT 123 7590 bit 7 DATA TCP IP Defined values lt URL gt Description String URL of required server for which an IP lookup is required Th
26. OK Command executed no errors ERROR Invalid command or command line too long NO DIALTONE No dialling possible wrong mode BUSY Remote station busy NO ANSWER Connection completion time out NO CARRIER Link not established or disconnected Unsolicited Result Code Unsolicited result codes indicate the occurrence of an event not directly associated with a command being issued from the TE 1 4 Error Codes 1 4 1 CME ERROR Mobile Equipment Error Code LZT 123 7590 R1F This final result code is similar to the regular ERROR result code If CME ERROR lt err gt is the result code for any of the commands in a command line none of the commands in the same command line will be executed neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned as a result of a completed command line execution The format of lt err gt can be either numerical or alphabetical and is set with the CMEE command The table below provides the numerical values for the parameter lt err gt lt err gt Description Syntax 0 ME failure 1 No connection to ME 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 30 31 32 100 101 255 2 CALL CONTROL ME adaptor link reserved Operation not allowed Operation not supported PH SIM PIN required SIM not inserted SIM PIN required SIM PUK required SIM failure SIM busy SIM wrong Incorrect password SIM PIN2 required SIM PUK2 required Memory full Invalid index Not found Memory
27. Read the current setting Read the current call status Show list of supported modes Unsolicited report AT ECLCC lt n gt AT ECLCC AT ECLCC AT ECLCC OK ERROR ECLCC lt n gt OK ERROR ECLCC lt ccid gt lt dir gt lt ccstatus gt lt calltype gt lt mpty gt lt exitcause gt lt number gt lt type gt lt CR gt lt ccid gt lt dir gt lt ccst atus gt lt calltype gt lt mp ty gt lt exitcause gt lt nu mber gt lt type gt lt CR gt etc for all calls OK ERROR ECLCC list of supported lt n gt s OK ERROR ECLCC lt ccid gt lt dir gt lt ccstatus gt lt calltype gt lt mpty gt lt exitcause gt lt number gt lt type gt Description This command enables and disables unsolicited reports of call status It is similar to AT ECAM ECAV and the GSM standard unsolicited report CLCC but with a slightly different set of parameters When entering the command without any parameters the current status of all calls is returned The command is operational with or without a SIM card available The setting is not persistent after a power cycle lt n gt Description 0 Call status reporting is disabled Default value 39 LZT 123 7590 R1F 3 CONTROL AND STATUS Call status reporting is enabled lt ccid gt Description 1 7 Id of the call for which pr
28. The regulated power supply VCC is connected to the pin numbers 1 3 5 7 and 9 3 4 1 Power Supply VCC The VCC supplies the module with external power Any other voltage needed is generated internally Parameter Mode Limit Voltage to be applied Nominal 3 6 Volts Tolerance 3 4 Volts 4 0 Volts including ripple Over voltages 5 5 Volts Current Drive capability at TX Full Power lt 600 mA average lt 2 A Peak The GR47 48 does not have the internal capacitance to supply the large current peaks during GSM transmission therefore on burst transmission the application DC source is responsible for providing the appropriate current Design application notes are available from customer support on request 3 4 2 Battery Charging Input CHG_IN The battery charging pin is design to provide a charging current into a battery The precise algorithm is TBD but it will be one of the following e Generic charging algorithm implemented and further refinements for the algorithm to be implemented through embedded applications see section 6 e Specific charging algorithms for SEM approved batteries 1 Measured at system connector pins LZT 123 8081 Ric Note GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION This has not been implemented into any versions of module software and is for future use LZT 123 8081 Ric 20 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3 5 ON OFF and External Power Signals Pins Name Dir D
29. USING THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT 14 7 Keypad Connector X410 A 10 pin connector is provided to connect directly to the Keypad options when they are selected by the AT command AT E2IO Pin Signal Description 1 KEYCOLO Keyboard column 1 GND 2 KEYROW1 Data Terminal Ready Keyboard row 1 General purpose 3 KEYCOL1 Data Carrier Detect Keyboard column 1 General purpose output 1 4 KEYROW2 General purpose input output 1 Keyboard row 2 5 KEYCOL2 Ring Indicator Keyboard column 2 General purpose output 2 6 KEYROWS3 General purpose input output 3 Keyboard row 3 7 KEYCOL3 General purpose output 5 Keyboard column 3 Data Set Ready 8 KEYROW4 General purpose input output 4 Keyboard row 4 9 KEYCOL4 Clear To Send Keyboard column 4 General purpose output 4 10 N C Not connected 14 8 Flashing Firmware LZT 123 7589 R2B Table 14 Keyboard Connector X410 The developer s board has the hardware circuitry to support firmware upgrading of several of the module families Switch 101 when placed in the FLASH mode allows the module to re flashed Header X102 selects the Voltage used for Re Flash DCD Flash 101 Normal Operation FLASH Mode Normal VDIG FAST 12V X102 1 2 2 3 83 USING THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT 14 9 Operation Once the module has been mounted to the developer s board and all connections are made you are ready to power up the developer s board Refer to Mounting
30. lt N1 gt lt T1 gt lt N2 gt lt T2 gt lt T3 gt lt k gt IMI AT CMUX CMUX lt transparency gt lt subset gt lt port_speed gt lt N1 gt lt T1 gt lt N2 gt lt T2 gt lt T3 gt lt k gt CME ERROR lt err gt AT CMUX e CMUx list of supported lt transparency gt s list of supported lt subset gt s list of supported lt port_speed gt s list of supported lt N1 gt s list of supported lt T1 gt s list of supported lt N2 gt s list of supported lt T2 gt s list of supported lt T3 gt s list of supported lt k gt CME ERROR lt err gt Description The command is used to turn on the multiplexer Only no transparency is supported The parameter lt k gt is not used The default values for the parameters below are for no transparency and only UIH frames used lt transparency gt Description 0 No transparency lt subset gt Description 0 Only UIH frames used lt port_speed gt Description 1 9 600 bits s 2 19 200 bits s 148 13 10 LZT 123 7590 R1F 13 INTERFACE 3 38 400 bits s 4 57 600 bits s 5 115 200 bits s 6 230 400 bits s 7 460 800 bits s lt N1 gt Description 31 Default maximum frame size lt T1 gt Description 10 100ms default timer lt N2 gt Description 3 Default maximum number of re transmissions lt T2 gt Description 30 3
31. lt err gt is returned lt mode gt Description 3 Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE TA TE link specific inband technique used to embed result codes and data when TA is in on line data mode lt mt gt Description 0 No SMS DELIVER indications are routed to the TE No class Class 0 class 1 and class 3 use lt mem3 gt as preferred storage Class 2 messages shall be stored in the SIM If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an error message accordingly to GSM 03 38 1 SMS DELIVER is stored into ME TA and the indication of the memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result code CMTI lt mem gt lt index gt 2 Class 0 class 1 and class 3 SMS DELIVERs are routed directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code but not stored in ME TA CMT lt alpha gt lt length gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt pdu gt PDU mode enabled Class 2 data coding scheme result in indication as defined in lt mt gt 1 3 Class 3 SMS DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using unsolicited result codes CMT lt length gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt pdu gt Class 3 SMS DELIVER is not stored in ME TA Messages of other data coding schemes result in indication as defined in lt mt gt 1 lt bm gt Description 0 Store message to BM or some manufacturer specific memory No CBM indications are routed to the TE 2 New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited 212
32. 128 to 255 Type of address octet in integer format refer to GSM 04 08 subclause 10 5 4 7 ISDN Telephony numbering plan national international unknown Default if no in sca ISDN Telephony numbering plan international number Default if in sca ISDN Telephony numbering plan national number Other values refer to GSM 04 08 section 10 5 4 7 Only valid for lt ccstatus gt 1 Calling Example AT ECAM ECAM 0 AT ECAM 1 OK 3 12 AT ECIND Expanded Indicator Control LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Set unsolicited message AT ECIND 1 OK reporting on off for entire lt r1 gt lt r2 gt lt r3 gt ERROR list of indicators we S012 gt lt 113 gt lt r20 gt Set unsolicited message AT ECIND 2 lt i OK reporting on off for a nd_no gt lt on ERROR single specific indicator off gt Display unsolicited o e ECIND ATE CINE ss 3 lt 11 gt lt r2 gt lt r3 gt lt r12 gt lt r13 gt message reporting states lt r20 gt for all indicators 37 LZT 123 7590 R1F 3 CONTROL AND STATUS Display current value for AT ECIND 4 all indicators Show if the command is AT ECIND supported and input parameters Unsolicited report ECIND 4 lt v1 gt lt v2 gt lt v3 gt lt v12 gt lt v1 3 gt lt v20 gt ECIND List of supported operational codes lt ind_no gt s lt on off gt s lt
33. 14 1000 Timeout time in ms LZT 123 7590 R1F 182 15 Phonebook 15 1 AT E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum Description Command Possible Responses Request phonebook AT E2PBCS E2PBCS lt cks gt checksum CME ERROR lt err gt Show if the command is AT E2PBCS OK supported ERROR Description Command causes the ME to return the phonebook checksum lt cks gt stored internally phonebook checksum is recalculated whenever there is a change in the phonebook By requesting the checksum the external application can detect if the phonebook in the ME has changed without downloading the whole phonebook During the SIM initialisation process it takes some time to download the phonebook from the SIM card to the ME depending on the number of entries In case the command is invoked before the checksum has been calculated the ME gives an ERROR message lt cks gt Description Hex type 1 byte in hexadecimal between TL containing the checksum 15 2 AT ESAG Ericsson Add to Group LZT 123 7590 R1E Description Command Possible Responses Adds a new item to the AT ESAG lt gindex gt CME ERROR lt err gt group with lt gindex gt lt type gt OK lt itemindex gt ERROR Show if the command is AT ESAG ESAG list of supported supported lt gindex gt s list of supported lt type gt s OK ERROR 183 Description 15 PHONEBOOK This command adds a contact or a M
34. 5 16 1 Digital to Analogue Converter DAC 48 5 16 2 Analogue to Digital Converters 1 2 and 3 ADCX 0665 49 5 16 3 Analogue to Digital Converters 4 and 5 IOsi AlCx 49 5 17 extemal Ee 50 5 18 TX_ON Burst TANnSMISSIOM EG 51 5 19 Rea geren a a a a 51 6 Antenna Connector EE 53 7 ICV OO APO er er 54 TA MEN ee 54 ENN dee 54 4 LZT 123 7589 R2B 8 Hints for Integrating the Radio Device ANEREN 56 8 1 Safety Advice and Drecautons 56 8 1 1 GT EE 56 8 1 2 SIM Ors e EE 57 8 1 3 Antenna ee 57 8 2 Installation of the Radio Device nnnsseesnennnnneesrerrenrnttrrrrennrrrrrrrrrrrenn 58 8 2 1 Where to Install the Radio Device nnna 58 8 2 2 How to Install the Radio Device nnnnannnnnneeeeeeennnnnnnnneennenrrrnnnne 59 8 33 ANENA eege 60 8 3 1 EIERE 60 8 3 2 EE REISE 60 8 3 3 Antenna Placement seeneeannnnnnneenenrrr nt trrrnnrnrrrrtrrrrnnnnnnrn nn nene 61 8 3 4 The Antenna Klee 61 8 3 5 Possible Communication Disturbances eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 61 9 Embedded Appitcattons EE 63 Qed EE 63 9 2 TAPIEMISMLALON DEE EEEE EESE 63 9 2 1 e ue EE 63 9 2 2 M2mpower IDE Integrated Development Environment 64 N0 TOPP Sta E 65 TOT Implementation EN 65 11 Technical Data E 66 12 Declaration of Conformity cccceeee cece eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeseseseeeeeeeeeeees 68 13 Introduction to the Universal Developer ebhut 69 took ASOMLCIIS ONNE Kil vei
35. 9 2 2 M2mpower IDE Integrated Development Environment LZT 123 7589 R2B The IDE is a Windows based package which allows the user to write simulate debug and download the application into a radio device with the embedded application EA software The standard version is designed to run on Windows XP and 2000 other versions are available for 98 if required The M2mpower Application Guide is available for implementing applications using the developer s kit and the embedded application EA functionality This is a required package to be able to implement an embedded application EA More detailed documentation is available for this and further information please contact Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications customer support 64 TCP IP STACK 10TCP IP Stack An on board IP TCP UDP stack has been integrated into the software negating the need for the customer to implement one in their own code base The TCP IP stack is accessible via both AT commands and the embedded application software in the GR47 10 1 Implementation LZT 123 7589 R2B The following types of commands allow various functions Open closing IP connection Negotiates closes a dynamic IP address with the web server Send Receive TCP packets Performs all TCP operations to send and receive packets Send Receive UDP packets Performs all UDP operations to send and receive packets Resolve URL to an IP address Similar to nslookup command in DO
36. ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS ATSO Automatic Answer Control 30 ATS2 Escape Sequence Character 31 ATS3 Command Line Termination Character 31 ATS4 Response Formatting Character 32 ATS5 Command Line Editing Character BACKSPACE 33 ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control 33 ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout 34 ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control 34 ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control 35 ATT Select Tone Dialing 25 ATV DCE Response Format 146 ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control 25 ATZ Reset to Default Configuration 147 291 22 ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS 292 LZT 123 7590 bit APPENDIX A Appendix A Module software and manual versions Below is a table relating software versions across to manual versions Module software version Manual version R4A018 R1A R5B003 R1B R5B009 R1D R1E R6A023 R1F Note The above table relates to type approved versions only if using non type approved software guidance should be sought from customer support 293 LZT 123 7590 bit
37. AT E2STKG AT E2STKI AT E2STKL AT E2STKM AT E2STKN AT E2STKS AT E2STKTO AT EALR AT EALS AT EAMS AT EARS AT ECAM AT ECIND AT ECLCC AT ECPI AT ECSP AT EDIF AT EDST AT EENMEA AT EGIR AT EIPS AT ELAM AT ELIN AT EMAR AT EMIC AT EMIR AT EPEE AT EPNR AT EPNW AT ERIL AT ERIN AT ERIP AT ESAG AT ESCG AT ESCN M2M STK Display Text M2M STK Get Inkey M2M STK Get Input M2M STK Select Item M2M STK Set Up Menu M2M STK Envelope Menu Selection SIM Application Toolkit Settings SIM Application Toolkit Settings Ericsson Audio Line Request Ericsson Request ALS Status Ericsson Audio Mode Selection Ericsson Audio Ring Signal Ericsson Call Monitoring Expanded indicator control List current calls Ciphering Indicator Ericsson Customer Service Profile Ericsson Divert Function Ericsson Daylight Saving Time NMEA GPS Mode on UART2 Ericsson Group Item Read Identity Presentation Set Ericsson Local Audio Mode Ericsson Line Set Ericsson Master Reset Ericsson Microphone Mode Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request Ericsson Pin Event Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network Ericsson Ring Level Set Ericsson Ring Set Ericsson Ring Signal Playback Command Ericsson Add to Group Ericsson Create Group Ericsson Set Credit Card Number 235 236 238 241 243 245 234 250 71 164 72 73 35 37 39 178 165 253 44 120 190 253 74 254 45 75 75 45 166 167 77 78 80 183
38. BUSY OK LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Used to initiate a ME connection which may be data or voice ME number terminated by semicolon The ME number used to establish the connection will consist of digits and modifiers or a stored number specification If the dial string is followed by a semicolon this informs the ME that the number is a voice rather than a data number If the dial string is omitted and the semicolon included the command instructs the ME to do a network detect If the network is available OK is returned LZT 123 7590 R1F 2 CALL CONTROL Abortability Aborting an ATD command is accomplished by the transmission from the DTE to the DCE of any character A single character shall be sufficient to abort the command in progress however characters transmitted during the first 125 milliseconds after transmission of the termination character are ignored This is to allow the DTE to append additional control characters such as line feed after the command line termination character lt dial_string gt Description 01234567 Valid characters for origination 8 9 W The W modifier is ignored but is included only for compatibility purposes e The comma modifier is ignored but is included only for compatibility purposes T The T modifier is ignored but is included only for compatibility purposes P The P modifier is ignored but is included only for compatibility purposes lt Fi
39. CMSS and Write Message to Memory CMGW ME ME message storage SM SIM message storage lt mem3 gt Description string type Memory to which received SMSs are preferred to be stored unless forwarded directly to TE Received CBMs are always stored in BM or some manufacturer specific storage unless directly forwarded to TE ME ME message storage SM SIM message storage lt used1 gt lt used2 gt lt used3 gt Description integer type Total number of messages currently in lt mem1 gt lt mem2 gt and lt mem3 gt respectively lt total1 gt lt total2 gt lt total3 gt Description integer type Total number of message locations in lt mem1 gt lt mem2 gt and lt mem3 gt respectively Note If the command is entered in at power up and the unit has not finished loading the messages the unit will return CMS ERROR 98 busy Examples AT CPMS CPMS ME SM ME SM ME SM OK AT CPMS CPMS ME 0 40 SM 1 15 ME 0 40 OK AT CPMS sm sm sm CPMS 1 15 1 15 1 15 199 LZT 123 7590 bit 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT OK 16 3 AT CSCA Service Centre Address Common for both PDU and Text Modes Description Command Possible Responses Set service centre AT CSCA lt sca gt OK address L lt tosca gt ERROR Show the current setting AT CSCA CSCA lt sca gt
40. HEX the entered text should consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME TA converts to 7 bit characters of GSM alphabet e g 17 IRA 49 and 55 will be converted to character IT GSM 23 if lt dcs gt indicates that 8 bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or lt fo gt indicates that GSM 03 40 TP User Data Header Indication is set the entered text should consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME TA converts into 8 bit octet e g two characters 2A IRA 50 and 65 will be converted to an octet with integer value 42 sending can be cancelled by giving lt ESC gt character IRA 27 lt ctrl Z gt IRA 26 must be used to indicate the ending of the message body lt fo gt Description 0 First octet of SMS DELIVER in integer format 1 First octet of SMS_ SUBMIT in integer format 2 First octet of SMS STATUS REPORT in integer format 3 First octet of SMS COMMAND in integer format lt mr gt Description Integer GSM 03 40 TP Message_Reference lt ra gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Recipient Address Value field BCD or GSM default alphabet are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character set refef command CSCS Type of address given by lt tosca gt lt dt gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Discharge Time in string format yy mm dd hh mm ss zz where characters indicate year month day hour minutes seconds and time zon
41. NETWORK INFORMATION Cell information Engineering Mode SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT Set Up Call Display Text Get Inkey Get Input Select Item Set Up Menu Envelope Menu Selection Application Toolkit Settings AT CGPADDR AT CGQMIN AT CGQREQ AT CGREG ATD AT E2IPA AT E2IPRH AT E2IPI AT E2IPE AT E2IPO AT E2IPS AT E2IPL AT E2CD AT E2EMM AT E2STKC AT E2STKD AT E2STKG AT E2STKI AT E2STKL AT E2STKM AT E2STKN AT E2STKS LZT 123 8081 Ric 47 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 6 Embedded applications The module has the capability to store and run customer written code in the form of a script during the processors idle time through the use of an on board interpreter 6 1 Features Main features of embedded applications are as follows e C based scripting language SEM specific e Over the air upgradeable scripts NOT signalling software e Library of intrinsic functions which make full use of the module characteristics and GSM requirements e Multiple on module script support standard configuration is 2 e 51KB of non volatile data storage in addition to the program memory 6 2 Implementation The module has up to 44k of space available for storage of two scripts in the scripting language Standard C structures are supported enabling most engineers to be immediately familiar with the language All hardware interfaces that are normally available to the module through the AT comma
42. Proactive session terminated by the user described in the GSM standard 2 Failed User requests backwards move It corresponds to 11 Backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user 3 Failed 241 LZT 123 7590 R1F LZT 123 7590 R1F 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT No response from user It corresponds to 12 no response from Failed Screen is busy the text could not be displayed lt user_response gt Description integer type The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255 It identifies the selected lt item_idn gt within the items list Unsolicited Result Codes E2STKL lt NbrOfltems gt lt coding gt lt text_length gt lt alpha_id gt lt default gt lt CR gt lt LF gt E2STKL lt item_id1 gt lt coding gt lt text_length gt lt item1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt JE2STKL lt item_idn gt lt coding gt lt text_length gt lt itemn gt lt CR gt lt LF gt Values follow GSM 11 14 standard lt coding gt Description 0 Text is coded in unpacked format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet as defined in GSM 03 38 with bit 8 set to 0 It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit Text is coded in packed format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet packed in 8 bit octets as defined in GSM 03 38 It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet lt text_length gt Description Integer type Value i
43. SMS amp CB Settings SMS Command Read write SMS Send SMS PHONEBOOK Read write find Groups Personal Rings Settings CLOCK Alarm Time amp Date INTERFACE COMMANDS Flow control S registers Response control 07 10 MULTIPLEXING HSCSD GPRS PDP Context Activation GPRS Attachment Enter Data State Define PDP Context GPRS Event Reporting AT EMAR AT ERIL AT ERIN AT ERIP AT ESIL AT ESMA AT ESMM AT ESOM AT ECAM AT CSQ AT CIND AT CPAS AT CMER AT CMEE AT CEER AT ESTL AT CPMS AT CRES AT CSAS AT CSCA AT CSMS AT CNMI AT CSDH AT CSMP AT CGSMS AT CMGC AT CMGD AT CMGW AT CMGL AT CMGR AT CMGS AT CMSS AT CPBS AT CPBR AT CPBW AT CPBF AT EGIR AT ESAG AT ESCG AT ESDG AT ESDI AT ESGR AT EPRR AT EPRW AT EPBM AT E2PBCS AT CALA AT CALD AT CAPD AT CCLK AT CTZU AT EDST AT amp C AT amp D AT ICF AT IFC AT IPR AT amp S ATSO ATS10 ATS2 ATS3 ATS4 ATS5 ATS6 ATS7 ATS8 AT ILRR ATE ATV ATQ AT CSCS ATX AT CMUX AT CHSR AT CHSU AT CGACT AT CGATT AT CGDATA AT CGDCONT AT CGEREP LZT 123 8081 Ric 46 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Show PDP Address Quality of Service Profile MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE Quality of Service Profile REQUESTED GPRS Network registration Status Extension of ATD for GPRS TCP IP ACCESS IP negotiation and address resolution and information TCP UDP connection Protocol stack settings TCP listen
44. Technical Drake 52 TEE EE EEEEEERERENEASE 55 LZT 123 8081 Ric 4 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 1 Introduction 1 1 Overview The GR47 GR48 belong to a new generation of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications GSM modules This document describes the main characteristics and functionality of the GR47 GR48 two dual band products for 900 1800 MHz and 850 1900 MHz GSM bands respectively They are intended to be used in both machine to machine applications and man to machine applications The module serves its purpose when there is a need for sending and receiving data by SMS CSD HSCSD or GPRS as well as making voice calls over the GSM network GR47 GR48 are business to business products It is intended to be sold to manufacturers system integrators applications developers developing solutions with wireless communication The module is intended to be integrated by the system integrator within an application The module and the external application will form a system for wireless communication A typical system is one where a micro controller in an external application communicates with the module over its serial interface The micro controller will control the module via the supported set of AT commands It is assumed that the system integrators have a high technical knowledge and the ability to integrate the module into a system For the GR47 GR48 modules some interesting applications are the following e Fleet and Ass
45. UART1 to UART2 and vice versa The module acts as a transparent link between the GPS device connected to UART2 and the application communicating with it on UART1 When the application sends the command AT EENMEA 2 the module is able to handle both AT and NMEA commands simultaneously If the OK response is received the application can start handling both NMEA and AT commands Otherwise the response ERROR is returned In the mode with simultaneous AT and NMEA commands lt CR gt is required after each NMEA command and after the last AT command before the new NMEA NMEA commands must start with a All NMEA commands are forwarded to UART2 All NMEA responses from UART2 are displayed as responses to UART1 along with AT responses By sending AT EENMEA 0 the application ends AT and NMEA commands simultaneous handling mode It sends OK and then returns to AT mode The port rate of UART1 for NMEA commands can be controlled using the AT NMPR command 120 9 GPS INTEROPERABILITY Responses Description OK The requested action has been performed ERROR Following causes of error are considered incorrect syntax NMEA commands have already been enabled in other 07 10 channels lt mode gt Description 0 Disable NMEA communication Default value 2 Enable NMEA communication simultaneously with AT commands 9 2 AT E2NMPR_ Ericsson M2M Set NMEA GPS Port Rate LZT 123 7590 R1E Description Command Poss
46. Zz EMBEDDED m APPLICATION 9 J RESPONSE o gt E DCE DTE AT COMMAND CONTROL Figure 2 1 Main Blocks in a Wireless System embedded application GSM NETWORK DTE AT COMMAND CONTROL M MS GR47 GR48 2 GSM ltkbeltelkellelg e ENGINE m i z POWER Q SUPPLY gt Z d m U O 1 EXTERNAL o 1 APPLICATION MS STATUS amp O 4 RESPONSE A 1 Figure 2 2 Main Blocks in a Wireless System external micro controller LZT 123 7589 R2B GR47 GR48 RADIO DEVICES In accordance with the recommendations of ITU T International Telecommunication Union Telecommunications Standardisation Sector V 24 the TE communicates with the MS over a serial interface The functions of the radio device follow the recommendations provided by ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute and ITU T ETSI specifies a set of AT commands for controlling the GSM element of the radio device these commands are supplemented by Sony Ericsson specific commands To find out how to work with AT commands see the AT Commands Manual 2 3 Features The radio device performs a set of telecom services TS according to GSM standard phase 2 ETSI and ITU T The functions of the radio device are implemented by issuing AT commands over a serial interface 2 3 1 Types of Mobile Station GR47 and GR48 are dual band mobile stations with the characteristics shown in the tables below GR47 E G
47. and lt ta gt are returned only when lt n gt 1 and the ME is registered in the network To know if the ME is registered use the AT CREG command If the ME is not registered in the cellular network an ERROR message is returned lt n gt Description 0 Disable network location information unsolicited result code Default value 1 Enable network location information unsolicited result code E2CD lt lac gt lt ci gt lt ta gt lt lac gt Description String type Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format lt ci gt Description 157 14 2 AT E2EMM LZT 123 7590 R1F 14 NETWORK string type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format lt ta gt Description 0 63 According to GSM 04 18 V8 6 0 the coding of the timing advance value is the binary representation of the timing advance in bit periods 1 bit period 48 13 is lt ta gt is the integer representation of the timing advance in binary format 64 255 Reserved Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode Description Command Possible Responses Set the AT E2EMM ERROR response lt n gt lt m gt OK presentation mode Display mode E2EMM neighbour cells Serving Cell are taken from the toplist Compact mode The first cell is the serving cell the rest are neighbour cells taken from the toplist Verbose mode The first cell is the serving cell and the rest are neighbour cells as provided by the network
48. is always returned even if the alarm is setup to be silent The alarm time is set in hours and minutes Date seconds and time zone cannot be set The read command returns the list of current active alarm settings in the ME LZT 123 7590 R1F 46 Note Note Example LZT 123 7590 R1F 3 CONTROL AND STATUS Show returns the supported array index values alarm types and maximum length of the text strings lt time gt Description string type Refer to the AT CCLK command Note Only hours and value minutes are used i e date time zone and seconds are not used lt n gt Description Integer type Index identifying an active alarm The number of active alarms is manufacturer and product specific lt tlength gt Description Integer type Maximum length of lt text gt parameter The maximum length of the lt text gt parameter is manufacturer and product specific lt recurr gt Description Format For setting an alarm for one or more days in the week The lt 1 7 gt lt 1 7 gt digits 1 to 7 correspond to the days in the week Monday 1 TAa Sunday 7 Example The string 1 2 3 4 5 may be used for setting an alarm for all weekdays Format 0 For setting an alarm for all days in the week lt rlength gt Description Integer type Maximum length of the lt recurr gt parameter Unsolicited result codes CALV lt n gt AT CALA CAL
49. lt classx gt lt number gt lt type gt 19 4 AT EIPS Identity Presentation Set Description Command Possible Responses Sets the alpha tag to be AT EIPS lt ID gt CME ERROR lt err gt displayed in the ME lt alphatag mode gt OK ERROR 253 LZT 123 7590 bit 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES Show the current setting Show if the command is supported AT EIPS AT EIPS EIPS lt ID1 gt lt alphatag mode1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt EIPS lt ID2 gt lt alphatag mode2 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR EIPS list of supported ID gt s list of supported lt alphatag mode gt s e CME ERROR lt err gt e OK ERROR Description This command enables or disables the presentation of the alpha tag of the Caller ID and Called ID to the TE if the ID is recognized The alpha tag is the first name and the last name The presentation is done by an unsolicited result code ELIP for Caller ID and EOLP for Called ID lt D gt Description 1 Caller ID ELIP 2 Called ID EOLP lt alphatag mode gt Description 0 1 Off First name and last name displayed Unsolicited Result Codes ELIP lt alpha tag gt EOLP lt alpha tag gt 19 5 AT ELIN Ericsson Line Set LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Set the current line to lt line gt Show the current setting AT ELIN lt line gt
50. lt mem2 gt Memory location lt index gt of the stored message is returned By default message status will be set to stored unsent but parameter lt stat gt allows also other status values to be given The entering of text is done as specified in the send message command CMGS If writing fails final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned Note SMS COMMANDs and SMS STATUS REPORTs cannot be stored in text mode lt stat gt Description 2 Stored unsent message only applicable to SMs lt oa gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Originating Address Value in string format BCD numbers or GSM default alphabet characters are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character refer command CSCS Type of address given by lt tooa gt lt da gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Destination Address Value in string format BCD numbers or GSM default alphabet characters are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character refer command CSCS Type of address given by lt toda gt lt tooa gt Description String type GSM 04 11 TP Originating Address Type of Address octet in integer format default refer lt toda gt lt toda gt Description String type GSM 04 11 TP Destination Address Type of Address octet in integer format when first character of lt da gt is IRA 43 default is 145 otherwise defaul
51. lt stat gt values for different message types Entering PDU is the same as specified by the send message command CMGS If writing fails final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned See AT CPMS Preferred Message Storage page 198 lt stat gt Description 2 Stored unsent message only applicable to SMs lt index gt Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory lt length gt Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode CMGF 0 the length of the actual TP data unit in octets i e the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length lt pdu gt Description In the case of SMS GSM 04 11 SC address followed by GSM 03 40 TPDU in hexadecimal format ME TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number e g octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A IRA 50 and 65 In the case of CBS GSM 03 41 TPDU in hexadecimal format Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Write message to AT CMGW lt oa da gt e CMGW lt index gt memory lt tooa toda gt lt stat gt CMS ERROR lt err gt lt CR gt OK Text is entered lt ctrl ERROR ZIESC gt Show if the command is AT CMGW OK supported ERROR 202 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT Description Stores message either SMS DELIVER or SMS SUBMIT to memory storage
52. lt value gt lt information gt Description This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of text followed by a final result code As an option lt value gt can be used to select from among multiple types of identifying information as shown in the table below This command provides compatibility with Microsoft Windows 95 lt value gt Description 0 Same information as GMM command model identification 1 Same information as GMR command revision identification 3 Modem model description 5 Active settings 7 Modem configuration profile brief listing of the modem functionality fax classes Bluetooth IrDA modem type etc 8 DCE hardware type version 9 PnP plug and play information Examples ATI 1 CXC1122112 ATI 5 Configuration Settings on Channel 0 amp C 1 amp D 0 EENMEA 0 130 11 IDENTIFICATION CGACT 1 0 CGATT 0 CGDCONT 1 IP internet 0 0 CGEREP 0 0 CGREG 0 3 CHSR 0 CHSU 0 CMEE 1 CMUX 0 0 1 31 10 3 30 10 2 CR 0 CRC 0 CRLP 61 61 48 6 0 CRLP 120 120 48 6 2 3 CVHU 2 ICF 3 3 FC 2 2 ILRR 0 IPR 115200 E 1 131 12 Input Output 12 1 AT E2IO Ericsson M2M Input Output Read Write LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Request operation with the I O signals Show if the command is supported AT E2IO lt op gt lt io gt lt val gt lt adc_val g
53. pr gt Description 0 Stores current settings in User Profile 0 11 4 AT List all Supported AT Commands Description Command Possible Responses List all implemented AT AT lt AT Command1 gt lt CR gt commands lt LF gt lt AT Command2 gt lt AT Command1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt AT Command2 gt Description Lists all the commands supported by the MS 11 5 AT CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification Description Command Possible Responses Request manufacturer AT CGMI lt manufacturer gt identification CME ERROR lt err gt Show if the command is AT CGMI OK supported ERROR Description Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text lt manufacturer gt Description Sony Ericsson This company s name is displayed Example AT CGMI Sony Ericsson OK 126 LZT 123 7590 bit 11 IDENTIFICATION 11 6 AT CGMM Read MS Model Identification Description Command Possible Responses Request the model AT CGMM lt model type gt identification lt model name gt e CME ERROR lt err gt Show if the command is AT CGMM OK supported ERROR Description Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text lt model gt determined by the MS manufacturer It is intended to permit the user of the ITAE ETAE to identify the specific model of the MS to which it is connected Typically the text will consist of a
54. 0 OK Set audio profile now used to profile 1 AT E2APR 0 1 OK Audio profile 1 settings AT E2APR 1 1 E2APR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OK Copy audio profile 1 to audio profile 2 AT E2APR 2 1 2 OK Reset audio profile 1 with factory default this also resets the current audio paths to the new profile as 1 is currently used AT E2APR 3 1 OK Sets profile number 1 as the default when module is powered on AT E2APR 4 1 OK 70 4 AUDIO 4 3 AT EALR Ericsson Audio Line Request LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Request the audio lines AT EALR lt mode gt e EALR lt mode gt ATMS AFMS L lt activation gt lt activation gt lt resp gt lt aud_status gt OK ERROR Show the current setting AT EALR EALR lt mode gt lt activation gt lt re sp gt Show if the command is AT EALR EALR list of supported supported lt mode gt s lt activation gt s and lt aud_status gt s parameters Description Included for compatibility No functionality lt mode gt Description 0 No request for ATMS or AFMS 1 Request ATMS and not AFMS 2 Request AFMS and not ATMS 3 Request ATMS and AFMS lt activation gt Description 0 Not direct activated audio accessory e g cordless portable hands free Direct activated audio accessory e g vehicle hands free lt aud_status gt Description 0 No change of the audio s
55. 100ka pull down resistor to ground and the RX pin has a 100ka pull up resistor to 2 75V This must be taken into consideration when designing the host Circuit 5 15 4 lO ADC To increase analog input capabilities the radio device optimises the I O by multiplexing or sharing different features on single pins There are two digital I O pins which now have an additional ADC input When configured as digital I O the software will not read the voltages at the two new ADC inputs When configured as ADC inputs the software will configure the digital I O pins as input or high impedance tri state In this state any applied voltage between OV and 2 75V can be read as an 8 bit value Because the additional ADC inputs ADC4 and ADCS are common with digital I O the input circuit of the ADC is not the same as for the original circuits ADC1 3 It is important to understand the input structure of the pin so that the correct analog voltage is read by the application 5 16 General Purpose Analogue I O Ports Pin Signal Dir Description 20 DAC O Digital to analogue conversion output 26 ADC1 l Analogue to digital conversion input 1 47 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 27 ADC2 l 28 ADC3 l 13 ADC4 1 05 1 1 0 22 ADC5 1 02 1 1 0 Analogue to digital conversion input 2 Analogue to digital conversion input 3 Analogue to digital conversion input 4 Analogue to digital conversion input 5 The radio device is able to co
56. 19 SIMCLK O Dig 3 5 V SIM card clock 20 DAC O Analogue Digital to Analogue converter 21 101 UO Digital 2 75 General purpose input output 1 KEYROW2 l Keyboard row 2 22 102 UO Digital 2 75 General purpose input output 2 ADC 5 l Analogue Analogue to digital converter 5 23 103 UO Digital 2 75 General purpose input output 3 KEYROW3 l Keyboard row 3 24 104 UO Digital 2 75 General purpose input output 4 KEYROW4 l Keyboard row 4 25 VRTC l Supply 1 8 V Voltage for real time clock 26 ADC1 l Analogue Analogue to digital converter 1 27 ADC2 l Analogue Analogue to digital converter 2 28 ADC3 l Analogue Analogue to digital converter 3 29 SDA UO 2 75 internal pullup C Data 30 SCL O 2 75 internal pullup IC Clock 31 BUZZER O Dig 2 75 Buzzer output from module LZT 123 8081 Ric 14 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 32 03 O Dig 2 75 General purpose output 5 KEYCOL3 O Keyboard column 3 DSR O Data Set Ready 33 LED O Dig 2 75 Flashing LED 106 UO General purpose I O 6 34 VIO O Power Out 2 75 Module powered indication The VIO is a 2 75 V output that could power external devices to transmit data towards the GSM device to a 75mA max 35 TX_ON O Dig 2 75 This output shall indicate when the GSM module is going to transmit the burst 36 RI O Dig 2 75 Ring Indicator KEYCOL2 O Keyboard column 2 02 O General purpose output 2 37 DTR l Dig 2 75 Data Terminal Ready KEYROW1 l Keyboard row 1 IN1 l General purpose input 1
57. 2 85 Volts mA Load current 15 mA LZT 123 8081 Ric 22 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3 6 Analogue Audio 3 6 1 Audio Pins Name Dir Description 57 AFMS O Audio From Mobile Station 59 ATMS l Audio To Mobile Station 60 AGND Reference for analogue audio ATMS and AFMS are the audio input and output for the module The analogue audio signals can be used in two different modes Handsfree and Portable Handsfree Handsfree This mode is referred to as Audio To Mobile Station ATMS and Audio From Mobile Station AFMS It is used by audio accessories such as Handsets and Handsfree equipment Portable Handsfree This mode activates a different amplification factor in the Mobile Equipment ME It also activates a microphone bias level in ATMS This is the default mode To Mobile Station ATMS ATMS is the analogue audio input to the module It connects to the audio input of the CODEC in the module The CODEC then converts the analogue audio to digital audio in PCM format which is connected to the internal PCM bus in the module The internal PCM bus connects the encoded audio to PCMO on the system connector ATMS is also used as the microphone input from the Portable Handsfree If this is the case a DC bias is provided from the ATMS All sources must be AC coupled except the Portable Handsfree microphone which shall be DC coupled in order to supply DC current to the Portable Handsfree microphone AC coupling
58. 21 1 AT E2OTR Operational Temperature Reporting sssnnsseeeesenneeneene 22 Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands Appendix A Module software and manual versions LZT 123 7590 R1F 1 Introduction to AT Commands Note This manual lists detailed information on the function of the AT Command set that can be used with your GR47 or GR48 This manual refers to the GR47 and GR48 as radio devices If there is a difference in the functionality of the radio devices the GR47 and GR48 information will be listed separately 1 1 Related Documentation 1 2 Overview LZT 123 7590 R1E Note This manual is supplied with an Integrator s Manual when you purchase a GR47 or the GR48 If you choose to use the M2mpower support environment with your module you will also receive an Application Guide AT commands issued from a computer in your application are used to control and implement the functions of the module Using AT commands the following actions are possible e Control of DCE e GPRS e Call control e Supplementary Service e SIM application tool kit e Control any embedded application in the device The GR47 contains a large number of Ericsson specific commands in addition to those implemented in accordance with the GSM and ITU T recommendations These commands are provided to enhance the functions of the module The Ericsson specific commands are identified by the asterisk that precedes the command see the
59. 3dBm0 at PCMI Input dBmd RXPGA Volume BEAR MV ims Control dB PCMI 3dBm0 0 0 388 3 6 2 Audio From Mobile Station AFMS AFMS is the analogue audio output from the module When it is active the output is derived from the PCM digital audio by the decoder part of the CODEC The PCM data comes from PCMI on the system connector It is also used as an ear piece driver for the Portable Hands Free accessory Parameter Limit Speaker impedance 64 Q to IKQ AFMS Output 2 2 uF 10 Capacitance Levels THD lt 5 Drive capability into 5 kQ gt 2 4 Vpp TBC 0 3 3 5 kHz Drive capability into 1 5 kQ 0 3 3 5 kHz gt 2 2 Vpp TBC Drive capability into 150 Q gt 1 3 Vpp TBC at 1kHz 3 7 Microphone Signals Pin Speaker signals Dir Function 53 MICP l Microphone Positive Input 54 MICN l Microphone Negative Input MICP and MICN are the microphone input pins These inputs shall be compatible with an electret microphone The microphone contains a FET buffer with open drain output which must be supplied with at least 2V relative to ground LZT 123 8081 Ric 25 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 4660 1K MICP O 68nF MICN 68nF 1K Figure 3 3 Microphone connection to module CCO is the internal source voltage that will provide the necessary drive current for the microphone This is not provided by the module Parameter Limit CCO 2 0 2
60. 5V 3 8 Speaker Signals Pin Speaker signals Dir Function 55 BEARP O Microphone Positive Output 56 BEARN O Microphone Negative Output BEARP and BEARN are the speakers output pins These outputs are in differential mode 3 9 Digital Audio Pin PCM signal Dir Function 52 PCMCLK O PCM clock 51 PCMSYNC O PCM frame sync 47 PCMULD l PCM audio input to DSP 48 PCMDLD O PCM audio output to DSP 50 PCMI l PCM audio input to Codec 49 PCMO O PCM audio output to Codec LZT 123 8081 Ric 26 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION The digital PCM audio signals allow the connection of a digital audio source receiver bypassing the analogue audio CODEC processing functions performed within the module GM47 48 PCM SYNC amp PCMCLK i ATMS AFMS DSP CODEC MICP MICN BEARP BE ARN system connector f PCMULD PCMO PCM DLD PCM Figure 3 4 Pin connections to digital audio In the case where no external audio processing is performed then it is necessary to connect the following signals at the system connector e PCMDLD pin 47 and PCMI pin 50 e PCMULD pin 48 and PCMO pin 49 Electrical characteristics The Dig 2 75 V CMOS Output Input electrical characteristics shall apply with DGND as the reference PCM interface format The PCM format for PCMULD and PCMDLD shall follow a linear PCM data I O format of an industr
61. 81 261 48 263 49 50 85 86 87 87 88 126 127 127 89 90 92 95 96 128 265 115 116 117 288 LZT 123 7590 R1F 22 ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS AT CHSR AT CHSU AT CHUP AT CIMI AT CIND AT CLAC AT CLCK AT CLIP AT CLIR AT CMEE AT CMER AT CMGC AT CMGD AT CMGF AT CMGL AT CMGR AT CMGS AT CMGW AT CMOD AT CMSS AT CMUX AT CNMI AT CNUM AT COLP AT COPN AT COPS AT CPAS AT CPBF AT CPBR AT CPBS AT CPBW AT CPIN AT CPMS AT CPOL AT CPWD AT CR HSCSD Parameters Report HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading Hang Up Call Subscriber Identification Indicator Control List All Available AT Commands Facility Lock Calling Line Identification Calling Line Identification Restriction Mobile Equipment Error Mobile Equipment Event Reporting Send Command Delete Message Message Format List Message Read Message Send Message Write Message to Memory Call Mode Send From Storage Switch to 07 10 Multiplex Protocol New Message Indications to TE Subscriber Number Connected Line Identification on Presentation Read operator names Operator Selection ME Activity Status Phonebook Find Phonebook Read ME Storage Phonebook Write PIN Control Preferred Message Storage Preferred operator list Change Password Service Reporting Control 118 119 26 170 50 51 170 267 268 53 54 209 226 201 221 215 204 201 26 207 148 211 172 173 174 175 55 193 193 195 196
62. CGQREQ lt cid gt e CME ERROR lt err gt 92 LZT 123 7590 R1F 6 DATA GPRS service L lt precedence gt OK profile L lt delay gt ERROR L lt reliability gt lt peak gt lt mean gt Show the CGQREQ CGQREQ lt cid gt lt precedence gt current lt delay gt lt reliability gt lt peak gt setting lt mean gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CGQREQ lt cid gt lt precedence gt lt delay gt lt reliability gt lt peak gt lt mean gt OK ERROR Show if the CGQREQ CGQREQ lt PDP_type gt command is list of supported lt precedence gt s supported list of supported lt delay gt s list of supported lt reliability gt s list of supported lt peak gt s list of supported lt mean gt s lt CR gt lt LF gt CGQREQ lt PDP_type gt list of supported lt precedence gt s list of supported lt delay gt s list of supported lt reliability gt s list of supported lt peak gt s list of supported lt mean gt s f OK ERROR Description Allows the TE to specify a quality of service profile that is used when the MS sends an activate PDP context request message to the network The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the local context identification parameter lt cid gt Since this is the same parameter that is used in the CGDCONT command the CGQREQ command is effectively an extension to the CGDCONT command The
63. DCE to accept DTE commands and while transmitting information text and result code if this is not automatically determined Not supported IPR 0 forces ICF 0 see IPR lt format gt Description 3 8 Data 1 Stop Default value lt parity gt Description 3 Space Default value 150 LZT 123 7590 bit 13 INTERFACE Example AT ICF ICF 3 3 OK 13 12 AT IFC DTE DCE Local Flow Control Description Command Possible Responses Defines DTE DCE local AT IFC lt by_te gt OK flow control lt by_ta gt ERROR Show the current setting AT IFC IFC lt by_te gt lt by_ta gt Show if the command is AT IFC lFC list of supported supported lt by_te gt s lt by_ta gt s Description Defines the flow control between the modem and the computer when in on line data mode No flow control is enabled in any of the command modes lt by_te gt Description 0 No flow control on DTE 1 Xon Xoff flow control on DCE Control characters are removed by the DCE interface 2 RTS flow control on DCE Default value 3 Xon Xoff flow control on DCE Control characters are passed to the remote DCE DTE lt by_ta gt Description 0 No flow control on DCE 1 Xon Xoff flow control on DTE 2 CTS flow control on DCE Default value Note Regardless of how this command is configured if 3 wire communication between the module and the application is required then the RTS and CTS lines on the
64. Disable the voice mail number Not Supported 1 Enable the voice mail number lt number gt Description String Character string lt 0 9 gt lt type gt Description Integer format Type of address octet refer to GSM 04 08 section 10 5 4 7 129 ISDN telephony numbering plan national international unknown 145 ISDN telephony numbering plan international number 161 ISDN telephony numbering plan national number 128 255 Other values refer to GSM 04 08 section 10 5 4 7 lt nlength gt Description Integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field lt number gt Example ESVM means Ericsson Set Voice Mail this means that the purpose of the command is for and only for setting the voice mail box server number The command has no other function it was and never was intended to dial the voice mail number that is set on the SIM So for Vodafone the command would need the following procedure AT EVSM test if command is present At ESVM Read voice mail number ESVM 1 253 447787xXxxxxx 144 OK Now to dial this you would need to dial ATD121 for Vodafone 188 15 PHONEBOOK 15 6 AT ESDG Ericsson Delete Group Description Command Possible Responses Deletes a group defined AT ESDG lt gindex gt CME ERROR lt err gt in the hierarchical OK phonebook Show if the command is AT ESDG ESDG list of supported lt gindex gt s OK Description This command deletes the group at position lt g
65. Drop DTR and ATH ignored but OK response given 2 Drop DTR behavior according to SD setting ATH disconnects Default value 2 13 AT VTD DTMF tone duration Parameter Command Syntax Description Command Return Set the duration of the LZT 123 7590 R1F VTD lt n gt OK 27 2 CALL CONTROL tone ERROR Query current setting VTD VTD lt n gt List supported values VTD VTD 1 255 Description This refers to an integer lt n gt that defines the length of tones emitted as a result of the VTS command This does not affect the D command A value different than zero causes a tone of duration lt n gt 10 seconds The value zero causes a manufacturer specific value Abortability This command may not be aborted Defined values Table 1 lt sn gt parameter lt sn gt Description Integer Value between 1 and 255 denoting 1 10 s of second of the duration of the DTMF tones Unsolicited Result codes Not Applicable Execution Time Executed immediately not time critical 2 14 AT VTS DTMF and Tone Generation LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Request transmission of AT VTS lt DTMF gt OK DTMF tone s ERROR Show if the command is AT VTS OK supported ERROR Description This command allows the transmission of DTMF tones These tones may be used for example when announcing the start of a recording period The command is
66. Duplex spacing Receiver sensitivity at antenna connector Transmitter output power at antenna connector 123 carriers 8 TDMA GSM Channels 128 to 251 GMSK lt 5 RMS Phase error burst 45 MHz lt 102 dBm Class 4 2 W 33 dBm Automatic hand over between GSM 850 and GSM 1900 298 Carriers 8 TDMA PCS Channels 512 to 810 GMSK lt 5 RMS Phase error burst 80 MHz lt 102 dBm Class 1 1W 30 dBm 1 2 2 SMS The module supports the following SMS services LZT 123 8081 Ric GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION e Sending MO both PDU and Text mode supported e Receiving MT both PDU and Text mode supported e Cell broadcast is a service in which a message is sent to all subscribers located in one or more specific cell s in the GSM network for example cell location information e SMS status reports according to GSM 03 40 The maximum length of an SMS message is 160 characters when using 7 bit encoding For 8 bit data the maximum length is 140 characters The module supports upto 6 concatenated messages to extend this function 1 2 3 Voice calls 1 2 4 Data The GR47 GR48 offers the capability of MO and MT voice calls as well as supporting emergency calls In addition to this multiparty call waiting and call deflection features are available Some of these features are operator specific The module offers normal analogue input output lines analogue audio input output lines
67. ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description The ME passes the parameters within SET UP CALL command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKC so that it takes up the decision on progressing or rejecting the call Answer command allows the external application to send the appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code and before the timeout expires If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires an ERROR response is generated Values follow GSM 11 14 standard lt answer gt Description 0 OK Performed as required It corresponds to 00 command performed successfully described in the GSM standard 1 Failed User terminated session It corresponds to 10 Proactive session terminated by the user described in the GSM standard 2 Failed User requests backwards move It corresponds to 11 backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user 3 Failed No response from user It corresponds to 12 no response from user 4 Failed Screen is busy the text could not be displayed 6 Failed User rejected call set up request It corresponds to 22 7 Failed User cleared down call before connection or network release It corresponds to 23 Unsolicited Result Codes E2STKC lt ton gt lt dial_string gt lt SetUpRequirement gt lt coding gt lt text_length gt lt alpha_id gt Values follow GSM 11 14 sta
68. LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT result code CBM lt length gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt pdu gt PDU mode enabled New CBMs are not stored in CBM memory lt ds gt Description No SMS STATUS REPORTs are routed to the TE SMS STATUS REPORT is stored in ME TA SMS STATUS REPORTSs are routed to the TE using unsolicited result code CDS lt length gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt pdu gt PDU mode enabled SMS STATUS REPORT is not stored in ME TA SMS STATUS REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited result code CDSI lt mem gt lt index gt PDU mode enabled SMS STATUS REPORT is stored in ME TA lt bfr gt Description TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the TE when lt mode gt 1 3 is entered OK response shall be given before flushing the codes Unsolicited Result codes CMT lt length gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt pdu gt CMTI lt mem gt lt index gt CBM lt length gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt pdu gt CDS lt length gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt pdu gt CDSI lt mem gt lt index gt Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Set new message indication to TE Show the current setting Show if the command is supported AT CNMI lt mode gt CMS ERROR lt err gt L lt mt gt lt bm gt lt ds gt OK UI ERROR AT CNMI CNMI lt mode gt lt mt gt lt bm gt lt ds gt
69. Pin In Use by Apps internally or not allowed for use 2 Pin used internally by signalling software for RS232 control can be made available as GPIO with AT E2RS232 cmd 3 Pin available for Use AT E210 6 12 OK AT E210 7 12 E210 7 12 3 The test command returns the supported I Os and allowed value ranges Abortability This command may not be aborted lt op gt Description 0 Read 1 Write 2 Configure 3 Configure Check 4 Trigger 5 Trigger Check 6 Pin Switch 7 Pin Status lt io gt Description 101 101 Supported Operations 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 102 102 Supported Operations 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 103 103 Supported Operations 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 104 104 Supported Operations 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 105 105 Supported Operations 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 106 106 Supported Operations 0 2 3 7 107 107 Supported Operations 0 1 2 3 7 108 108 Supported Operations 0 1 2 3 7 136 12 INPUT OUTPUT 109 109 Supported Operations 0 1 2 3 7 11 Digital Input 1 Supported Operation 0 7 12 Digital Input 2 Supported Operation 0 6 7 13 Digital Input 3 Supported Operation 0 6 7 14 Digital Input 4 Supported Operation 0 6 7 01 Digital Output 1 Supported Operations 0 1 7 02 Digital Output 2 Supported Operations 0 1 7 03 Digital Output 3 Supported Operations 0 1 7 04 Digital Output 4 Supported Operations 0 1 7 AD1 Analogue Digital Output 1 Supported Operations 0 7 AD2 Analogue Dig
70. QoS profile consists of a number of parameters each of which may be set to a separate value A special form of the set command CGQREQ lt cid gt causes the requested profile for context number lt cid gt to become undefined lt cid gt Description Integer type Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition lt precedence gt Description 0 Subscribed from network value used 1 High priority 2 Normal priority 93 LZT 123 7590 R1F 6 DATA GPRS 3 Low priority lt delay gt Description 0 Subscribed from network value used 1 4 Delay class lt reliability gt Description 0 Subscribed from network value used 1 5 Reliability class lt peak gt Description 0 Subscribed from network value used 1 Up to 1 000 8 kbits s 2 Up to 2 000 16 kbits s 3 Up to 4 000 32 kbits s 4 Up to 8 000 64 kbits s 5 Up to 16 000 128 kbits s 6 Up to 32 000 256 kbits s 7 Up to 64 000 512 kbits s 8 Up to 128 000 1 024 kbits s 9 Up to 256 000 2 048 kbits s lt mean gt Description 0 Subscribed from network value used 1 Best effort 2 100 0 22 bits s 3 200 0 44 bits s 4 500 1 11 bits s 5 1 000 2 2 bits s 6 2 000 4 4 bits s 7 5 000 11 1 bits s 8 10 000 22 bits s 94 6 9 AT CGREG LZT 123 7590 R1F 6 DATA GPRS 9 20 000 44 bits s 10 50 000 111 bits s 11 100 000 0 22 kbits s 12 200 000
71. SERVICES POINT TO POINT lt stat gt Description 0 Received unread message i e new message 1 Received read message 2 Stored unsent message only applicable to SMs 3 Stored sent message only applicable to SMs lt index gt Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory lt alpha gt Description String type Manufacturing specific Should be left empty but not omitted lt length gt Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode CMGF 0 the length of the actual TP data unit in octets i e the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length lt pdu gt Description In the case of SMS GSM 04 11 SC address followed by GSM 03 40 TPDU in hexadecimal format ME TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number e g octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A IRA 50 and 65 In the case of CBS GSM 03 41 TPDU in hexadecimal format Note It is possible to send SMS in PDU mode if help for this is required then please contact customer support Note Prior to the R6 build of software the unit was only able to read upto 30 messages on a SIM messages in locations over 30 could not be seen or access In R6 this has been increased to 100 Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Read message AT CMGR if text mode CMGF 1 command lt ind
72. Show the current AT CMER CMER setting lt mode gt lt keyp gt lt disp gt lt ind gt lt bfr gt OK ERROR Show if the AT CMER CMER list of supported s command is list of supported lt keyp gt s list supported of supported lt disp gt s list of supported lt ind gt s list of supported lt bfr gt s OK ERROR Description The command enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes from the ME to the TE in the case of key pressings display changes and indicator state changes lt mode gt controls the processing of unsolicited result codes specified within this command lt bfr gt controls the effect on buffered codes when lt mode gt 1 2 or 3 is entered If the ME does not support setting CME ERROR lt err gt is returned Test command returns the modes supported by the TA as compound values lt mode gt Description 0 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA if TA result code buffer is full codes can be buffered in some other place or the oldest ones can be discarded 3 Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE TA TE link specific inband technique used to embed result codes and data when TA is in on line data mode lt ind gt Description 0 No indicator event reporting Indicator event reporting using result code CIEV lt ind gt lt value gt lt ind gt indicates the indicator order number as specified for CIND and lt value gt is the new val
73. Supply for real time clock Analogue to digital converter 1 Analogue to digital converter 2 Analogue to digital converter 3 1 C data 12C clock Buzzer output from radio device General purpose output 3 Keyboard column 3 Data set ready UART1 Flashing LED General purpose I O 6 Radio device power indication VIO is a 2 75 V at 75 mA output supply that can be used to power external circuitry that interfaces to the radio device This output indicates when the GSM radio device is going to transmit the burst Ring Indicator UART1 Keyboard column 2 General purpose output 2 Data Terminal Ready UART1 Keyboard row 1 General purpose input 1 Data Carrier Detect UART 1 Keyboard column 1 General purpose output 1 Request To Send UART 1 General purpose I O 9 Clear To Send UART 1 Keyboard column 4 General purpose output 4 Transmitted Data UART1 Data from DTE host to DCE radio device 23 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 RD TD3 1 07 RD3 1 08 TD2 RD2 PCMULD PCMDLD PCMO PCMI PCMSYNC PCMCLK MICP MICN BEARP BEARN AFMS SERVICE ATMS AGND SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE S O KOS am o OO O Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Analogue Analo
74. The electrical characteristics shall be the same as TD Received Data 3 RD3 RD is an output used to send data on the UART 3 to the application system The electrical characteristics shall be the same as RD LZT 123 8081 Ric 35 3 11 SIM Card related signals GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Parameter Mode Signal Min Typ Max Unit SIM supply Voltage 3V SIMVCC 2 7 3 0 3 3 V 5V 4 5 5 0 5 5 V High Level Input Voltage 3 V SIMDAT 2 1 3 0 V Vin 5V 3 5 5 0 Low Level Input Voltage 3V SIMDAT 0 0 9 Vi 5V 0 1 5 High Level Output 3V SIMDAT 2 7 3 0 Voltage Von 5V 4 7 5 0 Low Level Output 3V SIMDAT 0 0 2 Voltage VoL 5V 0 0 2 High Level Output 3V SIMCLK 2 4 3 0 V Voltage Von SIMRST 5V 4 4 5 0 V Low Level Output 3V SIMCLK 0 0 35 V Voltage VoL SIMRST 5V 0 0 3 V LZT 123 8081 Ric 36 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3 11 1 SIM Detection SIM Presence SIMPRESENCE is an input intended to be used to determine whether a SIM card has been inserted or removed in the external SIM card holder It shall be normally wired to the Card Inserted Switch of the external SIM card holder When left open an internal pull up resistor maintains the signal high and means SIM card missing to the module When pulled low the module assumes a SIM card is inserted SIMPRESENCE is a digital CMOS 2 75 input with the following characteristics Parameter Min Typ Max Units Pull up resistance at 2
75. alphabet is 7 bit the highest bit shall be set to zero Note How the internal alphabet of ME is converted to or from the TE alphabet is manufacturer specific Note If writing an ENAD account to the module with an symbol in either the username or password and the application is using the ASCII character set then the character set that the module should be set to is UTF 8 If it is not then the module will interpret the symbol incorrectly Read command shows current setting and test command display conversion schemes implemented in the TA lt chset gt Description GSM GSM default alphabet GSM 03 38 subclause 6 2 1 Default value IRA International reference alphabet ITU T T 50 Note recommended default value by GSM 07 07 8859 n ISO 8859 Latin n 1 6 character set UTF 8 Universal text format 8 bits ERICSSON Unicode 16 bit universal multiple octet coded character set ISO IEC10646 Example AT CSCS CSCS GSM OK 229 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 16 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT AT CSMS Select Message Service Common for both PDU and Text Modes Description Command Possible Responses Select message AT CSMS lt service gt service Show the current AT CSMS setting Show if the command AT CSMS is supported CSMS lt mt gt lt mo gt lt bm gt CMS ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR CSMS lt ser
76. application via UART2 It has the same electrical characteristics as RD 5 9 5 UART3 TD3 RD3 UARTS is a full duplex serial communication port with transmission and reception lines It has the same timing and electrical signal characteristics as VART1 TD and RD Transmitted Data 3 TD3 TD3 is used by your application to send data to the radio device via UARTS Received Data 3 RD3 RD3 is used to send data to your application via UART3 5 10 SIM Card Related Signals Pin Signal Dir Description 15 SIMVCC SIM card power supply 16 SIMPRESENCE l SIM card presence 17 SIMRST O SIM card reset 19 SIMCLK O SIM card clock 18 SIMDATA I O SIM card data These connections allow you to communicate with the SIM card holder in your application 42 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE Note The distance between the SIM card holder and the radio device can be up to 25cm This SIM interface allows the use of 3 V and 5 V SIM cards By default it works on 3 V levels but will automatically switch to 5 V if a 5 V SIM card is fitted SIM voltage levels as shown in the following table are dependent on the type of SIM card detected by the radio device Signal Parameter Mode Min Typ Max Unit SIMVCC SIM supply voltage 3V 2 7 3 0 3 3 V 5V 4 5 5 0 5 5 V SIMDAT High Level Input voltage 3V 2 1 3 0 V Vin 5V 3 5 5 0 V SIMDAT Low Level Input voltage 3V 0 0 9 V Vi 5V 0 1 5 V SIMDAT H
77. are available as a separate offering The kit includes other necessary accessories software and hardware that you will need for your test purposes These are available from your regional salesperson or M2M customer support see section 9 1 3 Precautions The GR47 GR48 should be handled like any mobile station In the Integrators Manual you will find more information about safety and product care In the Technical Data chapter in this document the environmental and electrical limits are specified Never exceed these limits to ensure the module is not damaged 1 4 Abbreviations Abbreviation Explanation AMR Adaptive Multi Rate vocoder ATMS Audio To Mobile Staition AFMS Audio From Mobile Station CBS Cell Broadcast Service CBM Cell Broadcast Messaging CSD Circuit Switch Data DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment DTE Data Terminal Equipment DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency EA Embedded Application s EFR Enhanced Full Rate codec LZT 123 8081 Ric 9 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION EMC ETSI FR GPRS GPS GSM HR HSCSD IDE ITU T ME MMCX MO MS MT PCM PDU RLP RF RFU RTC SDP SMS SIM TCP TBD UDP Electro Magnetic Compatibility European Telecommunications Standards Institute Full Rate codec General Packet Radio Service Global Positioning System Global System for Mobile Comunication Half Rate codec High Speed Circuit Switched Data Integrated Developers Environment Internet Protocol In
78. away from electronic devices or other antennas The recommended minimum distance between adjacent antennas operating in a similar radio frequency band is at least 50cm If signal strength is weak it is useful to face a directional antenna at the closest radio base station This can increase the strength of the signal received by the radio device The radio device s peak output power can reach 2W RF field strength varies with antenna type and distance At 10cm from the antenna the field strength may be up to 70V m and at 1m it will have reduced to 7V m In general CE marked products for residential and commercial areas and light industry can withstand a minimum of 3V m 8 3 4 The Antenna Cable Use 50Q impedance low loss cable and high quality 50Q impedance connectors frequency range up to 2GHz to avoid RF losses Ensure that the antenna cable is as short as possible The Voltage Standing Wave Ratio VSWR may depend on the effectiveness of the antenna cable and connectors In addition if you use an adapter between the antenna cable and the antenna connector it is crucial that the antenna cable is a high quality low loss cable Minimize the use of extension cables connectors and adapters Each additional cable connector or adapter causes a loss of signal power 8 3 5 Possible Communication Disturbances Possible communication disturbances include the following e Noise can be caused by electronic devices and radi
79. be connected outside the MS to VRTC pin During the RTC normal operation the passive power supply is being charged this is like charging a capacitor In backup operation the backup source provides with enough voltage for RTC operations The following table shows both voltage operations characteristics Parameter Min Typ Max Units Supply Voltage RTC Normal 1 6 1 8 2 0 V Operation Charging the capacitance Supply Voltage RTC Backup 1 0 1 8 2 0 V Operation Capacitance provides with voltage LZT 123 8081 Ric 39 Note GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Current drawn 5 0 10 0 uA In Back up operation if the voltage drop below 1 Volt the RTC shall stop working The following diagram shows the RTC connection VRTC Backup supply KS Figure 3 6 RTC connection There is no requirement to have this fitted to use the RTC 3 17 Extended IO capabilities In order to increase the flexibility and variety of GR47 peripherals the RS232 hardware flow control shares its physical interface with the keypad scanning interface and extended general purpose IO capability Due to the nature of this sharing it is not feasible to operate all these features concurrently although with care dynamic switching from one feature to another and back is possible When a particular feature is required of an IO the software automatically sets the states of the relevant IO blocks disabling one set and enab
80. be found in section 8 3 5 page 61 When an application is completed you can verify signal strength by issuing the AT command AT CS Q See the AT Commands Manual for further details Before installing the radio device use an ordinary mobile telephone to check a possible location for it In determining the location for the radio device and antenna you should consider signal strength as well as cable length 58 HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE RADIO DEVICE Connection of Components to Radio Device The integrator is responsible for the final integrated system Incorrectly designed or installed external components may cause radiation limits to be exceeded For instance improperly made connections or improperly installed antennas can disturb the network and lead to malfunctions in the radio device or equipment Network and Subscription e Before your application is used you must ensure that your chosen network provides the necessary telecommunication services Contact your service provider to obtain the necessary information e f you intend to use SMS in the application ensure this is included in your voice subscription e Consider the choice of the supplementary services described in section 2 3 2 Short Message Service page 11 8 2 2 How to Install the Radio Device LZT 123 7589 R2B Power Supply e Use a high quality power supply cable with low resistance This ensures that the voltages at the connector pins are within th
81. carrier lt mcc gt Description String Type Three digits in decimal format The Mobile Country Code identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU lt mnc gt Description String Type Two digits in decimal format The Mobile Network Code identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell lt ci gt Description String type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format lt bsic gt Description String Type One byte Base Stations Identification code in hexadecimal format lt rxl gt Description String Type Received Signal Strength level in dBm measured in idle mode LZT 123 7590 R1F 181 14 NETWORK 14 20 AT ESRT SIM Reset Timeout Description Command Set SIM Reset timeout time AT ESRT lt time gt Read current setting AT ESRT Test if the command is AT ESRT Possible Responses OK ERROR ESRT lt time gt OK ERROR E2SDR list of supported supported lt time gt s OK ERROR Description This command sets the timeout time between an attention request sent to the SIM card and when a response is expected If the time times out there will be a SIM reset The default value should be fine unless the external SIM interface is used and the cable is long causing a delay The report setting is persistent and will remain after a power cycle lt time gt Description 13 Timeout time in ms Default
82. compatibility No functionality lt dly gt Description 2 Wait two seconds before blind dialling Default value 2 255 Number of seconds to wait before blind dialling 33 LZT 123 7590 bit 3 CONTROL AND STATUS 3 8 ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout Description Command Possible Responses Set connection ATS7 lt tmo gt OK completion timeout ERROR Show the current setting ATS7 lt tmo gt Show if the command is ATS7 S7 list of supported supported lt tmo gt s Description Defines the maximum time allowed between completion of dialling and the connection being established If this time is exceeded then the connection is aborted lt tmo gt Description 50 Timeout value in seconds Default value 1 255 Timeout value in seconds 3 9 ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control Description Command Possible Responses Set Comma Dial Modifier ATS8 lt dly gt OK Delay Control ERROR Show the current setting ATS8 lt dly gt Show if the command is ATS8 S8 list of supported supported lt dly gt s Description Included for compatibility No functionality lt dly gt Description 2 The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds Default value 1 255 The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds 34 LZT 123 7590 bit 3 CONTROL AND STATUS 3 10 ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control Description Command Possible Responses Set Automatic ATS10 lt va
83. compound values lt speed gt Description 0 Auto selection of baud rate 4 2400 bps V 22bis 6 4800 bps V 32 7 9600 bps V 32 12 9600 bps V 34 15 19200 bps V 34 81 5 DATA CSD HSCSD 68 70 71 75 79 80 81 82 83 2400 bps V 110 ISDN 4800 bps V 110 ISDN 9600 bps V 110 ISDN 14400 bps V 110 ISDN 19200 bps V 110 ISDN 28800 bps V 110 ISDN 38400 bps V 110 ISDN 48000 bps V 110 ISDN 56000 bps V 110 ISDN lt name gt Description 0 Asynchronous connection UDI or 3 1 kHz modem lt ce gt Description Non transparent 5 2 AT CRLP Radio Link Protocol LZT 123 7590 R1E Description Command Possible Responses Set radio link AT CRLP lt iws gt OK protocol L lt mws gt lt T1 gt ERROR lt N2 gt lt ver gt lt T4 gt Show the current AT CRLP CRLP setting lt iws gt lt mws gt lt T1 gt lt N2 gt lt ver1 gt lt T4 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CRLP lt iws gt lt mws gt lt T1 gt lt N2 gt lt ver2 gt L lt T4 gt OK ERROR Show if the AT CRLP CRLP list of supported lt iws gt s command is list of supported lt mws gt s supported list of supported lt T1 gt s list of supported lt N2 gt s lt ver1 gt L list of supported lt T4 gt s lt CR gt lt LF gt CRLP list of supported lt iws gt s list of supported lt mws gt s list of supported lt T1 gt s list o
84. damage the radio device or the SIM card e When designing your application the SIM card s accessibility should be taken into account We always recommend that you have the SIM card protected by a PIN code This will ensure that the SIM card cannot be used by an unauthorized person 8 1 3 Antenna e If the antenna is to be mounted outside consider the risk of lightning Follow the instructions provided by the antenna manufacturer e Never connect more than one radio device to a single antenna The radio device can be damaged by radio frequency energy from the transmitter of another radio device e Like any mobile station the antenna of the radio device emits radio frequency energy To avoid EMI electromagnetic interference you must determine whether the application itself or equipment in the application s proximity needs further protection against radio emission and the disturbances it might cause Protection is secured either by shielding the surrounding electronics or by moving the antenna away from the electronics and the external signals cable e The radio device and antenna may be damaged if either come into contact with ground potentials other than the one in your application Beware ground potential are not always what they appear to be 57 LZT 123 7589 R2B HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE RADIO DEVICE e In the final application the antenna must be positioned more than 20 cm away from human bodies When this rule
85. default is 145 otherwise default is 129 Note In GSM there are two types of numbers 129 which are national and 145 which are international lt mr gt Description Integer type GSM 03 40 TP Message Reference in integer format lt scts gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Service Centre Time Stamp in time string format refer to lt dt gt 16 9 AT CNMI New Message Indications to TE LZT 123 7590 R1F PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses Set new AT CNMI lt mode gt CMS ERROR lt err gt message L lt mt gt lt bm gt lt ds gt OK indication to TE WM ERROR Show the current AT CNMI CNMI setting lt mode gt lt mt gt lt bm gt lt ds gt lt bfr gt OK ERROR Show if the AT CNMI CNMI command is list of supported lt mode gt s supported list of supported lt mt gt s list of supported lt bm gt s list of supported lt ds gt s list of supported lt bfr gt s 211 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT OK ERROR Description Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from the network are indicated to the TE when it is active e g DTR signal is ON If the TE is inactive DTR signal is OFF message receiving is carried out as specified in GSM 03 38 3G TS 23 038 If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or network the final result code CMS ERROR
86. digits for country and 3 digits for network Example AT EPNR 2 1 10 EPNR 1 24008 EPNR 2 20404 EPNR 3 20810 EPNR A 20208 EPNR 5 65501 EPNR 6 26203 EPNR 7 50503 EPNR 8 27201 166 14 NETWORK EPNR 9 64101 EPNR 10 27801 OK 14 7 AT EPNWEricsson Write SIM Preferred Network Description Command Possible Responses Write delete entries in AT EPNW2 lt index gt CME ERROR lt err gt SIM preferred list L lt format gt lt oper gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT EPNW EPNW list of supported supported lt index gt s list of supported lt format gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command is used to edit the SIM preferred list of networks EFpiwnsec The entry field lt oper gt contains mobile country code MCC and mobile network code MNC lt index gt Description Integer Index to entry in SIM preferred list The SIM preferred list contains at least 8 positions according to GSM 11 11 lt format gt Description 2 Numeric lt oper gt lt oper gt Description String String indicates the code for the operator E g GSM Sweden Europolitan 24008 3 2 PCS 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network LZT 123 7590 R1F 167 14 8 AT E2SSN 14 NETWORK Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number Description Command Possible R
87. ee aul conditions L lt satype gt S lt status gt lt class1 gt lt number gt lt type gt lt satype gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CCFC lt status gt lt class2 gt lt number gt lt type gt lt satype gt II H ERROR Show if the AT CCFC CCFC list of supported command is ee tent b err supported OK ERROR Description This command allows control of the call forwarding supplementary service Registration erasure activation deactivation and status query are supported When querying the status of a network service lt mode gt 2 the response line for not active case lt status gt 0 should be returned only if service is not active for any lt class gt lt reason gt Description 0 Unconditional 1 Mobile busy 2 No reply 3 Not reachable 4 All call forwarding 5 All conditional call forwarding lt mode gt Description 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Query status 3 Registration 4 Erasure 261 LZT 123 7590 R1F 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES lt number gt Description string type String type ME number of forwarding address in format specified by lt type gt lt type gt Description integer format Type of address octet 129 ISDN telephony numbering plan national international unknown Default value if is not in lt sca gt 145 ISDN telephony numbering plan international number Default value if is in
88. element it has values 0 and 1 The number of elements is ME specific If the ME does not allow setting of indicators or it is not currently reachable CME ERROR lt err gt is returned If a certain indicator is not writable it cannot be set If the parameter is an empty field the indicator will keep the previous value Test command returns pairs where string value lt descr gt is a maximum 16 character description of the indicator and compound value is the allowed values for the indicator If ME is not currently reachable CME ERROR lt err gt is returned refer to GSM 07 07 lt ind gt Description Integer type Value shall be in range of corresponding lt descr gt lt descr gt Description signal Signal quality 0 5 service Service availability 0 1 sounder Sounder activity 0 1 message Message received 0 1 call Call in progress 0 1 roam Roaming indicator 0 1 sms full A short message memory storage in the MT has become full 1 or memory locations are available 0 i e the range is 0 1 3 24 AT CLAC List all available AT Commands Command Possible Responses CLAC lt AT Command1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt AT Command2 gt CME ERROR lt err gt 51 LZT 123 7590 R1F 3 CONTROL AND STATUS CLAC CME ERROR lt err gt Description Note Causes the ME to return one or more lines of AT commands This command
89. err gt is returned lt stat gt Description 0 Received unread message i e new message 1 Received read message 2 Stored unsent message only applicable to SMs 3 Stored sent message only applicable to SMs 4 All messages only applicable to CMGL command 221 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT lt index gt Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory lt alpha gt Description String type Manufacturing specific Should be left empty but not omitted lt length gt Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode CMGF 0 the length of the actual TP data unit in octets i e the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length lt pdu gt Description In the case of SMS GSM 04 11 SC address followed by GSM 03 40 TPDU in hexadecimal format ME TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number e g octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A IRA 50 and 65 In the case of CBS GSM 03 41 TPDU in hexadecimal format Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses List message AT CMGL If text mode CMGF 1 command lt stat gt successful and SMS SUBMITs and SMS DELIVERs CMGL lt index1 gt stat gt lt oa da gt lt alpha gt lt scts gt sonal toda gt dength gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt d
90. failure Text string too long Invalid characters in text string Dial string too long Invalid characters in dial string No network service Network time out Network not allowed emergency calls only Unknown Reserved by ETS 1 4 2 CMS ERROR Message Service Failure Result Code LZT 123 7590 R1F This final result code indicates an error related to mobile equipment or to the network The operation is similar to the ERROR result code None of the following commands in the same command line will be executed Neither ERROR nor OK result code will be returned ERROR is returned normally when LZT 123 7590 R1F 2 CALL CONTROL an error is related to syntax or invalid parameters Nevertheless it always appears when a command fails The syntax is as follows CMS ERROR lt err gt Values for the lt err gt parameter are described in the following table lt err gt Description 0 127 GSM 04 11 Annex E 2 values 128 255 GSM 03 40 subclause 9 2 3 22 values 300 ME failure 301 SMS service of ME reserved 302 Operation not allowed 303 Operation not supported 304 Invalid PDU mode parameter 305 Invalid text mode parameter 310 SIM not inserted 311 SIM PIN required 312 PH SIM PIN required 313 SIM failure 314 SIM busy 315 SIM wrong 316 SIM PUK required 317 SIM PIN2 required 318 SIM PUK2 required 320 Memory failure 321 Invalid memory index 322 Memory full 330 SMSC address unknown 331 No network service 332 Network
91. format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet as defined in GSM 03 38 with bit 8 set to O It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit Text is coded in packed format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet packed in 8 bit octets as defined in GSM 03 38 It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet 247 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT lt text_length gt Description Integer type 0 240 Value indicating the maximum length of field lt alpha_id gt lt alpha_id gt Description String type EP mm Field of string type format between Coding is according to EFanp as defined in GSM 11 11 In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha identifier or this is a null data object the ME shall give FF to indicate Sending SMS so that the external application is informed The maximum length is fixed 18 10 AT E2STKP STK Send SS Unsolicited Result Code E2STKP lt ton gt lt SS_string gt lt coding gt lt text_length gt lt alpha_id gt lt SS_return gt The ME passes the parameters within SEND SS command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKP This informs the external application that the ME has sent an SS string to the network and provides the current status after this operation lt ton gt Description integer type Field of 1 byte indicating the Type of Number cod
92. gt which is used by other phonebook commands Read command returns currently selected memory and when supported by manufacturer number of used locations and total number of locations in the memory lt storage gt Description EN Emergency numbers ME ME phonebook SM SIM phonebook DC ME dialled calls list 30 entries RC ME received calls list 30 entries MC ME missed calls list 30 entries lt passwd gt Description String type Represents the password required when selecting password protected lt storage gt s LZT 123 7590 R1F 195 15 15 LZT 123 7590 R1F 15 PHONEBOOK AT CPBWPhonebook Write Description Command Possible Responses Request phonebook AT CPBW2 lt index gt write lt number gt lt type gt L lt text gt Show if the command is AT CPBW supported e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR CPBW list of supported lt index gt s lt nlength gt I ist of supported lt type gt s lt tlength gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description Writes phonebook entry in location number lt index gt in the current phonebook memory storage area selected with AT CPBS If the lt number gt and lt text gt parameters are omitted the entry is deleted If lt index gt is omitted but lt number gt is included the entry is written to the first free location in the phonebook
93. gt Description 0 None 1 Semi Duplex 2 Full Duplex Note the internal hands free algorithm in the MS contains echo cancelling lt noise_reduction gt Description 0 Off 1 On 72 4 AUDIO lt side_tone gt Description 0 Off 1 On lt short_echo_canceling gt Description 0 Off 1 On lt ATMS_gain gt Description 0 Normal 0 dB internal voice processing lt Class gt Description 0 None 1 Low end class reference Hector 2 Mid End class reference Scott 3 High End class reference Hasse lt ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class gt Description lt AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class gt 0 0 dB 1 2 5 dB 2 2 5 dB 3 5 0 dB 4 5 0 dB 4 5 AT EARS Ericsson Audio Ring Signal LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Request analogue ring AT EARS lt mode gt OK signal in the loudspeaker ERROR Show the current setting AT EARS EARS lt mode gt Show if the command is AT EARS EARS list of supported supported lt mode gt s Description Included for compatibility No functionality 73 4 6 AT E2PHFB 4 AUDIO lt mode gt Description 0 Disable analogue ring signal 1 Enable analogue ring signal Portable Handsfree Button Sense Enable Description Command Possible Responses Set PHF functionality Show the current setting Show if the command is supported AT E2PHFB lt op gt
94. gt Description 0 Not registered MS is not searching for a new operator to register with 1 Registered home network 2 Not registered but MS is searching for a new operator to register with 3 Registration denied 4 Unknown 5 Registered roaming lt lac gt Description String type Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format lt ci gt Description String type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format AT CGREG CGREG 0 3 OK Select Service for MO SMS Messages Description Command Possible Responses Set service or service CGSMS lt service gt OK preference ERROR Show the current setting CGSMS CGSMS lt service gt OK ERROR Show if the command is CGSMS CGSMS list of supported available lt service gt s OK 96 6 11 AT E2GDV LZT 123 7590 R1F 6 DATA GPRS ERROR Description Used to specify the service or service preference that the MS will use to send MO SMS messages The read command returns the currently selected service or service preference lt services gt Description 2 GPRS packet domain preferred use circuit switched if GPRS packet domain not available 3 Circuit switched preferred use GPRS packet domain if circuit switched not available GPRS Data Volume Description Command Possible Responses Report Connection AT E2GDV lt option gt E2GDV lt bytes gt Data Volume OK ERROR Show if the command AT E2GDV Be list ot e is su
95. gt lt LF gt lt index2 gt lt type2 gt lt itemindex gt LJ OK ERROR Show if the command is AT EGIR OK supported ERROR Description This command lists the items stored in the group identified by lt gindex gt lt gindex gt Description 1 10 The groups index within the hierarchical phonebook lt index gt Description 1 15 The items index within the group 190 LZT 123 7590 bit 15 PHONEBOOK lt type gt Description Integer The kind of item See AT ESAG lt item gt table for definition lt itemindex gt Description Integer The item s index within the phonebook contacts group 15 10 AT ESIL Ericsson Silence Command Description Command Possible Responses Sets the MS to silent AT ESIL lt mode gt CME ERROR lt err gt mode OK ERROR Show the current setting AT ESIL ESIL lt mode gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT ESIL ESIL list of supported supported lt mode gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command orders the ME to be in silent mode When the ME is in silent mode all sounds from the MS are prevented lt mode gt Description 0 Silent mode off Default value 1 Silent mode on 191 LZT 123 7590 bit 15 PHONEBOOK 15 11 AT ESNU Ericsson Settings Number Description Command Possible Responses Sets a number in the MS Show the current setting Show if the com
96. has the same functionality as ATI This command only returns the AT commands that are available to the user 3 25 AT CLANSet Language LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Set MT language AT CLAN lt code gt CME ERROR lt err gt Show the current AT CLAN CLAN lt code gt setting CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the AT CLAN e CLAN list of supported command is lt code gt s supported e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command sets the language in the MT If setting fails a MT error CME ERROR lt err gt is returned The lt code gt parameter is a two letter abbreviation of the language The language codes consist of two characters e g sv en etc The complete set of language codes to be used are manufacturer specific Some examples are described under lt code gt For a complete list see ISO 639 The read command gives the current language as output If the language has been set to AUTO the read command returns the current language set from the SIM card Hence the AUTO code is never returned by the read command Test command returns supported lt code gt s Table 1 lt code gt parameter lt code gt Description AUTO Read language from SIM card de German It Italian 52 en fr es SV da no 3 CONTROL AND STATUS English French Spanish Swedish Danish Norwegian Finnish Note This is not an exhaus
97. is given a mobile initiated USSD string or a response USSD string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network The response USSD string from the network is returned in a subsequent unsolicited CUSD result code The interaction of this command with other commands based on other GSM supplementary services is described in the GSM standard Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value Some different scenarios are shown below e An incoming network initiated USSD Notify should be presented to the external application as an unsolicited result code CUSD if the external application has enabled result code presentation e An incoming USSD request asking for a reply should sent to the external application as an unsolicited result code CUSD if the external application has enabled result code e If the external application answers to the request with the command AT CUSD then the ME sends the answer to the network e A USSD request sent with the command AT CUSD from the external application The different alternatives are shown below Network Mobile Equipment External application 1 Signal Sends unsolicited Result code presentation result code CUSD enabled presented 2 Signal asking Sends unsolicited Result code presentation for reply result code CUSD enabled presented 3 Answer AT CUSD 3b Sends AT CUSD lt n gt Description 272 LZT 123 7590 R1F 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVI
98. lt err gt microphone OK ERROR Show the current setting AT EMIC EMIC lt mode gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT EMIC EMIC list of supported supported lt mode gt s e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description Included for compatibility No functionality lt mode gt Description 0 Microphone is disabled off 1 Microphone is enabled on 4 9 AT EMIR Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Request for mute AT EMIR lt mode gt OK indications ERROR Show the current setting AT EMIR EMIR lt mode gt lt resp gt 75 4 AUDIO Show if the command is AT EMIR EMIR list of supported supported lt mode gt s Description Included for compatibility No functionality lt mode gt Description 0 Off music mute indication result codes will not be sent to the accessory 1 On music mute indication result codes will be sent to the accessory lt resp gt Description 0 Music mute inactive 1 Music mute active 4 10 AT ESMA Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound Description Command Possible Responses Sets the answer mode AT ESMA lt mode gt CME ERROR lt err gt settings in the MS OK ERROR Show the current setting AT ESMA ESMA lt mode gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT ESMA ESMA list of supported
99. lt sca gt 161 ISDN telephony numbering plan national number 128 255 Other values lt satype gt Description integer format Type of subaddress octet 128 NSAP X 213 ISO 8348 AD2 even number of address signals 136 NSAP X 213 ISO 8348 AD2 odd number of address signals 160 User defined even number of address signals 168 User defined odd number of address signals 128 255 Other values reserved lt classx gt Description integer Sum of integers each representing a class of information Default value is 7 1 Voice L1 2 Data 4 Fax 8 Short message service 16 Data circuit sync 32 Data circuit async 64 Dedicated packet access 128 Dedicated PAD access lt status gt Description 262 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 0 Not active 1 Active 19 9 AT CCWA Call Waiting Description Command Possible Responses Request call AT CCWA lt n gt when lt mode gt 2 and command waiting lt mode gt successful lt class gt CCWA lt status gt lt class1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CCWA lt status gt lt class2 gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show the current AT CCWA CCWA lt n gt setting CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the AT CCWA e CCWA list of supported lt n gt s command is CME ERROR lt err gt supported OK ERROR Description This command allows control of the call waiting supplementary service according to 3GPP TS 22 083 Activation deac
100. lt tosca gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CSCA OK supported ERROR Description Updates the SMSC address through which mobile originated SMs are transmitted In text mode the setting is used by send CMGS and write CMGW commands In PDU mode the setting is used by the same commands but only when the length of the SMSC address coded into lt pdu gt parameter equals zero Note that a in front of the number in lt sca gt has precedence over the lt tosca gt parameter so that a number starting with will always be treated as an international number lt sca gt Description string type GSM 04 11 3G TS 24 011 RP SC address Address Value field in string format BCD numbers or GSM default alphabet characters are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character set lt tosca gt Description integer type GSM 04 11 3G TS 24 011 RP SC address type of address octet in integer format 129 ISDN telephony numbering plan national international unknown 145 ISDN telephony numbering plan international number 161 ISDN telephony numbering plan national number 128 255 Other values refer GSM 04 08 section 10 5 4 7 200 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT Example AT CSCA CSCA 44385016005 145 OK 16 4 AT CMGF Message Format Common for both PDU and Text Modes Description Command Possible Responses Set message for
101. menu New menu to be displayed Unsolicited Result Codes E2STKM lt NbrOfltems gt lt coding gt lt text_length gt lt alpha_id gt lt CR gt lt LF gt E2STKM lt item_id1 gt lt coding gt lt text_length gt lt item1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt JE2STKM lt item_idn gt lt coding gt lt text_length gt lt itemn gt Values follow GSM 11 14 standard lt coding gt Description 0 Text is coded in unpacked format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet as defined in GSM 03 38 with bit 8 set to O It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit Text is coded in packed format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet packed in 8 bit octets as defined in GSM 03 38 It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet lt text_length gt Description Integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field lt alpha_id gt lt itemn1 gt lt Itemn gt lt alpha_id gt Description String type Field of string type between defined in GSM 11 11 Coding is according to EFanp as The maximum length is fixed lt item_idn gt Description Integer type The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255 Each item lt itemn gt in the list shall have a unique identifier lt item_idn gt LZT 123 7590 R1F 244 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT lt itemn gt Description mm String type Field of string type format between EFanp
102. or for recommendations concerning accessories and components e the telephone number for customer support in your region e FAQs frequently asked questions The web site address is http www SonyEricsson com M2M 2 4 2 Extranet The extranet contains all of the more in depth documentation such as AT commands manual software bulletins etc To gain access to the site please contact either your sales person or customer support 2 4 3 Integrator s Manual This manual provides you with all of the information you need to integrate the radio device into your application 2 4 4 AT Commands Manual The AT Commands Manual provides you with all the AT commands you can use with your radio device AT commands are in logical groups and contain the command a description of its functionality and an example of use 2 4 5 M2mpower Application Guide The M2mpower Application Guide provides you with all the information you need to build an application using the LZT 123 7589 R2B GR47 GR48 RADIO DEVICES M2mpower support environment This manual is supplied as part of the M2mpower package There are also a number of application notes which accompany the guide showing how to use specific functionality 2 4 6 Developer s Kit Sony Ericsson provides the developer s kit to get you started quickly The kit includes the necessary hardware required to begin the development of an application It includes the following e GS
103. range Maximum relative humidity Stationary vibration sinusoidal Stationary vibration random Non stationary vibration including shock Bump Free fall transportation Rolling pitching transportation Static load Low air pressure high air pressure 30 C to 75 C 40 C to 85 C 95 at 40 C Displacement 7 5 mm Acceleration amplitude 20 m s and 40 m s Frequency range 2 8 Hz 8 200 Hz 200 500 Hz Acceleration spectral density m s 0 96 2 88 0 96 Frequency range 5 10 Hz 10 200 Hz 200 500 Hz 60 min axis Shock response spectrum I peak acceleration 3 shocks in each axis and direction 300 m s 11 ms Shock response spectrum II peak acceleration 3 shocks in each axis and direction 1000 m s 6 ms Acceleration 250 m s 1 2m Angle 35 degrees period 8 s 10 kPa 70 kPa 106 kPa Data Storage SMS storage capacity Phone book capacity 40 in ME In addition the unit can handle as many SMS as the SIM can store 100 67 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 12Declaration of Conformity LZT 123 7589 R2B Declaration of Conformity We Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB of Nya Vattentornet S 221 88 Lund Sweden declare under our sole responsibility that our product Sony Ericsson type 6100511 BV and in combination with our accessories to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the appropriate standards 3GPP TS 51 010 1 EN 301489 7
104. s ERROR Description This command allows the manipulation and storage of the audio profiles stored in the MS The requirement for the 2nd and 3rd parameters depend on the operation being carried out Using the command you can e Set one of the three audio profiles 0 1 or 2 as the current profile This will load the profile s settings from NVM and implement them e Read one of the audio profiles The current settings for the profile number defined will be displayed e Copy all parameters from one profile into another e Reset any of the profiles This will reinstate the factory defaults for the profile 0 portable handsfree 1 handset 2 car kit e Seta profile as the default profile on next power up lt op gt Description 0 Set profile lt prnum1 gt to set as current 1 Copy profile lt prnum1 gt to lt prnum2 gt 2 Read profile lt prnum1 gt settings 3 Reset profile lt prnum1 gt to factory default 4 Set default profile as lt prnum1 gt Will store this as defautl 69 LZT 123 7590 R1F 4 AUDIO profile in NVM and use it as default from next power on Examples lt prnum1 gt Description lt prnum2 gt 0 Profile 0 Factory profile set for portable handsfree Default value 1 Profile 1 Factory profile set for handset 2 Profile 2 Factory profile set for car kit AT E2APR E2APR 0 4 0 2 0 2 OK Current default profile is profile 0 AT E2APR E2APR
105. supported e CBM cell broadcast message a service in which a message is sent to all subscribers located in one or more specific cells in the GSM network for example traffic reports e SMS STATUS REPORT according to GSM 03 40 The maximum length of an SMS message is 160 characters when using 7 bit encoding For 8 bit data the maximum length is 140 characters The radio device supports up to six concatenated messages to extend this function Concatenation is disabled if CNMI 3 2 is set See the AT Commands Manual for further details 2 3 3 Voice Calls The radio device offers the capability of MO mobile originated and MT mobile terminated voice calls as well as supporting emergency calls Multiparty call waiting and call divert features LZT 123 7589 R2B GR47 GR48 RADIO DEVICES are available Some of these features are network operator specific For the inter connection of audio the radio device offers both single ended and balanced analogue input and output lines Direct interface to the digital PCM pulse code modulation bus used within the radio device is available thus by passing the internal analogue circuitry The radio devices support HR FR and EFR vocoders The GR48 also supports the Adaptive Multi Rate AMR type of vocoder 2 3 4 Data The radio device supports the following data protocols e GPRS General Packet Radio Service The radio devices are Class B terminals The radio devices are GP
106. syntax description provided below Only commands that are listed in the AT Commands Manual are supported unless otherwise stated Other commands may be listed by the module but these are only included for historical or legacy reasons 2 CALL CONTROL 1 3 Syntax Description This section provides a brief description of the syntax used for the GR47 AT command set See the ITU T recommendation V 25ter for additional information 1 3 1 Conventions In this manual the following conventions are used to explain the AT commands lt command gt The name of the command that is to be entered lt parameter gt The parameter values that are defined for a certain command lt CR gt The command line is terminated by the Carriage Return or Enter key or ATS3 command lt LF gt Line feed character or ATS4 command lt gt The term enclosed in angle brackets is a syntactical element The brackets do not appear in the command line Square brackets are used to indicate that a certain item is optional For example sub parameters of a command or an optional part of a response The brackets do not appear in the command line Value The default values of the supported parameters are indicated by using bold text when presenting the value e Other characters including parenthesis etc appear in commands and responses as written e The final result codes OK ERROR CME ERROR lt err gt and CMS ERROR lt e
107. that the correct analog voltage is read by the application at position A in Figure 5 12 below The input structure is provided in Figure 5 12 It consists of a 100k pull up to 2 75V followed by a series 10kQ and 1nF capacitor to ground which make a low pass filter with a 3dB roll off at about 16kHz The input impedance of the analog IC is 1MQ minimum At position A in Figure 5 12 below the input characteristics are the same as for the table above If the voltage of the signal to be measured may be altered by the internal circuitry of this shared signal then the application should use ADC1 ADC2 or ADC3 instead ly 275V awa 100kQ E wa OI om 10 ADC e o e ele elt ADC py 3 4 Ce T mw i Analog IC 5 17 External IC Serial Control Bus LZT 123 7589 R2B Pin Signal Dir Description 29 SDA 1 0 1 C serial data 30 SCL O 17 serial clock The 1 C bus is controlled by embedded application script commands it is not available in the GM47r5 The external C bus consists of two signals SDA and SCL This bus is isolated from the radio device s internal C bus to ensure proper operation of the radio device in the event of the external I C bus being damaged 50 SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE The electrical characteristics are shown below Parameter Min Typ Max Units Frequency C CLK 81 25 400 kHz Ss High or low 1 C CLK 1 2 us S S Delay time after falling edge
108. the GSM UMTS supplementary services HOLD Call Hold refer 3GPP TS 22 083 clause 2 MPTY MultiParty refer 3GPP TS 22 084 and ECT Explicit Call Transfer refer 3GPP TS 22 091 The interaction of this command with other commands based on other GSM UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM UMTS standards Note Call Hold and MultiParty are only applicable to teleservice 11 It is recommended although optional that test command returns a list of operations which are supported The call number required by some operations is denoted by x e g CHLD 0 0x 1 1x 2 2x 3 lt n gt Description Integer type equals to numbers entered before SEND button in GSM 02 30 subclause 4 5 5 1 0 Releases all held calls or sets User Determined User Busy UDUB for a waiting call Ox Releases a specific call X from a held multiparty call 1 Releases all active calls if any exist and accepts the other held or waiting call 1X Releases a specific active call X 2 Places all active calls if any exist on hold and accepts the other held or waiting call 2X Places all active calls on hold except call X with which communication is supported 3 Adds a held call to the conversation 4 Connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriber from both calls explicit call transfer X is the numbering starting with 1 of the call given by the sequence of setting up or receiving the calls active held or waitin
109. the IMEI International Mobile station Equipment Identity refer GSM 03 03 number of the ME and the software version number Text shall not contain the sequence 0 lt CR gt or OK lt CR gt 11 9 AT GMI Read Manufacturer Identification Description Command Possible Responses Request manufacturer AT GMI lt manufacturer gt identification Show if the command is AT GMI OK supported ERROR Description This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of information text Typically the text will consist of a single line containing the name of the manufacturer but may provide more information such as address and telephone number for customer service lt manufacture gt Description string type The total number of characters including line terminators in 128 LZT 123 7590 bit 11 IDENTIFICATION the information text returned in response to this command shall not exceed 2048 characters Note that the information text shall not contain the sequence 0 or OK so that DTE can avoid false detection of the end of this information text 11 10 AT GMM Read Model Identification Description Command Possible Responses Request revision AT GMM lt model gt identification Show if the command is AT GMM OK supported ERROR Description This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of information text determined by the manufacturer which is intended to permit
110. the coming REFRESH command by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKR e g Reset is coming lt indicator gt Description Integer type Indicator describes the mode that the SIM has requested when sending a REFRESH command 0 SIM initialization and full file change notification 1 File change notification 2 SIM initialization and file change notification 3 SIM initialization 4 SIM reset AT E2STKO SIM Application Toolkit Settings Parameter Command Syntax AT E2STKTO lt Command gt lt timer gt This command allows the external application to configure some general settings related to STK Defined values Parameter lt Command gt is used to define the command that the time parameter is going to be applied Parameter lt timer gt is used to fix the timeout period applicable to Proactive SIM mechanism lt Command gt Description Integer type 0 6 It defines the command that the time parameter is going to be applied 0 All the commands with timeout associated are set to the value of lt timer gt 250 LZT 123 7590 R1F 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT Get Inkey command timeout is set to the value of lt timer gt 2 Set Up Menu command timeout is set to the value of lt timer gt 3 Set Up Call command timeout is set to the value of lt timer gt 4 Display Text command timeout is set to the value of lt timer gt 5 Get Input command timeout is set to the value of lt timer gt
111. the following connections board to board and board to cable Details of connector availability and sources are available from customer support on request 59 1 60 2 Figure 3 1 GR 47 48 View from the underside The table on next page provides the pin assignment of the different signals in the System Connector Interface as well as a short description of them All signal directions are with respect to the module i e Direction O means data being sent by the module LZT 123 8081 Ric 13 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Pin Signal Name Dir Signal Type Description 1 VCC Supply Power Supply 2 DGND Digital Ground 3 VCC Supply Power Supply 4 DGND Digital Ground 5 VCC Supply Power Supply 6 DGND Digital Ground K VCC Supply Power Supply 8 DGND Digital Ground 9 VCC Supply Power Supply 10 DGND Digital Ground 11 CHG_IN Batt Charge power Battery charging 12 DGND Digital Ground 13 105 UO Dig 2 75 General Purpose input output 5 ADC4 l Analogue Analogue to digital converter 4 14 ON OFF l Internal pull up Turns the module on off opemdrain Former WAKE P 15 SIMVCC Dig 3 5 V SIM card power supply Power output for SIM Card from module 16 SIMPRESENCE l Internal pull up SIM Presence open d ain A 1 shall indicate that the SIM is missing a 0 that it is inserted 17 SIMRST O Dig 3 5 V SIM card reset 18 SIMDATA UO Dig 3 5 V SIM card data
112. when a forward check supplementary service notification is received unsolicited result code CSSU lt code2 gt lt index gt is sent to TE In case of MT call setup result code is sent after every CLIP result code refer command Calling line identification presentation CLIP and when several different lt code2 gt s are received from the network each of them shall have its own CSSU result code The difference between lt index gt and lt cindex gt is that lt index gt is a position mark while lt cindex gt is a unique value for each CUG lt index gt is not supported Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value lt n gt Description 0 Disable the CSSI result code presentation status in the TA 1 Enable the CSSI result code presentation status in the TA lt m gt Description 0 Disable the CSSU result code presentation status in the TA 1 Enable the CSSU result code presentation status in the TA lt code1 gt Description 0 Unconditional call forwarding is active 1 Some of the conditional call forwarding are active 2 Call has been forwarded 270 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 3 Call is waiting 4 This is a CUG call also lt index gt present 5 Outgoing calls are barred 6 Incoming calls are barred 7 CLIR suppression rejected lt index gt Description 0 9 CUG index 10 No index preferred CUG taken from subscriber data lt code2 gt Descr
113. whether the unsolicited reporting is activated or not Read command is available when the unsolicited result code is supported It is recommended although optional that the test command return the supported mode values lt mode gt Description 0 Query CCM value 252 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 1 Deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value 2 Activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value lt ccm gt Description String type Three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal format e g O0001E indicates decimal value 30 value is in home units and bytes are similarly coded as ACMmax value in the SIM 19 3 AT EDIF Ericsson Divert Function Description Command Possible Responses Enable and disable AT EDIF lt onoff gt CME ERROR lt err gt notification with the OK unsolicited result code ERROR EDIF Show the current setting AT EDIF EDIF lt onoff gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT EDIF EDIF list of supported supported lt onoff gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command enables and disables notification of divert status changes with the unsolicited result code EDIF lt onoff gt Description 0 Disable notification with the unsolicited result code EDIF 1 Enable notification with the unsolicited result code EDIF Unsolicited Result Codes EDIF lt reason gt lt status gt
114. 0 44 kbits s 13 500 000 1 11 kbits s 14 1 000 000 2 2 kbits s 15 2 000 000 4 4 kbits s 16 5 000 000 11 1 kbits s 17 10 000 000 22 kbits s 18 20 000 000 44 kbits s 31 50 000 000 111 kbits s GPRS Network Registration Status Description Command Possible Responses Set command AT CGREG lt n gt Show the current setting AT CGREG Show if the command is supported AT CGREG e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR CGREG lt n gt lt stat gt lt lac gt lt ci gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR e CGREG list of supported lt n gt s OK ERROR Description Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code CGREG lt stat gt when lt n gt 1 and there is a change in the GPRS packet domain network registration status of the MS or code CGREG lt stat gt lt lac gt lt ci gt when lt n gt 2 and there is a change of the network cell Note If the GPRS Packet Domain MS also supports circuit mode services the CGREG command and CGREG result code apply to the registration status and location information for those services 95 6 10 AT CGSMS LZT 123 7590 R1F Example 6 DATA GPRS lt n gt Description 0 Disable network registration unsolicited result code 1 Enable network registration unsolicited result code 2 Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code lt stat
115. 0 UF lt 100 mo ESR e Make sure power supply to radio device line resistance is lt 200 mQ 5 5 Battery Charging Input CHG_IN Reserved for future use LZT 123 7589 R2B Caution Note For battery powered applications the radio device has a connection to aid and support battery charging The typical design where this may be applicable is to power the radio device directly from a battery source connected to VCC pins 1 3 5 7 9 and to provide a 5V dc power source 600mA max to the CHG_IN connection pin 11 The radio device can control an internal switching FET which creates a charging pathway to the battery While power is provided at CHG_IN the battery charge can be maintained If the power should fail or be removed at CHG_IN the application will be supported by the battery alone When CHG _IN voltage returns the battery charging and maintenance will commence once more Battery charging requires additional software functionality which is yet to be released Once available the battery charging algorithms and control will only be supported through the Sony Ericsson M2mpower Embedded Applications Battery charging algorithms are unique to different battery types Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications will not accept any responsibility or liability for damage product failures even death or injury occurring as a result of incompatible battery and charging algorithms being applied without their prior knowledge and consent
116. 00ms default timer lt T3 gt Description 10 10 s default timer lt k gt Description T Window size AT CRES Restore SMS Settings Description Command Possible Responses Restore settings AT CRES lt profile gt CMS ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CRES CRES list of supported supported lt profile gt s CMS ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR 149 13 INTERFACE Description Restores message service settings from non volatile memory to active memory A TA can contain several profiles of settings Settings specified in commands Service Centre Address CSCA Set Message Parameters CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast Message Types CSCB if implemented are restored Certain settings such as SIM SMS parameters cannot be restored lt profile gt Description 0 2 Profile number where settings are to be stored Default value is 0 13 11 AT ICF Cable Interface Character Format Description Command Possible Responses Defines DTE DCE AT ICF format parity OK character framing ERROR Show the current AT ICF ICF setting lt format gt lt parity gt OK ERROR Show if the command AT ICF e ICF list of is supported supported lt format gt s list of supported lt parity gt s OK ERROR Description This extended format compound parameter is used to determine the local serial port start stop asynchronous character framing used by the
117. 0950 FCC ID PY76220511 BV IC 4170B 6220511 The GR48 described in this manual conforms to the Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules Parts 22 901d and 24 E and PTCRB NAPRD 03_TC version V 2 7 2 3GPP TS 51 010 Version 3GPP TS 51 010 1 V 5 6 0 SAR statement This product is intended to be used with the antenna or other radiating element at least 20 cm away from any part of the human body The information contained in this document is the proprietary information of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International The contents are confidential and any disclosure to persons other than the officers employees agents or subcontractors of the owner or licensee of this document without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International is strictly prohibited Further no portion of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International the copyright holder Third edition November 2004 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International publishes this manual without making any warranty as to the content contained herein Further Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International reserves the right to make modifications additions and deletions to this manual due to typographical errors inac
118. 1 Related Documentation eeeeeeennnneeeneneerrr ttt terernrrrnr rn rnrrennnnnrn rn rrreennne 10 t2 e EE 10 1 3 Syntax Ree EE 11 1 3 1 CONVENON eege eege ed 11 1 3 2 AT Command Tee EC 11 1 3 3 AT Response Syntax cccccceccceceeeeesseeeeeeeceeeeeeaasseeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 KR Gel 14 1 4 1 CME ERROR Mobile Equipment Error Code 14 1 4 2 CMS ERROR Message Service Failure Result Code 15 1 5 Examples on How to Use the AT Commande snnnnnannnnnnesenrnnnneeeen 17 1 6 SMS Text Mode ciao ceca ee lence it ose ae ee one en ei 17 Teh GPRS COMMING AUOM EE 19 1 7 1 On board TCP IP kees 19 2 Call ei rd ge EE 20 22 AICP IN BIN EE 20 2 2 ATA Answer Incoming Call 20 23 NN RAR LC RE 21 24 ATH REENEN ee ee rere ve Per ee Veer eet Vier eve Vier even Vier ever vere 23 2 5 ATL Monitor Speaker Loudness AAA 23 2 6 ATO Return to Online Data Mod 6 eege EENEG 24 2 7 ATP Select Pulse Diallling 2c cccccccececceeeeteceeeeeteceeeeenecteeeetecteeeenenteee 24 2 8 ATT Select Tone Dialliing 22 2 cccccccccccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeneneceneneeenetenenentees 25 2 9 ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control 25 2 10 AT CHUP Hang lip Callinesenacsananannnannnann nanih niann nana 26 2 11 AT CMOD Call MOdC 0 ccredsdicctctdieterdietisddedtesdiedasadedtutcdectesettinketeas 26 2 12 AT CVHU Voice elt 27 2 13 AT VTD DTMF re ele E 27 2 14 AT VTS DTMF and Tone Generation
119. 184 185 287 LZT 123 7590 R1F 22 ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS AT ESDG AT ESDI AT ESGR AT ESIL AT ESLN AT ESMA AT ESNU AT ESRT AT ESVM AT CALA AT CALD AT CAOC AT CBST AT CCFC AT CCLK AT CCWA AT CEER AT CFUN AT CGACT AT CGATT AT CGDATA AT CGDCONT AT CGEREP AT CGMI AT CGMM AT CGMR AT CGPADDR AT CGQMIN AT CGQREQ AT CGREG AT CGSMS AT CGSN AT CHLD AT CHSC AT CHSD AT CHSN Ericsson Delete Group Ericsson Delete Group Item Ericsson Group Read Ericsson Silence Command Ericsson Set Line Name Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound Ericsson Settings Number SIM reset timeout Ericsson Set Voice Mail Number Set Alarm Alarm Delete Advice of Charge Select Bearer Service Type Call Forwarding Number and Conditions Set Clock and Date Call Waiting Extended Error Report Set ME Functionality PDP Context Activate or Deactivate GPRS Attach or Detach Enter Data State Define PDP Context GPRS Event Reporting Read MS Manufacturer Identification Read MS Model Identification Read MS Revision Identification Show PDP Address Quality of Service Profile Minimum Acceptable Quality of Service Profile Requested GPRS Network Registration Status Select Service for MO SMS Messages Read MS Product Serial Number Identification Call Hold and Multiparty HSCSD Current Call Parameters HSCSD Device Parameters HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration 189 189 190 191 169 76 192 182 187 46 48 252
120. 38 DCD O Dig 2 75 Data Carrier Detect KEYCOL1 O Keyboard column 1 01 O General purpose output 1 39 RTS l Dig 2 75 Request To Send 109 UO General purpose I O 9 40 CTS O Dig 2 75 Clear To Send KEYCOL4 O Keyboard column 4 04 O General purpose output 4 41 TD l Dig 2 75 Transmitted Data former DTMS 42 RD O Dig 2 75 Received Data former DFMS 43 TD3 l Dig 2 75 UART3 Transmission 1 07 UO General purpose UO 7 44 RD3 O Dig 2 75 UART3 Reception 1 08 UO General purpose I O 8 45 TD2 l Dig 2 75 UART2 Reception Former CTMS 46 RD2 O Dig 2 75 UART2 Transmission Former CFMS 47 PCMULD l Dig 2 75 DSP PCM digital audio input 48 PCMDLD O Dig 2 75 DSP PCM digital audio output 49 PCMO O Dig 2 75 Codec PCM digital audio output 50 PCMI l Dig 2 75 Codec PCM digital audio input 51 PCMSYNC O Dig 2 75 DSP PCM frame sync 52 PCMCLK O Dig 2 75 DSP PCM clock output 53 MICP l Analogue Microphone input positive 54 MICN l Analogue Microphone input negative 55 BEARP O Analogue Speaker output positive 56 BEARN O Analogue Speaker output negative LZT 123 8081 Ric 15 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 57 AFMS O Analogue Audio output from module 58 SERVICE l 12V 2 7V Flash programming voltage for the MS Enable logger information if no flashing Former VPPFLASH 59 ATMS l Analogue Audio input to module 60 AGND Analogue Analogue ground Note Although the pin out has changed the unit remains backwardly compatible with the GM4
121. 38 UART1 DCD as default 02 Pin 36 UART1 RI as default 03 Pin 32 UART1 DSR as default 04 Pin 40 UART1 CTS as default AD1 Pin 26 AD2 Pin 27 AD3 Pin 28 AD4 Pin 13 muxed with 105 AD5 Pin 22 muxed with 102 DA1 Pin 20 101 to IO9 are set to INPUT as a factory default Their status Input Output is stored in non volatile memory lO9 11 01 O2 O3 and O4 are not available by default These pins are shared with RS232 functionality and only become active if the AT E2RS232 command is used see AT E2RS232 Ericsson RS232 control mode page 141 107 108 103 and 104 are available by default but are multiplexed with UART 3 pins Rx Tx CTS RTS When UART3 is opened without flow control 107 108 are not available as GPIO When UARTS3 is opened with hardware flow control 107 108 103 and 104 are not available as GPIO These pins become available as GPIO again when UARTS is closed 106 is only available as an input as it is shared with the LED Set command controls the operations with the I O signals for the M2M devices It is possible to perform up to five operations These operations have the following meaning e Read lt op gt 0 It reads the state of the specified signal It returns the binary state of digital signals or value 0 255 of 133 12 INPUT OUTPUT an ADC input or the DAC output In case of a digital I O the command has the following syntax AT E2I0 0 101 E210 0 101 0 OK If rea
122. 42 Enable the Result Code presentation in the TAE and send a USSD request asking for the SIM s phone number Network replies with the phone number 274 20 Embedded Application 20 1 AT E2APC LZT 123 7590 R1F Application Program Control Description Command Possible Responses Set application Program AT E2APC lt cmd gt lt sto ERROR Control plype gt lt StartType gt OK lt Ctrl Byte gt Displays current settings AT E2APC E2APC lt active gt lt RunOnStart Up gt lt halted gt lt Ctrl Byte gt OK Shows if the command is AT E2APC E2APC list of supported supported lt cmd gt s list of supported lt StartType gt s list of supported lt CtriByte gt s ERROR Description This command allows the user to start and stop the application running in the module The command allows a number of ways to start the application code and some ways to stop pause the running application Start Application lt cmd gt 1 This parameter sets the application to start The application can be started straight away in which the currently active script set with AT E2APD command is loaded and run or it can be set to run on the next powercycle from startup The second option is stored persistently so the application will start on power up every time it is switched on The script marked as active will be the one that is started Error Recovery If a new script is downloaded
123. 57 198 176 59 61 289 LZT 123 7590 R1F 22 ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS AT CRC AT CREG AT CRES AT CRLP AT CSAS AT CSCA AT CSCB AT CSCS AT CSDH AT CSMP AT CSMS AT CSQ AT CSSN AT CTZU AT CUSD AT CVHU AT F__ AT GMI AT GMM AT GMR AT ICF AT IFC AT ILRR AT IPR AT VTS AT WS46 ATA ATD ATE ATH ATI ATL ATM ATO ATP ATQ Cellular Result Code Network Registration Restore SMS Settings Radio Link Protocol Save Settings Service Centre Address Select Cell Broadcast Message Type Select Character Set Show Text Mode Parameters Set Text Mode Parameters Select Message Service Signal Strength Supplementary Service Notification Automatic Time Zone Update Unstructured Supplementary Service Data Voice Hang Up Low Level Fax Commands Read Manufacturer Identification Read Model Identification Read Revision Identification Cable Interface Character Format DTE DCE Local Flow Control Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting Cable Interface Port Command DTMF and Tone Generation Mode Selection Answer Dial Command Echo Hang up Identification Information Monitor Speaker Loudness Monitor Speaker Control Return to Online Data Mode Select Pulse Dialing Result Code Suppression 61 177 149 82 62 200 233 228 227 227 230 63 269 64 271 27 124 128 129 129 150 151 151 152 28 145 20 21 146 23 130 23 76 24 24 30 290 LZT 123 7590 R1F 22
124. 6 Select Item command timeout is set to the value of lt timer gt lt timer gt Description Integer type 0 99 0 1 99 Specifies the value in seconds to be set in the timeout associated with the command specified in lt command gt All the commands timeouts are set to its default value The timeout of the command specified in lt command gt is set to this value Unsolicited result code E2STKTO lt command gt 251 19 Supplementary Services 19 1 AT CPIN PIN Control See 3 29 AT CPIN PIN Control 19 2 AT CAOCAdvice of Charge LZT 123 7590 R1E Description Command Possible Responses Execute command AT CAOC lt mode gt CAOC lt ccm gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show the current setting AT CAOC CAOC lt mode gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CAOC e CAOC list of supported supported lt mode gt s OK ERROR Description Use of Advice of Charge supplementary service command enables the subscriber to get information about the cost of calls With lt mode gt 0 the execute command returns the current call meter value from the ME The command also includes the possibility to enable an unsolicited event reporting of the CCM information The unsolicited result code CCCM lt ccm gt is sent when the CCM value changes but no more than every 10 seconds Deactivation of the unsolicited event reporting is made with the same command Read command indicates
125. 69 11 23587 T725 Sony Ericsson Table 1 Universal Developer s Kit Content List 13 2 Assembling the Developer s Board The developer s board has been designed to work with several families of modules Therefore you will need to assemble the mounting hardware based on the particular version of the module you are using There are four different assemblies the GM 41 the DM xx family the CM 4x family which requires a heat sink for 3W usage and the smaller Gx 47 48 70 LZT 123 7589 R2B INTRODUCTION TO THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT 13 3 Mounting a GX 47 48 This assembly will require included in kit Description Manufacturer Part Qty 2 56 156 O D 1 4 Length Standoffs Digi Key 1801BK ND 2 2 56 x 1 2 Phillips Panhead Stainless Steel Digi Key H701 ND 2 Machine Screw 2 56 Lock Washer Inside Tooth Stainless Digi Key H728 ND 2 Steel Use on bottom only 2 56 Hex Nut Digi Key HD723 ND Figure 13 1 Exploded View of Developer s Board with GX 47 48 13 4 Assembly instructions e Use 1 2 screw with lock washer through the bottom of board to attach each 1 4 long standoff e Plug the module into the 60 pin connector X602 e Attach module to standoff using a single 2 56 nut e Attach RF cable from module to J402 Make RF connections at J401 SMA connector Note Components under shield cans are sensitive to ESD and should be handled with appropriate measures LZT 123 7589 R2B 71 INTR
126. 7 3 2 General Electrical and Logical Characteristics Many of the signals present in the interface are high speed CMOS logic inputs or outputs powered from 2 75 V 5 Whenever a signal is defined as Dig 2 75 V the following electrical characteristics shall apply Parameter Min Typ Max Units Output Current I High Level Output 2 2 2 75 Volts 2mA Voltage Vox Low Level Output 0 0 6 Volts 2mA Voltage VoL High Level Input 1 93 2 75 Volts Voltage Vin Low Level Input voltage 0 0 5 Volts Vit 3 2 1 General Protection Requirements Note All 2 75V digital inputs shall continuously withstand any voltage from 0 5V up to 3 47V 3 3V 5 in the power on or power off condition with no damage All 2 75V digital outputs shall continuously withstand a short circuit to any voltage within the range from OV to 3V This is for protection ONLY the module cannot be driven directly by a 3 3V micro processor if this is done it will invalidate any warranty claim on the module Please see the Design Guidelines document for information on how to interface directly to a 3 3V microprocessor LZT 123 8081 Ric GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION The SIM output signals and the SIMVCC supply can continuously withstand a short circuit to any voltage within the range from OV to 4 1V LZT 123 8081 Ric 3 3 Grounds Note GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Pins Name Description 2 4 6 8 10 12 DGND
127. 7 GSM 07 07 lt service gt Description 0 Asynchronous modem 4 Voice 5 Fax lt itc gt Description 0 3 1 kHz 1 UDI AT COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation Description Command Possible Responses Request connected line AT COLP lt n gt OK identification ERROR presentation Show the current setting AT COLP COLP lt n gt lt m gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT COLP COLP list of supported supported lt n gt s OK ERROR 173 14 NETWORK Description 14 14 AT COPN LZT 123 7590 R1F This command refers to the GSM UMTS supplementary service COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation that enables a calling subscriber to get the connected line identity COL of the called party after setting up a mobile originated call The command enables or disables the presentation of the COL at the TE It has no effect on the execution of the supplementary service COLR in the network When enabled and allowed by the called subscriber COLP lt number gt lt type gt lt subaddr gt lt satype gt lt alpha gt intermediate result code is returned from the TA to the TE before any CR or V 25ter responses It is manufacturer specific if this response is used when normal voice call is established Read command gives the status of lt n gt and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the COLP service according 3GPP TS 22 081 given in lt m gt T
128. 75 V 100 kQ Low Level Input Voltage SIM 0 8 V inserted High Level Input Voltage SIM 1 93 5 V missing Note The module has been Type Approved with SIM presence implemented to avoid extra testing when type approving the application this should be designed in 3 12 Service Programming Pin Signal Description 58 SERVICE Flash programming voltage This input shall be used as a programming voltage for the Flash Memory to initiate and it is also used as a signal to indicate to the module that it should start outputting logging information Mode SERVICE Voltage V Drive Capacity Min Typ Max Normal Operation 0 8 Service enable 1 9 2 75 3 6 gt 1mA programming Absolute maximum 13 5 voltage LZT 123 8081 Ric 37 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3 13 Buzzer Pin Signal Description 31 Buzzer Buzzer output from the module This is an output signal which allows the application to use pre programmed melodies or sounds Typical use would involve a transistor buffer with a piezoelectric sounder The Dig 2 75 V CMOS Output electrical characteristics shall apply with DGND as the reference 3 14 LED Pin Signal Description 33 LED LED Output from module 1 06 General purpose UO 6 This is an output signal which allows the use of an external LED The LED shall indicate different states within the module This signal is a Dig 2 75 V CMOS output so general characteristics are ap
129. 9 16 9 AT CNMI New Message Indications to IEN 211 16 10 AT CMGR Read Message eneen 215 16 11 AT CMGL List Message 24 cede cudd cnc gege cede dege gege 221 16 12AT CMGD Delete Message cccececceeeeteeeeeenteeeeeeeteneeeeeteneeeeeteneeeentens 226 16 13 AT CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters nnnnennnnnnnneneenrnrnrnnrnnreen 227 16 14 AT CSMP Set Text Mode Parameter 227 7 LZT 123 7590 R1F 17 18 19 20 21 16 15AT CSCS Select Character Get 228 16 16AT CSMS Select Message Service ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 230 16 17 AT E2SMSRI Ring indicator for MS 231 Short Message Services Cell Broadcast cceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 233 17 1 AT CNMI New Message Indications to IEN 233 17 2 AT CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type 233 SIM Application Toolkit EEN 234 18 1 AT E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings cccccccccccceceteeeeeeeees 234 18 2 AT E2STKD M2M STK Display Text 235 18 3 AF E2ZS TRG M2M STK Get Ip geed Eeer Eeer ge 236 18 4 AT E2STKI M2M STK Get TEEN 238 18 5 AT E2STKL M2M STK Select Item ccccccccccccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 241 18 6 AT E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Men 243 18 7 AT E2STKN M2M STK Envelope Menu Selection ccccccececeees 245 18 8 AT E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call ccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeeess 245 18 9 AT E2STKE STK Send Short Message nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 247 18 1O0AT E2
130. A The command line consists of a string of alphanumeric characters It is sent to the modem to instruct it to perform the commands specified by the characters Functionality AT commands CONTROL AND IDENTIFICATION Subscriber Information Product amp Release info Generic information amp Settings CALL CONTROL General call control DTMF Data commands AUDIO CONTROL Audio profile modification Audio profile manipulation NETWORK SERVICES Alternate Line Service ALS Customer Service Profile Call forwarding Calling called number identification Preferred networks Advice of Charge Calling cards Call hold waiting amp multiparty Operator selection Network registration USSD Security amp Locks SETTINGS AT CNUM AT CIMI AT ESNU AT CGMR AT CGSN AT ESIR AT AT AT CLAC AT GCAP ATI AT CSCS AT amp F AT amp W ATZ AT WS46 AT E2SSN ATA ATD ATL ATH ATP ATT AT CHUP AT CMOD AT CVHU AT CR AT CRC AT VTS ATO AT CRLP AT E2EAMS AT EALR AT EAMS AT EARS AT ELAM AT EMIR AT EMIC AT EXVC AT E2APR AT EALS AT ELIN AT ESLN AT ECSP AT CCFC AT EDIF AT CLIP AT CLIR AT EIPS AT EPNR AT EPNW AT CACM AT CAMM AT CAOC AT CPUC AT ESCN AT CCWA AT CHLD AT COPS AT CREG AT CUSD AT CSSN AT CLCK AT CPWD AT CPIN AT EPEE LZT 123 8081 Ric 45 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Restting Ring signal settings ME STATUS INFORMATION ERROR CONTROL
131. A 1 2 13 0 Recurrent AT CALA 12 00 1 0 OK AT CALA CALA 12 00 1 47 3 CONTROL AND STATUS Single CALA 15 40 1 OK Technical Description Only a single active alarm can be set and this can only be set to an hour minute not to a date day 3 19 AT CALD Alarm Delete Description Command Possible Responses Delete an alarm AT CALD lt n gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CALD CALD list of supported supported lt n gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command removes an active alarm lt n gt Description Integer type Index identifying an active alarm 3 20 AT CCLK Set Clock and Date Description Command Possible Responses Set the real time clock of AT CCLK lt time gt CME ERROR lt err gt the ME OK ERROR Show the current setting AT CCLK CCLK lt time gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CCLK OK supported ERROR 48 LZT 123 7590 bit 3 CONTROL AND STATUS Description Sets the real time clock of the ME If setting fails in an ME error CME ERROR lt err gt is returned Read command returns the current setting of the clock lt time gt Description string type Format is yy mm dd hh mm ss zz where characters indicate value year two last digits month day hour minutes seconds and time zone indicates the diffe
132. ARRIER ERROR OK Answer and initiate connection to an incoming call lt text gt Description 19200 9600 4800 2400 Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits s HSCSD Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits s Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits s Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits s LZT 123 7590 R1F 20 2 3 ATD Dial 2 CALL CONTROL Description Command Possible Responses Originate a call and dial the ME number specified in the command as lt dial_string gt or Do a network detect Dial the ME number stored in the ME which is located by the index lt I gt Dial the ME number stored in the SIM card which is located by the index lt I gt Dial the ME number stored in the Last dialled number list on the SIM card which is located by the index lt I gt The most recently dialled number is assumed to have lt gt 1 Redial the last ME number dialled Ericsson specific ATD lt dial_string gt ATD gt ME lt I gt ATD gt SM lt I gt ATD gt LD lt I gt ATDLD CONNECT CONNECT lt text gt NO CARRIER ERROR NO DIAL TONE BUSY OK CONNECT CONNECT lt text gt NO CARRIER ERROR NO DIAL TONE BUSY OK CONNECT CONNECT lt text gt NO CARRIER ERROR NO DIAL TONE BUSY OK CONNECT CONNECT lt text gt NO CARRIER ERROR NO DIAL TONE
133. AT ESAG Ericsson Add 10 GrOUD EE 183 15 3 AT ESCG Ericsson Create Group 184 15 4 AT ESCN Ericsson Set Credit Card Number 185 15 5 AT ESVM Ericsson Set Voice Mail Number 187 15 6 AT ESDG Ericsson Delete Group 2eegetegt fue EEN EeEC menses 189 15 7 AT ESDI Ericsson Delete Group ltem cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 189 15 8 AT ESGR Ericsson Group Read 190 15 9 AT EGIR Ericsson Group Item Head 190 15 10 AT ESIL Ericsson Silence Commande 191 15 11 AT ESNU Ericsson Settings Number 192 15 12 AT CPBF Phonebook Find nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnn nnna 193 15 13 AT CPBR Phonebook Read EE 193 19 4 AT CPBS ME Storage aoc ceevexcccs cexctchenavctdeecnectdecensctdnennectdecenectonecneceaners 195 15 15 AT CPBW Phonebook Wrte nennen 196 16 Short Message Services Point to Point 198 16 1 AT CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages 198 16 2 AT CPMS Preferred Message Giorage 198 16 3 AT CSCA Service Centre Address n nnsnnnnnneeeeeeeerrrnnrerrnrerr rnr rerrreen 200 16 4 AT CMGF Message Format ficcccccestcestcestceetceeecestcenceestceeecesteenceestcenccecee 201 16 5 AT CMGW Write Message to Memory ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 201 16 6 AT CMGS Send Message 2 2 c cccccecceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeteneeenees 204 16 7 AT CMSS Send From Storage cceccccdececneedeceeeeedeeeeneeteeeeneeteeeeneeee 207 16 0 ATECMGC Send Command rescesecenanenena ne a 20
134. Bm0 gain ATMS 245 0 13 3 Maximum input level at MICI 61 4 MVms output at PCMOUT 3 dBm0 Input Differential TXAGC dB AUX AMP PCMOUT dBm0 input MV ms gain MICN 61 4 0 25 3 MICP Output at AFMS for 3 dBm0 at PCMIN Input dm RXPGA Volume AFMS mV ims control dB PCMIN 3 0 0 436 Output at BEARN BEARP for 3 dBm0 at PCMIN Input dm RXPGA Volume BEAR MV ms control dB PCMIN 3 0 0 388 5 7 2 Audio From Mobile Station AFMS AFMS is the analogue audio output from the radio device and may be used to drive a speaker or the ear piece in a car kit PCM digital audio signals entering the radio device through the PCMIN pin are translated to analogue signals by the CODEC See PCM Digital Audio for further information The table below shows the audio signal levels for AFMS Parameter Limit Speaker impedance 64 Oto 1 kQ Output Capacitance 2 2 UF 10 32 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE Levels THD lt 5 Drive capability into 5 kQ gt 2 4 Vp p 0 3 3 5 kHz Drive capability into 1 5 ko 0 3 gt 2 2 Vp p 3 5 kHz Drive capability into 150 Q gt 1 3 Vp p at 1 kHz 5 7 3 Microphone Signals Pin Speaker signals Dir Function 53 MICP l Microphone positive input 54 MICN l Microphone negative input MICP and MICN are balanced differential microphone input pins These inputs are compatible with an electret microphone The microphone cont
135. CES 0 Disable result code presentation in the TA 1 Enable result code presentation in the TA 2 Terminate abort USSD dialogue This value is not applicable to the read command response lt str gt Description string String type USSD when lt str gt parameter is not given network is not interrogated If lt dcs gt indicates that GSM 03 38 default alphabet is used if TE character set other than HEX refer command Select TE Character Set CSCS ME TA converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set according to rules of GSM 07 05 Annex A Example 1 AT Command Result Code Description AT CUSD 1 34 Enable the Result Code presentation in the TAE and send a USSD request CUSD 1 id code OK Further user action required give id code AT CUSD 1 7465338 Id code given CUSD 0 OK No further user action required Example 2 AT Command Result Code Description CUSD 0 Expensive Incoming USSD notify telling the incoming call user that the incoming call is expensive Example 3 AT Command Result Code Description AT CUSD 1 55 0700 Enable the Result Code presentation in the TAE and send a USSD request asking for an alarm at the time 07 00 CUSD 0 ALARM At 07 00 the network sends an alarm to the user 273 LZT 123 7590 R1F 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES Example 4 AT Command Result Code Description AT CUSD 1 100 CUSD 0 077871540
136. CES POINT TO POINT Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Send from storage AT CMSS lt index gt CMSS lt mr gt lt scts gt lt da gt lt toda gt CMS ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show ifthe command AT CMSS OK is supported ERROR Description Sends message with location value lt index gt from message storage lt mem2 gt to the network SMS SUBMIT or SMS COMMAND Reference value lt mr gt is returned to the TE on successful mess lt service gt value age delivery Optionally wnen CSMS is 1 and network supports lt scts gt is returned If sending fails in a network or an ME error final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned This command is abortable lt index gt Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory lt da gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Destination Address Value in string format BCD numbers or GSM default alphabet characters are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character refer command CSCS Type of address given by lt toda gt lt toda gt Description String type GSM 04 11 TP Destination Address Type of Address octet in integer format when first character of lt da gt is IRA 43 default is 145 otherwise default is 129 Note Note In GSM there are two types of numbers 129 which are national and 145 which are international
137. DO LSB not used The radio device implements 13 bit PCM with the 13 bit data embedded in a 16 bit word within a 24 bit frame see Figure 5 8 Each PCM word contains 16 bits DO to D15 D13 to D1 is the two s complement value of the 13 bit PCM with D13 as the sign bit D14 and D15 are always set to be equivalent with D13 DO the LSB is not used as shown in Figure 5 7 below D13 13 bit PCM DO MSB D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D D8 D7 D D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 LSB 16 bit data word Figure 5 7 16 bit data word format 16 Bit PCM Mode Bit Contents D15 DO Two s complement The frame format is equal to the one shown in Figure 5 7 but with D15 D14 and DO filled with significant bits D15 to DO is the two s complement value of the 16 bit PCM with bit 15 as the sign bit 36 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE PCM Timing Diagrams The PCM timing is shown in Figure 5 8below and it is seen that the CPU has 45 us to serve an interrupt and setup data channels Data is sent on the falling edge of the sync pulse The data bits in PCMULD and PCMDLD are aligned so that the MSB in each word occurs on the same clock edge as shown in
138. Description Returns phonebook entries whose alphanumeric field starts with lt findtext gt Only currently selected source will be searched for lt findtext gt Description string type Field of maximum length lt tlength gt character set as specified by the select TE character set command CSCS AT CPBR Phonebook Read Description Command Possible Responses Read CPBR lt index1 gt CPBR lt index1 gt lt number gt phonebook L lt index2 gt lt type gt lt text gt lt text_date gt entries lt text_time gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CPBR lt index2 gt lt number gt lt type gt lt text gt lt text_date gt lt text_time gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the CPBR CPBR list of supported command is lt index gt s lt nlength gt lt tlength gt supported CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description Returns phonebook entries in location number range lt index1 gt lt index2 gt from the current phonebook memory storage selected with CPBS If lt index2 gt is left out only location lt index1 gt is returned Entry fields returned are location number lt indexn gt ME number stored there lt number gt of format lt type gt and text lt text gt associated with the number 193 15 PHONEBOOK lt indexn gt Description integer type Values in the range of location numbers of phonebook memory lt number gt Description str
139. Digital Ground 60 AGND Analogue Ground There are two ground signals in GR 47 48 Analogue Ground AGND and Digital Ground DGND The analogue Ground is connected to pin number 60 and the Digital Ground is connected to the System Connector Interface through pin numbers 2 4 6 8 10 and 12 All the Ground pins have to be connected to the application The AGND is connected to the DGND in the ME and only there It is important that the AGND and the DGND are separated in the application 3 3 1 The Analogue Ground The AGND lead is the analogue audio reference ground It is the return signal for Audio To Mobile Station ATMS and Audio From Mobile Station AFMS It shall be connected to the Digital Ground DGND inside the module and only there The application shall not connect DGND and AGND Parameter Limit Imax 12 5mA 3 3 2 The Digital Ground DGND DGND is the reference for all digital signals in the System Interface It shall also be the DC return for the power supply on VCC and SERVICE Each DGND pin is rated at 0 5 A All DGND pins are connected internally in the module All DGND pins should be connected commonly in the application Parameter Limit Taverage lt 0 5 A No DGND pin can withstand over 0 5 A Tmax lt 600 mA 100 mA each LZT 123 8081 Ric GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3 4 Regulated Power Supply Pins Name Description 1 3 5 7 9 VCC Regulated Power Supply
140. E lt value gt Description 0 Ignore Default value 1 When in on line data mode switch to on line command mode For all other states see lt value gt 2 2 Disconnect and switch to off line command mode 144 LZT 123 7590 R1E 13 INTERFACE 13 4 AT amp S Circuit 107 DSR Response Description Command Possible Responses Set behavior of dataset AT amp S lt value gt OK ready ERROR Description Determines the behavior of the data set ready signal lt value gt Description 0 DSR always on 1 DSR on in data mode DSR off in command mode Default value 13 5 AT WS46 Mode Selection Description Command Possible Responses Sets the cellular protocol AT WS46 n OK mode ERROR Show the current setting AT WS46 lt n gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT WS46 e list of supported lt n gt s OK supported ERROR Description Allows an accessory to query and control the cellular protocol mode of the ME lt n gt parameter Description 12 This value is used for GSM at 900 Mhz DCS 1800 and PCS 1900 phones 145 LZT 123 7590 bit 13 INTERFACE 13 6 ATE Command Echo Description Command Possible Responses Request Command Echo ATE lt value gt OK ATE lt value gt ERROR Show the current setting ATE lt value gt Show if the command is ATE E list of supported supported lt value gt s Description The setting of this parameter determ
141. E About text mode parameters in Italics refer command Show Text Mode Parameters CSDH If the status of the message is received unread status in the storage changes to received read If listing fails final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned lt index gt Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by lt mem1 gt lt stat gt Description REC UNREAD Received unread message i e new message REC READ Received read message STO UNSENT Stored unsent message only applicable to SMs STO SENT Stored sent message only applicable to SMs ALL All messages only applicable to CMGL command lt oa gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Originating Address Value in string format BCD numbers or GSM default alphabet characters are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character refer command CSCS Type of address given by lt tooa gt lt da gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Destination Address Value in string format BCD numbers or GSM default alphabet characters are 223 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT converted to characters of the currently selected TE character refer command CSCS Type of address given by lt toda gt lt toda gt Description String type GSM 04 11 TP Destination Address Type of Address octet in integer format when first character of lt da gt is IRA 43 def
142. E number to the current group lt gindex gt Description 1 10 The group index within the hierarchical phonebook lt type gt Description 1 Contact 2 ME number lt itemindex gt Description Integer The index of the contact group ME number to add The lt itemindex gt parameter has the following meaning if the item to add is a contact the lt itemindex gt is the index of the contact in the contacts book If the item to add is a ME number the lt itemindex gt is the index in the phonebook 15 3 AT ESCG Ericsson Create Group LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Adds anew group tothe AT ESCG lt name gt CME ERROR lt err gt hierarchical phonebook OK ERROR Shows if the command is AT ESCG ESCG supported lt maxnamelength gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command creates a new group in the hierarchical phonebook The group is stored at the first available position There are 10 group positions in the hierarchical phonebook lt name gt Description String The group name Character set as specified by command Select TE Character Set AT CSCS lt maxnamelength gt Description 184 integer 15 PHONEBOOK The maximum length of the grouping bytes 15 4 AT ESCN Ericsson Set Credit Card Number LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Set up a credit card number Show if th
143. ERROR Description Specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands in addition to 1200 bits s or 9600 bits s as required in v25ter subclause 4 3 It may be used to select operation at rates used by the DTE which the DCE is not capable of automatically detecting 152 LZT 123 7590 R1F 13 15 LZT 123 7590 R1F 13 INTERFACE The specified rate takes effect following the issuance of any result code s associated with the current command line lt rate gt Description Discrete integer value The lt rate gt value specified shall be the rate in bits per second at which the DTE DCE interface should operate e g 19 200 or 115 200 The rates supported by a particular DCE are manufacturer specific The following rates are supported 1 200 2 400 4 800 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 11 5 200 230 400 460 800 AT E2SPI Serial Peripheral Interface Description Command Possible Responses Set Serial Peripheral interface AT E2SPl lt op gt lt byteformat gt lt InitSyne gt L lt byte1 gt lt byte2 gt ERROR OK E2SPI lt byte1rx gt lt byte2rx gt lt byte n gt lt bytenrx gt OK Show the current AT E2SPI E2SPI lt active gt setting lt byteformat gt OK Shows if the AT E2SPIl E2SPI list of supported command is lt op gt s list of supported supported lt byteformat gt s list of supported lt Ini
144. FRM AT FRS AT FSPL AT FTBC AT FTH AT FTM AT FTS AT FVRFC AT FWDFC 124 LZT 123 7590 bit 11 Identification 11 1 AT Attention Command Description Command Possible Responses Checks the communication AT OK between the MS and application CME ERROR lt err gt Description This command is used to determine the presence of an MS If the MS supports AT commands it returns an OK final result code 11 2 AT amp F Set to Factory Defined Configuration Description Command Possible Responses Execute AT amp F OK ERROR Show if the command is AT amp F amp F list of supported supported lt profile gt s Description This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to default values specified by the manufacturer which may take in consideration hardware configuration and other manufacturer defined criteria 11 3 AT amp W Store User Profile Description Command Possible Responses Stores the current user AT amp W2 lt pr gt or OK profile to non volatile AT amp W lt pr gt ERROR memory Show if the command is AT amp W amp W list of supported supported lt pr gt s 125 LZT 123 7590 R1E 11 IDENTIFICATION Description This command stores the current user profile in non volatile memory The user profile consists of all of the user configurable settings other than those set by AT CBST If the unit is powered down and back up gain this is the profile it will use lt
145. GR 47 GR 48 Technical Description Sony Ericsson CE The product described in this manual conforms to the Radio Equipment and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment R amp TTE directive 99 5 EC with requirements covering EMC directive 89 336 EEC and Low Voltage directive 73 23 EEC The product fulfils the requirements according to 3GPP TS 51 010 1 EN 301489 7 and EN60950 The information contained in this document is the proprietary information of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications The contents are confidential and any disclosure to persons other than the officers employees agents or subcontractors of the owner or licensee of this document without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications is strictly prohibited Further no portion of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications the copyright holder Third Second edition December 2004 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications publishes this manual without making any warranty as to the content contained herein Further Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications reserves the right to make modifications additions and deletions to this manual due to typographical errors inaccurate information or improvements to programs and or equipment at any time and without notice
146. I New Message Indications to TE 17 2 AT CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type Common for both PDU and text modes Description Command Possible Responses Select cell broadcast AT CSCB lt mode gt CMS ERROR lt err gt message type lt mids gt OK ERROR Show the current setting AT CSCB CSCB lt mode gt lt mids gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CSCB CSCB list of supported supported lt mode gt s OK ERROR Description Selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME lt mode gt Description 0 Message types in lt mids gt and lt dcss gt are accepted lt mids gt Description string type All different possible combinations of CBM message identifiers refer lt mid gt default is empty string e g 0 1 5 7 lt mid gt GSM 03 41 CBM Message Identifier in integer format Example AT CSCB CSCB 0 50 OK 233 LZT 123 7590 bit 18 SIM Application Toolkit 18 1 AT E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings LZT 123 7590 R1E Description Command Possible responses Set the presentation of the AT E2STKS lt on_off CME ERROR lt err gt unsolicited result codes gt OK corresponding to STK ERROR Show the current setting AT E2STKS E2STKS lt on_off gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT E2STKS E2STKD list of supported supported lt on_off gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ER
147. IN required 312 PH SIM PIN required 313 SIM failure 314 SIM busy 315 SIM wrong 316 SIM PUK required 317 SIM PIN2 required 318 SIM PUK2 required 500 Unknown error 511 Other values in range 256 511 are reserved 512 Manufacturer specific AT E2SMSRI Ring indicator for SMS Description Command Possible Responses Enable RI for incoming AT E2SMSRI lt n gt OK SMS ERROR Show the current setting AT E2SMSRI E2SMSRI lt n gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT E2SMSRI E2SMSRI list of supported supported lt n gt s OK ERROR 231 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT Description This command enables disables the Ring Indicator pin response to an incoming SMS message If enabled a negative going pulse is generated on receipt of an incoming SMS message The duration of this pulse is selectable in steps of 50 ms up to a maximum of 1 150 ms and is determined by the value of lt n gt that is used in the command The command is disabled by setting lt n gt to 0 Note The Ring Indicator will always be active for incoming calls independent of this setting lt n gt Description 0 RI is disabled for incoming SMS messages Default value 50 1150 RI is enabled for incoming SMS messages Pulse duration selectable between 50 and 1 150 ms inclusive 232 LZT 123 7590 bit 17 Short Message Services Cell Broadcast 17 1 AT CNMI New Message Indications to TE See 16 9 AT CNM
148. IO is width disabled 4 To implement the Hard Shutdown of the GR47 the ON OFF pulse must be held low until the sequence is complete Ensure that ON OFF is not released before VIO has been deactivated by the module A hard shut down is only necessary where a normal power down has failed this should only happen if the software has greyed out This has never been seen in the modules but is a safety mechanism build into the chipset where the power will be cut from the chips enabling the unit to be powered up normally 5 6 1 VIO 2 75V Supply VIO provides an output voltage derived from an internal 2 75V regulator Its electrical characteristics are shown below Parameter Min Typ Max Units Output Voltage ag 50 mA 2 70 2 75 2 85 V Load current 75 mA You can use this output for the following e to indicate that the radio device is powered e to power interface circuits external to the radio device 30 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 5 7 Analogue Audio 5 7 1 Audio LZT 123 7589 R2B Pin Signal Dir Description 57 AFMS O Audio from mobile station 59 ATMS l Audio to mobile station 60 AGND Ground return for analogue audio ATMS is the audio input and AFMS is the audio output of the radio device These signals can be used in car kit mode There are three factory set audio profiles e portable handsfree e handset e car kit Portable handsfree is the factory set default p
149. I_COMMAND_ERROR 4 SSI_SIM_ERROR 5 SSI_NUMBER_ERR 6 SSI_CALL_BARRED 7 SSI_NOT_AVAILABLE 256 LZT 123 7590 R1F LZT 123 7590 R1F 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 8 SSI_LUNSUCCESSFUL 9 SSI_NOT_ALLOWED 10 SSI_LNETWORK_PROBLEM lt Opcode gt Description 10 REGISTER_SS 11 ERASE_SS 12 ACTIVATE_SS 13 DEACTIVATE_SS 14 INTERROGATE_SS lt SScode gt Description 0 ALL_SS 16 ALL_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_SERVICES 17 CALLING_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_PRESENTATION 18 CALLING_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_RESTRICTION 19 CONNECTED_LINE_IDENTIFICATION PRESENTATION 20 CONNECTED_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_RESTRICTION 21 MALICIOUS_CALL_IDENTIFICATION 32 ALL_FORWARDING_SERVICES 33 CALL_FORWARDING_UNCONDITIONAL 40 ALL_CONDITIONAL_FORWARDING_SERVICES 41 CALL_FORWARDING_ON_MOBILE_SUBSCRIBER_BUSY 42 CALL_FORWARDING_ON_NO_REPLY 43 SHE Eke at ee Gener ene aoe 49 EXPLICIT_CALL_TRANSFER 64 ALL_CALL_COMPLETION_SERVICES 65 CALL_WAITING 66 CALL_HOLD 67 COMPLETION_OF_CALL_TO_BUSY_SUBSCRIBER 81 MULTI_PARTY 112 ALL_CHARGING_SS 257 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 113 ADVICE_OF_CHARGE_INFORMATION 114 ADVICE_OF_CHARGE_CHARGING 144 ALL_BARRING_SERVICES 145 BARRING_OF_OUTGOING_CALLS 146 BARRING_OF_ALL_OUTGOING_CALLS 147 BARRING_OF_ALL_OUTGOING_INTERNATIONAL_CALLS 148 BARRING_OF_ALL_OG_INTERNATIONAL_NON_HPLMN_ DIRECTED_CALLS 153 BARRING_OF_INCOMING_CALLS 154 BARRING_OF_ALL_INCOMING_CALLS 155 BARRING_OF_ALL_IC_CALLS_WHEN_OU
150. K menu can be built externally by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKM The current menu can be removed by sending only the parameter lt on_off gt 0 Answer command allows the external application to send the appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code and before the timeout expires If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires an ERROR response is generated Values follow GSM 11 14 standard lt answer gt Description 0 OK Performed as required it corresponds to 00 command performed successfully described in the GSM standard 1 Failed User Terminated Session the command was executed as requested and the user wants to end the proactive session It corresponds to 10 proactive session terminated by the user described in the GSM standard 2 Failed User requests backwards move the command was executed 243 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT as requested and the user wants to go backwards in the session It corresponds to 11 backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user Failed No response from user the command was executed and the user did not react It corresponds to 12 no response from user Failed Screen is busy Failed Command beyond MEs capability It corresponds to 30 It was not possible to successfully integrate or remove the list of menu items lt on_off gt Description 0 1 Remove the current
151. LL SPEECH FOLLOWED By DATA CH A PS ALL SPEECH FOLLOWED By DATA CH S BS_ALL_DATA_CIRCUIT_ASYNCHRONOUS BS_ALL_DATA_CIRCUIT_SYNCHRONOUS BS_ALL_ASYNCHRONOUS_SERVICES BS_ALL_SYNCHRONOUS_SERVICES BS_12_KBIT_UNRESTRICTED_DIGITAL LZT 123 7590 R1F lt SS_Status gt Description 0 NO_FLAG_SET 1 SS_STATUS_ACTIVE 2 SS_STATUS_REGISTERED 4 SS_STATUS_PROVISIONED 259 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 7 SS_STATUS_PRA lt ForwardedToNr gt Description String ME number string in double quotes lt NoReplyCondition Time gt Description 0 65532 Integer value for time lt CLI_Restriction Option gt Description 0 PERMANENT 1 TEMPORARY_DEFAULT_RESTRICTED 2 TEMPORARY_DEFAULT_ALLOWED lt Subscription Option gt Description 1 OVERRIDE_CATEGORY 2 CLI_LRESTRICTION_OPTION 5 RESTRICTION PER CAL Example AT E2SSI 1 Orange OK AT E2SSD 30 OK E2SSI 0 14 17 4 AT E2SSD 31 OK E2SSI 0 14 18 5 2 AT E2SSI 1 Vodafone T Mobile O2 OK AT E2SSD 30 OK E2SSI 0 14 17 5 AT E2SSD 31 OK E2SSI 0 14 18 5 2 260 LZT 123 7590 R1F 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 19 8 AT CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Request Calling AT CCFC lt reason gt CME ERROR lt err gt forwarding lt mode gt lt number gt when lt mode gt 2 and command number and lt type gt lt class gt
152. LSE logic value to 13 Digital Input 3 ERROR The MS responds ERROR because the operation is not possible AT E210 1 DA1 95 The TE is writing 95 decimal value to hold a voltage of 2 75 0 9 256 95 0 918 V OK The MS responds OK because the operation has been performed Configuring an I O AT Command Response Comment AT E210 2 101 0 The TE is requesting to configure 101 as an input OK The MS responds OK because the operation has been performed AT E210 2 104 1 The TE is requesting to configure 104 as an output OK The MS responds OK because the 138 LZT 123 7590 bit 12 INPUT OUTPUT operation has been performed Checking an I O status AT Command Response Comment AT E210 3 101 The TE is requesting to check the configuration of the 101 signal E210 3 101 0 The MS responds 101 is OK configured as an input AT E210 3 104 The TE is requesting to check the configuration of the 104 signal E210 3 104 1 The MS responds 104 is OK configured as an output Triggering an Input AT Command Response Comment AT E210 4 101 1 OK AT E210 4 104 0 OK E210 4 101 1 OK The TE is requesting to trigger 101 The MS responds OK because the operation has been performed The TE is requesting to not trigger 104 The MS responds OK because the operation has been performed An event has occurred The 101 has triggered on changing the input to logic val
153. M lt servcell mcc gt lt servcell mnc gt lt servcell lac gt lt servcell ci gt lt servcell bsic gt lt servcell ch gt lt servcell rxl gt lt servcell C1 gt lt servcell C2 gt lt servcell rxlFull gt lt servcell rxlSub gt lt servcell rxqfull gt lt servcell rxqsub gt lt servcell tn gt lt servcell ta gt lt neighborcell1 mcc gt lt neighborcell1 mnc gt lt neighborcell1 lac gt lt neighborcell1 ci gt lt neighborcell1 bsic gt lt neighborcell1 ch gt lt neighborcell1 rxl gt lt neighborcell1 C1 gt lt neighborcell1 C2 gt lt neighborcell2 mcc gt lt neighborcell2 mnc gt lt neighborcell2 lac gt lt neighborcell2 ci gt lt neighborcell2 bsic gt lt neighborcell2 ch gt lt neighborcell2 rxl gt lt neighborcell2 C1 gt lt neighborcell2 C2 gt lt neighborcelln mcc gt lt neighborcellnmnc gt lt neighborcelln lac gt lt neighborcelln ci gt lt neighborcelln bsic gt lt neighborcelln ch gt lt neighborcelln rxl gt lt neighborcelln C1 gt lt neighborcelln C2 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt OK AT E2EMM 7 E2EMM lt servcell mcc gt lt servcell mnc gt lt servcell lac gt lt servcell ci gt lt servcell bsic gt lt servcell ch gt lt servcell rxl gt lt servcell c1 gt lt servcell c2 gt lt servcell rxlFull gt lt servcell rxlSub gt lt servcell rxqfull gt lt servcell rqsub gt lt servcell ta gt lt servcell tn gt lt neighborcell1 mcc gt lt neighborcell1 mnc gt lt
154. M radio device GR47 or GR48 e This Integrator s Manual e Developer s kit hardware e Developer s kit accessories e Power supply e RS232 cable e Headset e Antenna All the user needs to provide is a computer or micro controller and the expertise to use AT commands 2 5 Precautions The radio devices are ESD protected up to 4KV contact and 8KV air discharge It is recommended that you follow electronic device handling precautions when working with any electronic device system to ensure no damage occurs to the host or the radio device In Integrating the Radio Device page 16 you will find more information about safety and product care Do not exceed the environmental and electrical limits as specified in Technical Data page 66 2 6 Customer support contact details LZT 123 7589 R2B To contact customer support please use the details below Customer Support Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications UK Ltd M2MCom 1 Lakeside Road Systems Union House Aerospace Park Farnborough LZT 123 7589 R2B GR47 GR48 RADIO DEVICES Hampshire UK GU14 6XP E mail M2Msupport EMEA APAC sonyericsson com M2Msupport Americas sonyericsson com M2Minfo sonyericsson com 3 Abbreviations LZT 123 7589 R2B ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation AMR ATMS AFMS CBM CBS CSD DCE DK DTE DTMF EA EFR EMC ETSI FR GPRS GPS GSM HR HSCSD IDE IP ITU T M2mpower ME MMCX Explanations Adaptive Multi Rate
155. M2M Cell Description nnsssnnnennnnnnneneennnensennnnnenene 157 14 2 AT E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode 158 14 3 AT E2SPN M2M Service Provider Name 164 14 4 AT EALS Ericsson Request ALS Status cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 164 14 5 AT ECSP Ericsson Customer Service Profile cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 165 14 6 AT EPNR Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network nccccccccncecen 166 14 7 AT EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network accccccccccnececec 167 6 LZT 123 7590 R1F 14 8 AT E2SSN Ericsson M2M SIM GertalNumber 168 14 9 AT ESLN Ericsson Set Lnehame 169 14 10 AT CIMI Subscriber Identification ccccccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 170 T4 WA GEC Ka Pacility Ot EE 170 14 12 AT CNUM Subscriber Number 172 14 13 AT COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation 0 173 14 14AT COPN Read Operator Names ennnssnnnnnnnseneeeerrrtnrrrrnrrrrrn rreren 174 14 15AT COPS Operator Gelechon AAA 175 14 16AT CPOL Preferred Operator List 176 14 17 AT CREG Network Registration cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 177 14 18 AT ECPI Ciphering Indicator iiss ccc seser acetate ted tk eer 178 14 19AT E2NBTS Ericsson M2M Neighbour BI 180 14 20 AT ESRT SIM Reset Timeout nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnn nennen 182 15 GET 183 15 1 AT E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check SUM 00eeee 183 15 2
156. N l PCM audio input to Codec 49 PCMOUT O PCM audio output to Codec Figure 5 6 shows the PCM Pulse Code Modulation digital audio connection for external devices These connections can be used to process PCM digital audio signals bypassing the radio device s internal analogue audio CODEC GR47 PCMSYNC amp PCMCLK PCMDLD PCMIN PCMULD PCMOUT DSP CODEC System connector TT A A A M Analogue audio signals Link for internal digital audio processing Figure 5 6 Pin connections to digital audio Note When no external audio processing is performed the following pins must be connected together e PCMDLD to PCMIN e PCMULD to PCMOUT Electrical characteristics Digital 2 75 V CMOS input output electrical characteristics apply 35 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 5 8 1 PCM Data Format LZT 123 7589 R2B All of the radio device s PCM signals including signals between its CODEC and DSP conform to the PCM data I O format of the industry standard DSP from Texas Instruments PCMCLK bit clock and PCMSYNC frame synchronisation are both generated by the DSP within the radio device The DSP within the radio device is the master therefore all external PCM clocks and data from external devices must be synchronized to it 13 Bit PCM Mode Bit Contents D15 to D14 Equal to D13 D13 to D1 Two s complement of the 13 bit PCM
157. NETWORK other commands based on other GSM supplementary services is described in the GSM standard lt fac gt Description PSY PH SIM lock PHone to SIM card ME asks password when other than current SIM card inserted SC SIM lock SIM card SIM asks password in ME power up and when this lock command issued P2 SIM PIN2 AQ BAOC bar all outgoing calls Ol BOIC bar outgoing international calls Al BAIC bar all incoming calls IR BIC Roam bar incoming calls when roaming outside the home country Ox BOIC exHC bar outgoing international calls except to home country AB All barring services AG All out going barring services AC All in coming barring services FD SIM fixed dialling feature SIM2 is required as a password PN Network personalization PU Network subset personalization SE Service provider personalization PC Corporate personalization lt mode gt Description 0 Unlock 1 Lock 2 Query status 10 Full lock only valid for lt fac gt PS after power on always ask for password lt status gt Description 0 Not active 1 Active 171 14 12 LZT 123 7590 R1F 14 NETWORK lt passw gt Description string type Is the same as password specified for the facility from the ME user interface or with change password command CPWD lt classx gt Description 1 Voice L1 2 Dat
158. O has been extended to allow simple interfacing of a matrix keypad 7 1 lO KEYROW When configured for keypad operation the software will configure the digital I O pins as input or high impedance tri state In this state the keypad matrix row can be read from the KEYROWG inputs These pins have a 100ko pull up to 2 75V and the rows are considered activated when the voltage is pulled low by the external keypad switches 7 2 KEYCOL The keypad matrix column drivers share functionality with the RS232 hardware flow control signals In addition to the keypad column outputs it is possible to use a direct ground connection as an additional column driver which is interpreted as column Zero Simply connect one keypad column directly to ground When a key in this column is depressed KEYROW is activated Thus it is possible to create a variety of keypad matrix sizes from single column to five columns wide Finally a standard keypad matrix directly connects the rows to the columns whenever a key is depressed In order to avoid short circuits if multiple keys are pressed simultaneously the column drivers must be open collector This must be achieved with external transistors as the logic drive from the radio device is rail to rail Suitable transistors for this interface are of the type with built in bias resistors between base and emitter 54 LZT 123 7589 R2B KEYBOARD INTERFACE The method of connection is shown below A m l
159. ODUCTION TO THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT 13 5 System Requirements The system requirements are Personal Computer PC or unit compatible for RS232 communications An unused serial port COM1 COM4 for communication between the developer s board and the PC A second serial port may also be required for additional functionality A terminal program such as HyperTerminal Kermit Procomm etc 13 6 GX 47 48 Family Connection LZT 123 7589 R2B Jo Antenna Cable Keyboard System Connector Ribbon Cable Ch D A Hands free Figure 13 2 GX 47 48 Connection Diagram Connect serial cable from UDK board port 1 to an available serial port on the PC The DC power supply provides the necessary 12VDC Connect the power cable to the power supply and the AC outlet select the appropriate line cord dependant on your location Connect the output of the power supply to the power jack on the UDK board Attach the provided antenna cable to the SMA antenna jack on the UDK board or directly to the primary RF output port of the module 72 LZT 123 7589 R2B INTRODUCTION TO THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT e For voice calls plug in the provided Hands free Speaker Microphone 73 USING THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT 14Using the Universal Developer s Kit This section details the specific developer s board settings for the GM GR 47 48 family It is important that you verify these settings b
160. PA lt Activate gt ERROR OK Activation deactivatio lt cid gt E2IPA lt ErrNum gt n of IP ERROR Displays current IP AT E2IPA E2IPA lt Active gt activation Status OK ERROR Shows if the AT E2IPA E2IPA list of supported command is lt Activate gt s list of supported supported lt cid gt s OK ERROR Description This command allows the Activation of the IP Session on the module Once activated with a previously stored context see AT CGDCONT amp AT ENAD IP connections can be made and the module will negotiat itself an IP Address Abortability This command may not be aborted Defined values lt Activate gt Description 0 Deactivate IP Session 1 Activate IP Session lt cid gt Description Integer Value range 0 10 for a reference to a PDP context identifier previously defined with AT CGDCONT 99 LZT 123 7590 R1E 7 DATA TCP IP lt ErrNum gt Description 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 255 PDP Invalid Context PDP Account Invalid PDP Shutdown Failure PDP Setup Cancelled PDP Too Many Active Accounts PDP Conflict with Higher Priority Account PDP Too Many Active Users PDP Non Existant Account PDP Stop at User Request PDP Authentication failed PDP Bearer Failed Connect PDP Remote Server Busy PDP Remote Server Refused PDP Bearer Busy PDP Line Busy PDP Unknown Error PDP Invalid Parameter lt Acti
161. R lt 0 64 3 1 0 lt BER lt 1 3 4 1 9 lt BER lt 2 7 5 3 8 lt BER lt 5 4 6 7 6 lt BER lt 11 0 7 BER gt 15 0 lt c1 gt Description Integer Path Loss criterion parameter for neighbour cells The MS calculates this parameter in idle mode to decide if the cell is suitable to camp on After the calculation the criterion is C1 gt 0 See GSM 05 08 lt c2 gt Description Integer Cell reselection parameter for neighbour cells This parameter shall optimise the selected cell reselection lt ta gt Description 0 63 According to GSM 04 18 V8 6 0 the coding of the timing advance value is the binary representation of the timing advance in bit periods 1 bit period 48 13uS lt ta gt is the integer representation of the timing advance in binary format 64 255 Reserved lt tn gt Description 0 7 Its value indicates the time slot number in a traffic channel 163 14 NETWORK 14 3 AT E2SPN M2M Service Provider Name Description Command Possible Responses Request service provider AT E2SPN E2SPN lt spi gt indication CME ERROR lt err gt Show if the command is AT E2SPN OK supported ERROR Description Causes the MS to return the service provider name stored in the SIM card lt spi gt parameter The text will consist of a maximum of 16 bytes containing the service provider name stored in the EF spn file in the SIM card see GSM 11 11 ERROR is returned if the fiel
162. R1F Note The information here is not enough to write your own loader for the embedded applications if you want to write your own contact customer support The Download of scripts with the AT E2APD command uses the Xmodem CRC protocol This section explains how this is implemented with respect to the module Background The following terms are simply ASCII codes SOH chr 1 CTRL A Start of header EOT chr 4 CTRL D End of Transmission ACK chr 6 CTRL F Positive Acknowledgement NAK chr 21 CTRL U Negative Acknowledgement CAN chr 24 CTRL X Cancel In order to send the file you must first divide it into 128 byte sections packets Bytes 0 127 of the file make up the first packet bytes 128 255 make up the second packet etc The packet number sent is simply the number of the packet packet number starts at 0 at beginning of transmission If the packet number is greater than 255 then subtract 256 repeatedly until the number is between 0 and 255 For example if you were sending packet 731 then you would send 731 256 256 219 The 1 s complement of a byte to make life easy is simply 255 minus the byte For example if you had to take the 1 s complement of 142 the answer would be 255 142 113 CRC stands for Cyclical Redundancy Check In X Modem CRC itis also referred to as CRC 16 since there are 16 bits 1 word at the end of the block that contain the CRC This 1 word 2 byte CRC r
163. RING or CRING lt type gt refer to subclause Cellular result codes CRC in GSM 07 07 result code sent from TA to TE Whether this response is used when a normal voice call is answered depends on the manufacturer Read command gives the status of lt n gt and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the CLIP service according to GSM 02 81 given in lt m gt Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value lt n gt Description 0 Disable 1 Enable lt m gt Description 0 CLIP not provisioned 1 CLIP provisioned 267 19 12 LZT 123 7590 R1F 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 2 Unknown e g no network Unsolicited Result codes CLIP lt number gt lt type gt lt number gt Description String type String type ME number of format specified by lt type gt lt type gt Description Integer format Type of address octet in integer refer to GSM 04 08 sub clause 10 5 4 7 Example AT CLIP 1 OK RING CLIP 07747008670 129 Matt L 0 AT CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction Description Command Possible Responses Request calling line AT CLIR lt n gt CME ERROR lt err gt identification restriction OK ERROR Show the current setting AT CLIR CLIR lt n gt lt m gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CLIR CLIR list of supported supported lt n gt s
164. ROR Description Allows the external application to disable or enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes corresponding to the STK commands Parameter lt on_off gt is used to disable or enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code E2STK Setting chosen is stored internally so that it is not necessary to change it each time the ME is switched on If the presentation of the unsolicited result codes is disabled the messages below are not sent to the application The unsolicited result codes shall be disabled by default lt on_off gt Description 0 Disable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes related to STK Default value 1 Enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes related to STK Unsolicited Result Codes The unsolicited result codes defined in sections below can be received 234 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT 18 2 AT E2STKD M2M STK Display Text Description Command Possible responses Answer to the reception of DISPLAY TEXT Show if the command is supported AT E2STKD lt answer CME ERROR lt err gt S e OK ERROR AT E2STKD E2STKD list of supported lt answer gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description The ME passes the parameters within DISPLAY TEXT command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKD Command AT E2STKD allows the external application to send the app
165. RS 4 1 enabled which are capable of receiving at a maximum of four timeslots per frame down link and transmitting in one timeslot per frame up link e CSD Circuit Switched Data The radio devices are capable of establishing a CSD communication at 9 6 kbps e HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switched Data The radio devices support HSCSD communication with one timeslot per frame capacity in the up link and two timeslots per frame capacity in the down link 2 1 2 3 5 SIM Card An external SIM card with 3 V or 5 V technology can be connected to the radio device via its 60 pin system connector The unit does not need any external components to enable this 2 3 6 Power Consumption Idle Mode Transmit Operation GSM 850 and E GSM 900 Voice CSD lt 5mA lt 250 mA lt 2 A peak Data GPRS 4 1 lt 5mA lt 350 mA lt 2 A peak GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 Voice CSD lt 5 mA lt 250 mA lt 1 75 A peak Data GPRS 4 1 lt 5mA lt 350 mA lt 1 75 A peak Note The power consumption during transmission is measured at maximum transmitted power LZT 123 7589 R2B GR47 GR48 RADIO DEVICES 2 3 7 Other Features These include e 07 10 multiplexing e GPS interoperability e SIM application tool kit class 2 release 96 compliant e Embedded application e On board TCP IP stack e AMR Supported by GR48 2 4 Service and Support 2 4 1 Web Pages Visit our web site for the following information e where to buy radio devices
166. RT 3 May be used by embedded applications LZT 123 8081 Ric 28 Note Note GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION The Dig 2 75 V CMOS Output Input electrical characteristics shall apply with DGND as the reference Extra relevant data is specified for some of the signals The character format supported is 1 start bit 8 bit data non parity plus 1 stop bit in total 10 bits per character As stated in section 3 2 1 the module is unable to directly interface to a 3 3V micro processor As can be seen from the pin out table several of the RS232 pins have multiple functionality this is user selectable with the RS232 functionality set as default LZT 123 8081 Ric 29 3 10 1 UART RI 3 10 2 Serial GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 1 RS232 RD TD RTS CTS DTR DCD DSR and The UART1 signals form a 9 pin RS 232 V 24 serial port The signal levels do not match the standard RS 232 V 28 levels The relationship between the levels is shown in the table below RS 232 Level RD TD RTS CTS DTR 2 75 V CMOS Level DCD RI lt 3V 1 OFF gt 1 93 gt 3V 0 ON lt 0 80 V Conversion between the 2 75V CMOS levels and the RS232 levels can be achieved using a standard interface IC such as the Maxim Integrated Products MAX3237 Data Signals RD TD The default baud rate is 9 6 kbit s however higher bit rates up to 460 kbit s are supported and are set by the AT IPR command The UART 1 start
167. S Server listen mode This allows the unit to negotiate an IP address for itself and then listen for incoming traffic The implementation effectively provides a transparent communication link from the application to an internet server over GPRS 65 TECHNICAL DATA 11Technical Data Mechanical Specifications Maximum length Maximum width Maximum thickness Weight 50 mm 33 mm 6 82 mm excluding connector pins and top of antenna connector 18 5g Power supply voltage normal operation Voltage Ripple 3 6 V nominal 3 4 V 4 0 V lt 100 mV lt 200 kHz lt 20 mV gt 200 kHz Voltage must always stay within a normal operating range ripple included Power consumption Voice CSD lt 250 mA lt 2 A peak Data GPRS 4 1 lt 350 mA lt 2 A peak Idle mode lt 5 mA Switched off lt 100 pA Radio specifications Frequency range Maximum RF output power Antenna impedance GR47 band GR48 band GR47 GR48 50 Q E GSM 900 MHz and GSM 1800 MHz dual GSM 850 MHz and GSM 1900 MHz dual 900 MHz Class 4 2 W 1800 MHz Class 1 1 W 850 MHz Class 4 2W 1900 MHz Class 1 1 W SIM card 3Vor5V Support of external SIM card LZT 123 7589 R2B 66 TECHNICAL DATA Environmental specifications Operating temperature range full specification 10 C to 55 C Operating temperature range working Storage temperature
168. SM 900 GSM 1800 Frequency Range MHz TX 880 915 TX 1710 1785 RX 925 960 RX 1805 1880 Channel spacing 200 kHz 200 kHz Number of channels Modulation TX phase accuracy Duplex spacing Receiver sensitivity at antenna connector Transmitter output power at antenna connector 174 carriers 8 time slots GMSK lt 5 RMS phase error burst 45 MHz lt 102 dBm Class 4 2 W 33 dBm Automatic hand over between E GSM 900 and GSM 1800 374 carriers 8 time slots GMSK lt 5 RMS phase error burst 95 MHz lt 102 dBm Class 1 1 W 30 dBm LZT 123 7589 R2B GR47 GR48 RADIO DEVICES GR48 GSM 850 GSM 1900 Frequency Range MHz TX 824 849 TX 1850 1910 RX 869 894 RX 1930 1990 Channel spacing 200 kHz 200 kHz Number of channels Modulation TX Phase Accuracy Duplex spacing Receiver sensitivity at antenna connector Transmitter output power at antenna connector 124 carriers 8 time slots GMSK lt 5 RMS phase error burst 45 MHz lt 102 dBm Class 4 2W 33 dBm Automatic hand over between GSM 850 and GSM 1900 299 carriers 8 time slots GMSK lt 5 RMS phase error burst 80 MHz lt 102 dBm Class 1 1 W 30 dBm 2 3 2 Short Message Service The radio device supports the following SMS services e Sending MO mobile originated with both PDU protocol data unit and text mode supported e Receiving MT mobile terminated with both PDU and text mode
169. SR DCD CMOS level lt 3V 1 OFF gt 1 93 V gt 3V 0 ON lt 0 80 V Conversion between the radio device CMOS levels and RS232 levels can be achieved using a standard interface IC such as the Maxim Integrated Products MAX3237 5 9 2 Serial Data Signals RD TD LZT 123 7589 R2B The default baud rate is 9 6 kbits s however higher bit rates of up to 460 kbits s are supported set by an AT command UART 1 starts at a rate of 9 6 kbits s in standard AT command mode The radio device also supports GSM 07 10 multiplexing protocol and starts when the appropriate command is sent Serial Data From Radio Device RD RD is an output signal that the radio device uses to send data via UART1 to the application Parameter Limit Application load resistance lt 100 kQ Application load capacitance lt 100 pF 39 SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE Serial Data To Radio Device TD TD is an input signal used by the application to send data via UART 1 to the radio device Parameter Limit Application driving impedance lt 100 Input capacitance inF Input resistance 100 kQ to 2 75 V 5 9 3 Control Signals RTS CTS DTR DSR DCD RI UART1 control signals are active low and need a standard interface IC such as the MAX3237 to generate standard RS232 levels UART1 converted signals together with DGND RD and TD form a 9pin RS232 data port RTS and CTS are capable of transmitting at 1 10 of the data tran
170. STKP STK SEM KE 248 1OATAT E2STKU STK Send USSD eene eren erene Etenee etenee Entenet 249 18 12AT ER ECHT EE 250 18 13AT E2STKO SIM Application Toolkit Settings cccccceeccecseeeeeeeees 250 Supplementary Services 252 19 1 AT CPIN PIN Comttolsccnct aceon eos ect ee EE 252 19 2 AT CAOC Advice Of Change E 252 19 3 AT EDIF Ericsson Divert Funchon 253 19 4 AT EIPS Identity Presentation Gei 253 19 5 Al EMIN Ericsson Line EE 254 19 6 AT E2SSD M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch 255 19 7 AT E2SSI M2M Supplementary Service Indications a0000ananeeeeeena 256 19 8 AT CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions 1eeseeeereeeee 261 19 9 AT CCWA Call MEA 263 19 10 AT CHLD Call Hold and Multiparty 2c cc c cstdee cite ci eee 265 19 11 AT CLIP Calling Line Identification cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 267 19 12 AT CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction nnnnnnnnnnnnnnneneeeeen 268 19 13 AT CSSN Supplementary Service Notification 0n0nnnnneeneaaanenaeeeeeene 269 19 14AT CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data 271 Embedded Application ccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeanes 275 20 1 AT E2APC Application Program Contra 275 20 2 AT E2APD Application Program Download 278 20 2 1 Xmodem CRC Protocol CCITT 281 ENVinOnMeG ital cecccceseccccccccccccececececcccccccccerececececececec ec ec ec cere rece ec ce cer 284 8 LZT 123 7590 R1F
171. Such changes will nevertheless be incorporated into new editions of this manual All rights reserved Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications 2004 Publication number LZT 123 8081 Printed in UK Sony Ericsson GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Contents EE A 1 keet Hee ee 5 Vad e TEE 5 T2 EEN 5 1 2 1 Tvpe otMotule Ztatont ett eebeegebgeebeeeeEeebedE 6 1 2 2 Seege EEN 6 1 2 3 le 7 1 2 4 Dealer EE 7 1 2 5 ele e E 8 1 2 6 Power GONSUIMPUION DEE 8 1 2 7 Other E EE 8 1 2 8 DEVElODMIGIE EE 8 deeg IPRS CAUTIONS AE 9 TA ele 118 B ene en a E 9 2 Mechanical EELER 11 2T Jeroen 11 2 2 Physical Dimensions cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 12 3 System Connector Interface uk NEEN 13 Kale EE 13 3 2 General Electrical and Logical Characteristics ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 3 2 1 General Protection Heourements 16 EE Ee ie 18 3 3 1 The Analogue Ground s nneecondeandennneandeneceecen 18 3 3 2 The Digital Ground DGND c2ncncsuieoeneeeeneoeedoesds 18 3 4 Regulated Power Supply 2 2 2 2 scccceceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 19 3 4 1 Power SUPDIVA VCC say teed cule ede Rie ea he he edo ad aes 19 3 4 2 Battery Charging Input CHG IN 19 3 5 ON OFF and External Power Signals ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 21 3 5 1 eeler ENEE 21 3 5 2 External 2 75 edel eerste Sen lentben lene Jenlentben bea lenlents 22 3 0 e Ee ET EE 23 3 6 1 Audio To Mobile Statio
172. T CNMI 3 2 OK CMT 447747008670 Matt L 02 11 19 09 58 42 00 145 36 0 0 447785016005 145 8 Test sms Reading messages Reading messages is performed as in PDU mode AT CMGR 2 CMGR REC UNREAD 447747008670 Matt L 02 11 19 09 57 28 00 145 36 0 0 447785016005 145 8 Test sms OK Listing messages In PDU mode numbers are used as parameters In text mode letters are used instead and these must be upper case as the module does not accept lower case commands See the example below Example AT CMGL ALL CMGL 1 REC READ 447747008670 Matt L 02 10 21 10 07 23 04 145 4 Test CMGL 2 REC READ 447747008670 Matt L 02 11 19 09 57 28 00 145 8 Test sms CMGL 3 REC UNREAD 447747008670 Matt L 02 11 19 09 58 06 00 145 8 Test sms OK 2 CALL CONTROL 1 7 GPRS Communication To initiate a session with the network you need to setup a data account on the module using the AT CGDCONT command You need to specify the correct Access Point Name APN which you get from your service provider The command below sets up the data account to access Vodafone s internet server AT CGDCONT 1 IP internet After this you need to use the ATD command to make a GPRS call The example below dials into the network using account number 1 the GR47 supports up to 10 ATD 99 1 If
173. TSIDE_HPLMN lt BasicServChoice gt Description 2 BEARER_SERVICE 3 TELE_SERVICE lt BasicServValue gt Description lt TELE_SERVICE gt lt BEARER_SERVICE gt 0 TS_ALL_TELE_SERVICES 16 TS_SPEECH 17 TS TELEPHONY 18 TS_EMERGENCY_CALLS 20 21 22 24 25 26 28 29 30 32 TS_ALL_SHORT_MESSAGE_SER VICES 33 TS_SHORT_MESSAGE_MT_PP LZT 123 7590 R1F BS_ALL_BEARER_ SERVICES BS_ALL_DATA_CDA_SERVICES BS _DATA_CDA_300BPS BS_DATA_CDA_1200BPS BS_DATA_CDA_2400BPS BS _DATA_CDA_4800BPS BS_DATA_CDA_9600BPS BS ALL DATA CDS SERVICES BS_DATA_CDS_300BPS BS_DATA_CDS_1200BPS BS_DATA_CDS_2400BPS BS_DATA_CDS_4800BPS BS_DATA_CDS_9600BPS BS_ALL_PAD_ACCESS_CA_SERVICES BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_300BPS 258 34 35 36 37 38 40 44 45 46 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 97 98 99 104 112 120 128 208 209 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES TS_SHORT_MESSAGE_MO_PP TS_VIDEOTEX TS_TELETEX TS_ALL_FAX_SERVICES TS_FAX_GROUP3_ALTER_SPEE CH TS_AUTOMATIC_FAX_GROUP3 TS_FAX_GROUP4 TS_ALL_DATA_SERVICES TS_ALL_TELESERVICES_EXCEP T_SMS TS_AUXILIARY_SPEECH TS_AUXILIARY_TELEPHONY BS PAD ACCESS_CA_1200BPS BS PAD ACCESS_CA_1200_75BPS BS PAD ACCESS_CA_2400BPS BS PAD ACCESS CA 4800BPS DS bAD ACCESS CA 9600BPS BS_ALL_DATA_PDS_SERVICES BS _DATA_PDS_2400BPS BS _DATA_PDS_4800BPS BS_DATA_PDS_9600BPS PS ALL AUTERNATE SPEECH DATA CDA PS ALL AUTERNATE SPEECH DATA CDS PS A
174. TSO lt rcnt gt OK control ERROR Show the current setting ATSO lt rent gt Show if the command is ATSO SO list of supported supported lt rcnt gt s Description Defines the automatic answering feature of the modem A non zero value specifies the number of rings before the call is answered Note Call is always answered in the current fax class regardless of LZT 123 7590 R1E whether the incoming call is voice data or fax 30 3 CONTROL AND STATUS lt rent gt Description 0 Disable automatic answer Default value 1 7 Answer after the specified number of rings 3 3 ATS2 Escape Sequence Character Description Command Possible Responses Set escape sequence ATS2 lt esc gt OK character ERROR Show the current setting ATS2 lt esc gt Show if the command is ATS2 S2 list of supported supported lt esc gt s Description Defines the character to be used as the escape sequence character when switching from on line data mode to on line command mode The response to the command is modified to reflect the change lt esc gt Description 43 Escape sequence character Default value 0 to 255 Escape sequence character Note If the lt esc gt parameter is set to a value in the range of 128 255 the escape sequence detection is disabled 3 4 AIS Command Line Termination Character LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Set Command Line ATS3 lt value gt OK
175. Termination Character ERROR Show the current setting ATS3 lt value gt Show if the command is ATS3 S3 list of supported supported lt value gt s 31 3 CONTROL AND STATUS Description This S parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character recognised by the DCE from the DTE to terminate an incoming command line It is also generated by the DCE as part of the header trailer and terminator for result codes and information text along with the S4 parameter The previous value of S3 is used to determine the command line termination character for entry of the command line containing the S3 setting command However the result code issued uses the value of S3 as set during the processing of the command line For example if S3 was previously set to 13 and the command line ATS3 30 is issued the command line is terminated with a lt CR gt character IA5 0 13 but the result code issued uses the character with the ordinal value 30 IA5 2 14 in place of the lt CR gt lt value gt Description 13 Command line termination character Default value 0 to 127 Command line termination character 3 5 ATS4 Response Formatting Character Description Command Possible Responses Set Response ATS4 lt value gt OK Formatting Character ERROR Show the current setting ATS4 lt value gt Show if the command is ATS4 S4 list of supported supported lt value gt s Description LZT 123 7590 R1F T
176. Total number of receive and transmit timeslots that ME can use at the same time is 3 i e 2 1 The following applies in a HSCSD call 2 receive slots transmit slots lt sum gt lt codings gt Description 4 Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next established non transparent HSCSD call is 9 6 kbits s only LZT 123 7590 R1F 116 8 DATA HSCSD 8 3 AT CHSN HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration Description Command Possible Responses Set HSCSD AT CHSN lt wAiur gt CME ERROR lt err gt configuration This L lt wRx gt lt topRx gt OK command is also used lt codings gt ERROR during a call if new lt wAiur gt and or lt wRx gt are is desired Show the current setting AT CHSN e CHSN lt wAiur gt lt wRx gt lt topRx gt lt codings gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CHSN CHSN list of supported supported lt wAiur gt s list of supported lt wRx s list of supported lt topRx gt s list of supported lt codings gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description Controls parameters for non transparent HSCSD calls Changing lt topRx gt or lt codings gt during a call does not affect the current call Changing lt wAiur gt or lt wRx gt affects the current call only if lt topRx gt was non zero when the call was established When using the command in this way it comes in the action command c
177. a 4 Fax 8 Short message service 16 Data circuit sync 32 Data circuit async 64 Dedicated packet access 128 Voice L2 1 30 When no reply is enabled or queried this gives the time in seconds to wait before the call is forwarded Default value is 20 AT CNUMSubscriber Number Description Command Possible Responses Request subscriber AT CNUM CNUM number lt alpha1 gt lt number1 gt lt type1 gt lt speed gt lt service gt lt itc gt lt CR gt lt L F gt CNUM lt alpha2 gt lt number2 gt lt type2 gt lt speed gt lt service gt lt itc gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the AT CNUM CME ERROR lt err gt command is OK supported ERROR Description This command returns the MSISDNs related to the subscriber this information can be stored in the SIM or in the ME If subscriber has different MSISDN for different services each MSISDN is returned in a separate line lt alphax gt Description Alphanumeric Associated with lt numberx gt used character set should be the string one selected with the Select TE character set command 172 14 NETWORK CSCS lt numberx gt Description String type ME number of format specified by lt typex gt lt typex gt Description Integer format Type of address refer to GSM 04 08 subclause 10 5 4 7 lt speed gt Description data rate As defined in subclause 6
178. a GX 47 48 page 71 for mounting information and a connection diagram Power On To Power on the unit ensure a 12VDC supply is connected to J101 and toggle the power switch S102 CR101 upper should illuminate Press S400 and hold down for at least 0 5 seconds CR103 upper should illuminate then about 4 seconds later CR103 lower will illuminate and a random character should appear in your terminal program if connected to Serial port 1 and port settings are correct Refer to GX 47 48 Family Connection page 72 14 10 Flow Control The developer s board has the ability to disable and enable the routing of HW flow control signals between the PC and the module This is accomplished by setting S501 as per section 14 3 Whenever communications difficulties arise with the module disable HW flow control both on the developer s board and in your terminal program as a first step 14 11 Power Down When shutting down the developer s board and or module it is important that the module is allowed to perform and orderly shutdown before power is removed Do NOT simply pull the plug Press S400 the hardware shutdown button and hold down for at least 1 5 seconds Or send AT CFUN 0 The radio device takes a few seconds to shut down properly CR103 upper will stay illuminated until shutdown is complete 84 LZT 123 7589 R2B GR47 GR48 Al Commands Manual kd Q Sony Ericsson The information contained in this document is the proprietary inform
179. a State Description Command Possible Responses Establish GPRS packet CGDATA lt L2p gt cid CONNECT domain connection cid gt ERROR OK ERROR Show if the command is CGDATA supported CGDATA list of supported lt L2P gt s OK ERROR Description Causes the MS to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish communication between the TE and the network using one or more GPRS packet domain PDP types This may include performing a GPRS packet domain attach and one or more PDP context activations lt L2P gt Description PPP Point to point protocol for a PDP such as IP 6 4 AT CGDCONT Define PDP Context Description Command Possible Responses Select PDP context parameters Show the current setting Show if the command is supported CGDCONT lt cid gt L lt PDP_type gt lt APN gt lt PDP_addr gt L lt pd1 gt L PONT CGDCONT CGDCONT CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR CGDCONT lt cid gt lt PDP_type gt lt APN gt lt PDP_addr gt lt pd1 gt I pdNJI lt CR gt lt LF gt CGDCONT lt cid gt lt PDP_type gt lt APN gt lt PDP_addr gt lt pd1 gt pdN L H OK ERROR CGDCONT range of supported lt cid gt s lt PDP_type gt list of supported lt pd1 gt s L L list of supported lt pdN gt s KCR gt lt LF gt CGDCONT range of supported lt cid gt s
180. abetical Listing of AT Commands LZT 123 7590 R1F AT Command Description Page No AT Attention Command 125 AT amp C Circuit 109 DCD Control 144 AT amp D Circuit 108 DTR Response 144 AT amp F Set to Factory Defined Configuration 125 AT amp S Circuit 107 DSR response 145 AT amp W Store User Profile 125 AT List all Supported AT Commands 126 AT E2APC Application Program Control 275 AT E2APD Application Program Download 278 AT E2APR M2M Audio Profile Manipulation 69 AT E2CD Ericsson M2M Cell Description 157 AT E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification 65 AT E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode 158 AT E2ESC M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time 155 AT E2FAX Ericsson M2M Fax Comm Baud Rate Modification 123 AT E2GDV GPRS data counters 97 AT E2I0 Ericsson M2M Input Output Read Write 132 AT E20TR Operational Temperature Reporting 284 AT E2NBTS Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS 180 AT E2NMPR Ericsson M2M Set NMEA GPS Port Rate 121 AT E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum 183 AT E2PHFB Portable Handsfree Button Sense Enable 74 AT E2RESET Restart module 45 AT E2SMSRI Ring Indicator for SMS 231 AT E2SPI Serial Peripheral Interface 153 AT E2SPN M2M Service Provider Indication 164 AT E2SSD M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch 255 AT E2SSI M2M Supplementary Service Indications 256 AT E2SSN Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number 168 AT E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call 245 286 LZT 123 7590 R1F 22 ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS AT E2STKD
181. ains an FET buffer with an open drain output which is supplied with at least 2 V relative to ground by the radio device as shown below 2 2 5V MICP IMA CODEC 68nF d GR47 MICN Figure 5 5 Microphone connections to the radio device 33 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 5 7 4 Speaker Signals Pin Speaker signals Dir Function 55 BEARP O Speaker positive output 56 BEARN O Speaker negative output BEARP and BEARN are the speaker output pins These are differentialmode outputs The electrical characteristics are given in the table below Parameter Limit Output level differential 24 0 Vip Output level dynamic load 32 9 22 8 Vop Gain PCMIN to BEARP BEARN differential 9dB 1 Distortion at 1 kHz and maximum output level lt 5 Offset BEARP to BEARN 30 mV Ear piece mute switch attenuation 240 dB See PCMIN signal in The following table shows the ear piece impedances that can be connected to BEARP and BEARN Ear piece model Impedance Tolerance Dynamic ear piece 32 Q 800 uH A 100 pF 20 Dynamic ear piece 150 Q 800 uH 100 pF 20 Piezo ear piece 1 kQ 60 nF 20 34 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 5 8 PCM Digital Audio Pin Signal Dir Function 52 PCMCLK O PCM clock 51 PCMSYNC O PCM frame sync 47 PCMULD l PCM audio input to DSP 48 PCMDLD O PCM audio output from DSP 50 PCMI
182. al is active low You can define the exact behaviour of DTR with an AT command Data Set Ready DSR DSR indicates that the DCE is ready to receive data The signal is active low Data Carrier Detect DCD DCD indicates that the DCE is receiving a valid carrier data signal when low Ring Indicator RI RI indicates that a ringing signal is being received by the DCE when low You can define the exact behaviour of RI with an AT command 5 9 4 UART2 TD2 RD2 LZT 123 7589 R2B UART 2 consists of a full duplex serial communication port with transmission and reception lines This communication port works in a mode called Operation and Maintenance Operation and Maintenance mode works in combination with the SERVICE signal Two events are possible if the SERVICE signal is active when the radio device is turned on These are 41 SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE e the radio device is reprogrammed if UART2 is connected to a computer running Sony Ericsson update software e the radio device enters logging mode and sends data to UART2 if no reprogramming information is received Timing and electrical signals characteristics are the same as for UART1 TD and RD except for maximum baud rate which could increase to 921 kbps Transmitted Data 2 TD2 TD2 is used by the application to send data to the radio device via UART2 It has the same electrical characteristics as TD Received Data 2 RD2 RD2 is used to send data to the
183. ammable Input Output 6 LED 43 107 TD3 Programmable Input Output 7 TD3 44 108 RD3 Programmable Input Output 8 RD3 39 109 RTS Programmable Input Output 9 RTS 37 IN1 DTR Programmable Input 1 Data Terminal Ready 32 OUT3 DSR Programmable Output 3 DSR 45 LZT 123 7589 R2B Note SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 36 OUT2 RI Programmable Output 2 RI Ring Indicator 38 OUT1 DCD Programmable Output 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 40 OUT4 CTS Programmable Input Output 4 CTS Signals which have an entry in the Default Signal column in the above table are multiplexed The operational modes of multiplexed signals are controlled by AT commands and also by intrinsic functions available to an embedded application The following table gives you the input impedance These values only apply when the ports are configured as input signals Parameter Min Typ Max Units Input impedance pull up 50 100 120 kQ 1 O6 LED doesn t have an internal pull up If this pin is configured as an input it should not be left floating 1 O7 TD3 has a pull down instead of a pull up 5 15 Extended I O capabilities LZT 123 7589 R2B To increase flexibility and variety of radio device peripherals the RS232 hardware flow control shares its physical interface with the keypad scanning interface and the extended general purpose I O capability This sharing means that it is not feasible to operate all these features concurrently however with care
184. and lt dcs gt determines the way the information is encoded as in GSM 03 38 lt fo gt Description 0 255 Depending on the command or result code first octet of GSM 03 40 SMS DELIVER SMS SUBMIT default value 17 SMS STATUS REPORT or SMS COMMAND default value 2 in integer format lt vp gt Description 0 143 144 167 168 196 197 255 TP VP 1 x 5 minutes i e 5 minutes intervals up to 12 hours 12 hours TP_VP 143 x 30 minutes TP VP 166 x 1 day TP VP 192 x 1 week lt pid gt Description 0 255 Protocol Identifier in integer format Default value is 0 according to 07 05 section 9 2 3 9 lt dcs gt Description 0 255 Data coding scheme See GSM 03 38 UCS2 and compressed text not supported AT CSCS Select Character Set Description Command Possible Responses Set command informs AT CSCS lt chset gt OK TA which character set is ERROR used by the TE Show the current setting AT CSCS CSCS lt chset gt 228 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT OK e ERROR Show if the command is AT CSCS CSCS list of supported supported lt chset gt s OK ERROR Description This command informs the TA which character set lt chset gt is used by the TE The TA is then able to convert character strings correctly between TE and ME character sets When TA TE interface is set to 8 bit operation and the used TE
185. and EN 60950 following the provisions of Radio Equipment and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment directive 99 5 EC with requirements covering EMC directive 89 336 EEC and Low Voltage directive 73 23 EEC CE 0682 Basingstoke May 2003 Place amp date of issue nders o Corporate Vi e President M2M Com We fulfil the requirements of the R amp TTE Directive 99 5 EC 68 13Introduction to the Universal Developer s Kit Note The developer s kit is designed to get you started quickly It contains all the hardware you will need to begin the development of an application The only items you need to provide are a radio device a computer a SIM card with a network subscription and a knowledge of programming with AT commands Before connecting up and using the developer s kit we strongly recommend you read Integrating the Radio Device page 16 and all of this section There are many switches jumpers and connector options in the developer s kit Knowledge of the functionality of the radio device is therefore essential before you start altering the hardware settings The main hardware of the UDK is an open board onto which you plug the radio device Connectors switches jumpers and SIM card holder are provided to allow you to configure and access all the functions of the radio device 13 1 Contents of the Kit LZT 123 7589 R2B Please take the time to check the contents of your kit against the list shown b
186. are ignored Query for the selected credit call access server If any parameters are submitted they are ignored 185 15 PHONEBOOK lt passwd gt Description String character string ME lock code PS PH SIM lt indexn gt Description 1 Index number to the first credit card call access server 2 Index number to the second credit card call access server lt selindexn gt Description 0 Credit card calling disabled 1 Index number to the first credit card call access server 2 Index number to the second credit card call access server lt asn gt Description String Character string lt 0 9 gt max 20 characters ME number of format specified by lt typex gt lt type gt Description Integer format Type of address lt name gt Description String Character string of the name tag for M amp M Maximum of 18 characters lt vercode gt Description String Character string lt 0 9 gt Maximum of 20 characters lt send order gt Description Verification code first Default value ME number to call first 186 15 5 AT ESVM Ericsson Set Voice Mail Number LZT 123 7590 R1F 15 PHONEBOOK Parameter Command Syntax Description Command Possible Responses Set voice mail number Show the current setting Show if the command is supported or not AT ESVM lt sline gt lt index gt lt onoff gt lt number gt lt
187. as defined in GSM 11 11 Coding is according to lt NbrOfitems gt Description Integer type Number of Items to be presented in the following unsolicited results The maximum length is fixed The parameters have no default values 18 7 AT E2STKN M2M STK Envelope Menu Selection Description Command Possible responses Do the menu AT E2STKN lt sel_item CME ERROR lt err gt selection gt OK ERROR Show if the AT E2STKN E2STKN list of supported command is lt sel_item gt supported CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description The application informs the ME about the selected menu item by means of the AT E2SKTN command The ME answers with OK or ERROR The Do command allows the external application to select the menu item in the item list that was created by means of the SET UP MENU command lt sel_item gt Description Integer type The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255 It identifies the selected menu item corresponding to SET UP MENU command Values follow the definition described in GSM 11 14 18 8 AT E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible responses Answer to the AT E2STKC lt answer CME ERROR lt err gt reception of SET UP gt OK CALL ERROR 245 LZT 123 7590 R1F 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT Show if the AT E2STKC E2STKC list of supported command is lt answer gt supported CME
188. at Type of address octet in integer format GSM 04 08 10 5 4 7 lt err gt Description 0 ME failure 3 Operation not allowed 4 Operation not supported 21 Invalid index 264 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 30 No network service 31 Network timeout 100 Unknown Unsolicited Result Codes CCWA lt number gt lt type gt lt class gt Example AT CCWA CCWA 0 1 OK AT CCWA CCWA 0 OK 19 10 AT CHLD Call Hold and Multiparty Description Command Possible Responses Request call related AT CHLD lt n gt CME ERROR lt err gt supplementary services OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CHLD CHLD list of supported supported lt n gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command allows control of the following call related services e acall can be temporarily disconnected from the ME but the connection is retained by the network e multiparty conversation conference calls e the served subscriber who has two calls one held and the other either active or alerting can connect the other parties and release the served subscriber s own connection e This command should also be used when hanging up calls which have been initiated while a GPRS session is on going Calls can be put on hold recovered released added to conversation and transferred similarly as defined in 3GPP TS 22 030 265 LZT 123 7590 bit 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES This is based on
189. at between Coding is defined in lt response_type gt If lt response_type gt 3 Yes No the length of lt user_response gt is 1 byte Otherwise the ME gives an ERROR message Unsolicited Result Codes E2STKI lt min_length_response gt lt max_length_response gt lt echo_input gt lt prompt_coding gt lt prompt_text_length gt lt prompt_text gt Values follow GSM 11 14 standard lt min_length_response gt Description Integer type 0 160 Value indicating the minimum length of response field lt user_response gt lt max_length_response gt Description Integer type 0 160 Value indicating the maximum length of response field lt user_response gt lt echo_input gt Description 0 1 The user input shall be echoed The user input shall be hidden lt prompt_coding gt Description 0 Text is coded in unpacked format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet as defined in GSM 03 38 with bit 8 set to 0 It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit Text is coded in packed format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet packed in 8 bit octets as defined in GSM 03 38 It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet Text is coded in UCS2 alphabet as defined in GSM 03 38 It corresponds to data coding scheme of 16 bit UCS2 alphabet lt prompt_text_length gt Description Integer type Value indicating the maxi
190. ata gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CMGL lt index2 gt lt sstat gt lt oa da gt lt alpha gt lt scts gt tooa toda gt dength gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt data gt If text mode CMGF 1 command successful and SMS STATUS REPORT CMGL lt index1 gt stat gt lt fo gt r gt lt a gt lt tora gt lt scts gt lt dt gt lt st gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CMGL lt index2 gt lt stat gt lt o gt lt mr gt lt a gt l lt tora gt lt scts gt lt dt gt lt st gt If text mode CMGF 1 command successful and SMS COMMANDs CMGL lt index gt lt stat gt oz lt ct gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CMGL lt index gt lt stat gt lt fo gt lt t 222 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT If text mode CMGF 1 command successful and CBM storage CMGL lt index gt lt stat gt lt sn gt lt mid gt Page gt lt pages gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt data gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CMGL lt index gt lt stat gt lt sn gt lt mid gt Page gt lt pages gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt data gt Otherwise CMS ERROR lt err gt Show the AT CMGL CMGL lt stat gt current CMS ERROR lt err gt setting Show if the AT CMGL CMGL list of supported lt stat gt s command is CMS ERROR lt err gt supported Description Returns messages with status value lt stat gt from message storage lt mem1 gt to the T
191. ate TCP IP AT E2FT lt parameter gt OK loggin lt status gt SS ERROR Description The factory test command has been adapted to enable the user turn on IP logging and turn off normal logging which is seen through UART 2 if 2 7V is being supplied to the service pin 58 Once set up the unit needs to be reset these values are written to flash and need to be reset for normal logging to recommence This is helpful when debugging an overall system as it can be seen what the module is doing on an IP level i e retrying etc Defined values Table 1 lt parameter gt parameter lt parameter gt Description 4 Factory command 5 IP logging 6 Normal logging 113 LZT 123 7590 R1F 7 DATA TCP IP Table 2 lt status gt parameter lt status gt Description 0 Off On except when parameter 6 this value turns normal logging off Example AT E2FT 4 1 OK AT E2FT 5 1 OK AT E2FT 6 1 OK Turn the factory command on Turn IP logging on Turn normal logging off 114 8 Data HSCSD 8 1 AT CHSC LZT 123 7590 R1F HSCSD Current Call Parameters Description Command Possible Responses Show the current AT CHSC CHSC lt rx gt lt tx gt lt aiur gt lt coding gt setting CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show ifthe command AT CHSC CME ERROR lt err gt is supported OK ERROR Description Returns information about the current HSCSD call parameters
192. ategory This is what is referred to as user initiated up and down grading in GSM 02 34 and GSM 03 34 Note Recommended value for parameter lt speed gt in AT CBST is 0 lt wAiur gt Description 0 TA ME shall calculate a proper number of receive timeslots from currently selected fixed network user rate lt speed gt parameter from CBST command and lt codings gt and lt wRx gt or lt maxRx gt from CHSD command if lt wRx gt 0 1 Wanted air interface user rate is 9 6 kbit s 2 Wanted air interface user rate is 14 4 kbit s 3 Wanted air interface user rate is 19 2 kbit s lt wRx gt Description 0 TA ME shall calculate a proper number of receive timeslots from currently selected lt wAiur gt and lt codings gt See note below 117 LZT 123 7590 bit 8 4 AT CHSR 8 DATA HSCSD 1 Wanted number of receive timeslots is 1 2 Wanted number of receive timeslots is 2 lt topRx gt Description 0 Indicates that the user is not going to change lt wAiur gt and or lt wRx gt during the next call 1 Top value for lt wRx gt that user is going to request during the next established non transparent HSCSD call is 1 2 Top value for lt wRx gt that user is going to request during the next established non transparent HSCSD call is 2 lt codings gt Description 4 Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next established non transparent HSCSD call is 9 6 kbit s only HSCSD Para
193. ation of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International The contents are confidential and any disclosure to persons other than the officers employees agents or subcontractors of the owner or licensee of this document without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International is strictly prohibited Further no portion of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International the copyright holder Sixth edition November 2004 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International publishes this manual without making any warranty as to the content contained herein Further Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International reserves the right to make modifications additions and deletions to this manual due to typographical errors inaccurate information or improvements to programs and or equipment at any time and without notice Such changes will nevertheless be incorporated into new editions of this manual All rights reserved Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International 2004 Publication number LZT 123 7590 R1F Printed in UK LZT 123 7590 R1F Contents Contents soanar cents ccc cc cciccccccccecccccccceccccccccccccecccceccceccccecccccccceccccccsciccscse 3 1 Introduction to AT Commandes EE 10 1
194. ault is 145 otherwise default is 129 lt tooa gt Description String type GSM 04 11 TP Originating Address Type of Address octet in integer format default refer lt toda gt lt tora gt Description String type GSM 04 11 TP Recipient Address Type of Address octet in integer format default refer lt toda gt lt alpha gt Description String type Manufacturing specific Should be left empty but not omitted i e commas shall mark the place were it should be Used character set should be the one selected with command Select TE Character Set CSCS lt scts gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP service centre time stamp in time string format refer lt dt gt lt length gt Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode CMGF 0 the length of the actual TP data unit in octets i e the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length lt data gt The entered text should be formatted as follows if lt dcs gt set with CSMP indicates that GSM 03 38 default alphabet is used and lt fo gt indicates that GSM 03 40 TP User Data Header Indication is not set if TE character set other than HEX refer command Select TE Character Set CSCS in TS 07 07 ME TA converts the entered text into GSM alphabet according to rules of Annex A backspace can be used to delete last character and carriage returns can be used previously mentioned four character seq
195. back from the TA is controlled by V 25ter echo command E The PDU shall be hexadecimal format similarly as specified for lt pdu gt and given in one line ME TA converts this coding into the actual octets of PDU When the length octet of the SMSC address given in the lt pdu gt equals zero the SMSC address set with command Service Centre Address CSCA is used Sending can be cancelled by giving lt ESC gt character IRA 27 lt ctri Z gt IRA 26 must be used to indicate the ending of PDU lt mr gt Description 204 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT Integer type GSM 03 40 TP Message Reference in integer format lt length gt Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode CMGF 0 the length of the actual TP data unit in octets i e the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length lt ackpdu gt Description GSM 03 40 RP User Data element of RP ACK PDU format is same as for lt pdu gt in case of SMS but without GSM 04 11 SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by double quote characters like a normal string type parameter Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Send message AT CMGS lt da gt CMGS lt toda gt lt CR gt lt mr gt lt scts gt Text is entered lt ctrl e CMS ERROR lt err gt ZIESC gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CMGS OK supported ERROR Description Sends a m
196. be connected to the appropriate pins as follows Pin Signal Description Direction 23 DCD Data Carrier Detect O 25 CTS Clear To Send O 26 DTR Data Terminal Ready l 27 TD Serial Data To Module DTMS l 28 RTS Request To Send l 30 RD Serial Data From Module DFMS O Table 11 Direction of Serial Data Signals 79 USING THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT If this type of interface is to be used positions 1 3 and 5 of 501 must be set to OFF to prevent damage to the RS 232 transceivers 14 4 Engine Application Port 40 Pin Connector X600 LZT 123 7589 R2B Note The system connector header is used when the application requires direct access to any particular pin available in the system interface of the module i e digital audio pins This applies to the Gx 47 48 modules Special care shall be taken when using the header connector in order to prevent damage to the RS 232 transceivers The following table shows how to set the switch S501 when using the Application Port Switch Position Function ON OFF Position 1 DTMS OFF Position 2 CTS OFF Position 3 DTR OFF Position 4 DFMS OFF Position 5 RTS OFF Position 6 OFF Table 12 Switch Settings for S501 when using the Application Port Pin Signal Description 1 VCC Regulated supply voltage 2 VCC Regulated supply voltage 3 DGND Chassis Ground 4 DGND Chassis Ground 5 ON OFF ON OFF control of the radio device 6 TO_IN Turn on in 7 HR_IN Hardwa
197. cannot be applied the application designer is responsible for providing the SAR measurement test report and declaration e Even if SAR measurements are not required it is considered good practice to insert a warning in any manual produced indicating it is a radio product and that care should be taken 8 2 Installation of the Radio Device 8 2 1 Where to Install the Radio Device LZT 123 7589 R2B There are several conditions which need to be taken into consideration when designing your application as they might affect the radio device and its function They are Environmental Conditions The radio device must be installed so that the environmental conditions stated in the Technical Data chapter such as temperature humidity and vibration are satisfied Additionally the electrical specifications in the Technical Data section must not be exceeded Signal Strength Note The radio device has to be placed in a way that ensures sufficient signal strength To improve signal strength the antenna can be moved to another position Signal strength may depend on how close the radio device is to a radio base station You must ensure that the location at which you intend to use the radio device is within the network coverage area Degradation in signal strength can be the result of a disturbance from another source for example an electronic device in the immediate vicinity More information about possible communication disturbances can
198. cation cc ccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeese eens 128 11 10 AT GMM Read Model Identttcaton cc cccececcceesecceeeceeeeeeeaneeees 129 11 11 AT GMR Read Revision Identification cccccceecsecseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeee 129 11 12 ATI Identification Information ccccccccceccceeceeeceseeeeeeceeeceseeeeaeseueeees 130 12 lut e e lg TT EE 132 12 1 AT E2IO Ericsson M2M Input Output Read Write nnsenaaaaaananeeeeeeaa 132 12 2 AT E2U3 Ericsson M2M UART 3 Control 140 12 3 AT E2RS232 Ericsson RS232 control mode 141 br GN Dn te EEN 144 13 1 AT GEIN PIN CONTON co cc 2egeau ugt gedeelt Eed 144 13 2 AT amp C Circuit 109 DEE 144 13 3 ATED Circuit 108 DTR Response eiebedteetergedgked dE GE edeked deed gE ee 144 13 4 AT amp S Circuit 10 DSbhibResponse renren 145 13 5 AT WS46 Mode Gelechon 145 13 6 ATE COM Mian Be EE 146 13 7 AIV DCE RESPONSE Format EE 146 13 8 ATZ Reset to Default Confouraton 147 13 9 AT CMUX Switch to 07 10 Multiplex Protocol eeannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennne 148 13 10 AT CRES Restore SMS Gettngs nn eerrenrnrrrnrrnrreenn 149 13 11 AT ICF Cable Interface CharacherFomat 150 13 12 AT IFC DTE DCE Local Flow Control 151 13 13 AT ILRR Cable Interface Local Rate Heportmg 152 13 14AT IPR Cable Interface Port Commande 152 13 15AT E2SPI Serial Peripheral Interface nnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnenennnnnrnnrenrenne 153 13 16 AT E2ESC M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time 155 E WE Eed E 157 14 1 AT E2CD Ericsson
199. ccess short code 0 1 0 1 Reserved 0 1 1 0 Reserved 0 1 1 1 Reserved for extension Bits 1 4 only apply to bits 5 8 0000 0001 0010 and 0100 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Description 0 0 0 0 Unknown numbering plan 0 0 0 1 ISDN telephony numbering plan Recommendation E 164 E 163 0 0 1 0 Reserved 0 0 1 1 Data numbering plan Recommendation X 121 0 1 0 0 Telex numbering plan Recommendation F 69 0 1 0 1 Reserved 0 1 1 0 Reserved 0 1 1 1 Reserved 1 0 0 0 National numbering plan 43 3 CONTROL AND STATUS 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Private numbering plan 0 Reserved 1 Reserved for CTS see 3GPP TS 44 056 91 0 Reserved 1 Reserved 0 Reserved 1 Reserved for extension 3 14 AT EDST Ericsson Daylight Saving Time Description Command Possible Responses Set Daylight Saving Time Show the current setting Show if the command is supported AT EDST lt dst gt AT EDST AT EDST CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR EDST lt dst gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR EDST list of supported lt dst gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command sets the daylight saving time hours Note This command affects the MS clock set with the AT CCLK command To avoid confusion it is recommended the daylight saving time DST is set with this command before setting the actual local tim
200. ceived unread status in the storage changes to received read If listing fails final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned lt index gt Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by lt mem1 gt lt stat gt Description 0 Received unread message new message 1 Received read message 2 Stored unsent message only applicable to SMs 3 Stored sent message only applicable to SMs lt oa gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Originating Address Value in string format 217 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT BCD numbers or GSM default alphabet characters are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character refer command CSCS Type of address given by lt tooa gt lt da gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Destination Address Value in string format BCD numbers or GSM default alphabet characters are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character refer command CSCS Type of address given by lt toda gt lt toda gt Description String type GSM 04 11 TP Destination Address Type of Address octet in integer format when first character of lt da gt is IRA 43 default is 145 otherwise default is 129 lt tooa gt Description String type GSM 04 11 TP Originating Address Type of Address octet in integer format default refer lt toda gt lt t
201. clause 1 AB All Barring services refer GSM 02 30 AG All outGoing barring services refer GSM 02 30 AC All inComing barring services refer GSM 02 30 lt oldpwd gt Description string type lt oldpwd gt shall be the same as password specified for the facility from the ME user interface or with the change password 59 3 CONTROL AND STATUS command CPWD lt newpwd gt Description string type lt newpwad gt is the new password maximum length of password can be determined with lt pwdlength gt lt pwdlength gt Description Integer type Maximum length of the password for the facility lt err gt Description 0 ME failure 3 Operation not allowed 5 PH SIM PIN required 10 SIM not inserted 11 SIM PIN required 12 SIM PUK required 13 SIM failure 14 SIM busy 15 SIM wrong 16 Incorrect password 17 SIM PIN2 required 18 SIM PUK2 required 23 Text string too long 24 Invalid characters in text string 100 Unknown 101 255 Reserved by ETS Example AT CPWD SC 0000 0001 OK LZT 123 7590 R1F 60 3 CONTROL AND STATUS 3 31 AT CR Service Reporting Control Description Command Possible Responses Set Service Reporting AT CR lt mode gt OK Control ERROR Show the current setting AT CR CR lt mode gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CR CR list of supported supported lt mode gt s OK ERROR Descripti
202. cription 1 10 Number of seconds to wait for retry sending an IP packet when it can t be sent immediately Default 2 seconds Not supported lt NmRetry gt Description 3 8 Number of retries to be made before the socket is closed due to excessive delay Default 8 See application note Using AT commands to control the TCP IP stack in SEM modules for more information on the retry algorithm employed in the module stack lt WaitTm gt Description 1 10 Number of 100ms intervals to wait for incoming data before sending the packet to IP Default 2 200ms Not supported lt SendSz gt Description 255 1020 Size in bytes of the data chunk to be received before sending to IP Default 1020 bytes Note this is only applicable when using TCP connections when using UDP all packets will be 255 bytes in lenth lt esc gt Description 0 Turn the use of the escape sequence during a TCP IP session off Default 108 7 DATA TCP IP 1 Turn the use of the escape sequence during a TCP IP session on Unsolicited Result codes None Execution Time Executed immediately not time critical Example AT E2IPS E2IPS 2 10 2 1020 0 Defaults OK AT E2IPS 2 4 2 500 0 Set number of retires to 4 TCP packet size to 500bytes and turn of the escape sequence OK AT EZ2IPS Set to Defaults OK 7 8 AT E2 PL IP listen server Description Command Possible Responses Set th
203. ction has been lost see AT E2IPS command or it receives a disconnect message then the NO CARRIER response will be returned On line command mode can be entered by either dropping DTR or the at lt cr gt escape sequence this does however need to be turned on see AT E2IPS command for more details 101 Abortability 7 DATA TCP IP This command may not be aborted A connection can take upto 75 seconds to time out due to the unit having to wait for the packets that it has sent to time out this is hard coded and cannot be adjusted at present Defined values lt IPType gt Description 0 UDP Connectionless 1 TCP Connection oriented lt PAddr gt Description string String type of the form nnn nnn nnn nnn where n is a digit from 0 9 Standard IPv4 format for IP Address to connect to lt PPort gt Description Integer Range 0 65535 Decimal representation of Port number to connect to e g HTTP port is 80 lt ErrNum gt Description 1 No Connection 2 Connecting 3 Connected 4 Connection Busy 255 Other Error lt Open gt Description 0 IP connection Closed IP connection Open Unsolicited Result codes NO_CARRIER OK Execution Time Executed immediately not time critical LZT 123 7590 R1F 102 7 DATA TCP IP Example AT E2IPO E2IPA 0 IP Connection closed OK AT E2IPO 1 122 123 201 211 80 CONNECT TCP Connection success
204. curate information or improvements to programs and or equipment at any time and without notice Such changes will nevertheless be incorporated into new editions of this manual All rights reserved Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International 2004 Publication number LZT 123 7589 R2B Printed in UK Contents SEELEN A 1 IM EROCUGCTION RE 7 ES Me se EE 7 1 2 Prerequisites cages eege ee 7 To Manual Structure EE 7 2 GR47 GR48 Radio Devices ANNE 8 2 1 About the GR47 GR48 Family ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 2 2 Radio Devices in a Communication Gvstem 8 KA 1 E 10 2 3 1 Types of Mobile Station 2 0 cc0 nee nee ee eee 10 2 3 2 Short Message Service 2 2 2 2 seeseececeeeeeeeceeeeneeceeeeeenceeeeneneees 11 2 3 3 Voies Calls EE 11 2 3 4 Eeer 12 2 3 5 ele e EEN 12 2 3 6 Power EES IIIe egene ee 12 2 3 7 Other Feat reS eiserne eee a e eea a Ae geleet ideale 13 2 4 Service and EENEG 13 2 4 1 UN EE EE 13 2 4 2 EE ee 13 2 4 3 Integrators Manta EE 13 2 4 4 AT Commands Manual EE 13 2 4 5 M2mpower Application Guide AAA 13 2 4 6 Developers A EE 14 25 TEE 14 2 6 Customer support contact details cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 3 MADDIE ViAtIONS E 16 4 Mechanical Description 18 4 41 Interface EIERE EE 18 4 2 Physical lu 19 5 System Connector Interface sisanne aaan aaaea 21 S EEN 21 3 LZT 123 7589 R2A 5 2 Ge
205. currently uses SMS CSD HSCSD to immediately switch over to using GPRS with minimal changes in software GPRS is on average 1 10 the cost of these other solutions The unit is also able to handle circuit switched calls SMS while in a GPRS session this also dealt with in the application note referred to above 7 2 Embedded application Implementation There are a number commands allowing various functions these are as follows e Open closing IP connection Negotiates closes a dynamic IP address with the server e Send Receive TCP packets Performs all TCP operations to send and receive packets e Send Receive UDP packets Performs all UDP operations to send and receive packets e Resolve URL to an IP address Similar to nslookup command in DOS e TCP listen Enabling the unit to be registered on the GPRS network and listen for requests from servers clients wishing to connect to it When the unit is set up and controlled using the embedded applications either the EA or an external application can generate data to be sent and can pass it to the module for transmission LZT 123 8081 Ric 50 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION This effectively provides a transparent communication link to an internet server from the application over GPRS LZT 123 8081 Ric 51 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 8 Technical Data Mechanical specifications Maximum length Maximum width Maximum thickness Weight
206. d is not present on the SIM lt spi gt Description String String type field of maximum length 16 bytes character set as specified by command Select TE character set CSCS 14 4 AT EALS Ericsson Request ALS Status Description Command Possible Responses Requests current status AT EALS e EALS lt status gt for ALS CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT EALS CME ERROR lt err gt supported OK ERROR Description Used to request the MS to give ALS Alternate Line Services status The information is available on the SIM card If ALS is active the user has two lines for voice calls The line number or name tag for the line is then indicated on the display lt status gt Description 0 ALS function is not active off 1 ALS function is active on 164 LZT 123 7590 bit 14 NETWORK 14 5 AT ECSP Ericsson Customer Service Profile LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Read the customer AT ECSP lt service ECSP lt service service profile from the group gt group gt lt services gt SIM CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT ECSP CME ERROR lt err gt supported OK ERROR Description This command is used to read the customer service profile CSP from the SIM CSP is a list on the SIM which indicates the services that are user accessible Each of the services has a related bit within
207. de E2STKU lt coding gt lt text_length gt lt alpha_id gt Description The ME shall passes the lt alpha_id gt parameter within SEND USSD command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKU This informs the external application that the ME is sending a USSD string to the network lt coding gt Description 0 Text is coded in unpacked format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet as defined in GSM 03 38 with bit 8 set to O It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit Text is coded in packed format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet packed in 8 bit octets as defined in GSM 03 38 It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet lt text_length gt Description Integer type 0 240 Value indicating the maximum length of field lt alpha_id gt lt alpha_id gt Description String type Field of string type format between Coding is according to EFanp as defined in GSM 11 11 FP In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha identifier or this is a null data object the ME shall give FF to 249 18 12 18 13 LZT 123 7590 R1F 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT indicate SS string sent so that the external application is informed The maximum length is fixed AT E2STKR STK Refresh Unsolicited Result Code E2STKR lt indicator gt The ME informs the external application about
208. ded for compatibility 4 1 AT E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification LZT 123 7590 R1E Description Command Possible Responses Request AT E2EAMS ERROR operation lt op gt lt TxPGA gt OK with audio lt RxPGA gt lt SideT oneGain gt profile lt Aux InGain gt lt MiclnGain gt lt TxAGC gt lt Volume gt lt MaxVolume gt lt MicPath gt lt SpkPath gt lt TxPCM gt lt RxPCM gt lt HFAlgorithm gt lt LocalAudio gt lt TxGainLow gt lt MicVolt2V gt lt SideTone gt lt NoiseRed gt lt EchoCancel gt lt A nalogRing gt lt val gt Show the AT E2EAMS E2EAMS lt TxPGA gt current lt RxPGA gt setting lt SideToneGain gt lt AuxInGain gt lt MiclnGain gt lt TxAGC gt lt Volume gt lt MaxVolume gt lt MicPath gt lt SpkPath gt lt TxPCM gt lt RxPCM gt lt HFAlgorithm gt lt LocalAudio gt lt TxGainLow gt lt MicVolt2V gt lt SideTone gt lt NoiseRed gt lt EchoCancel gt lt AnalogRing gt OK ERROR Show if the AT E2EAMS E2EAMS command is list of supported lt op gt s supported ERROR Description This command allows the modification and configuration of the current audio profile An audio profile is a set of data which uniquely defines the way in which the audio paths gains DSP algorithms and switch setting are configured There are several 65 4 AUDIO audio profiles available in non volatile storage and the current pro
209. details Possible formats for the result codes are e Basic format result code such as OK The Basic result code also has a numerical equivalent e Extended format result code prefixed with a plus sign or an asterisk AT lt command gt lt parameter gt AT lt command gt lt parameter gt where the lt parameter gt is the result code value note that a single space character separates the colon character from the lt parameter gt If several values are included in the result code they are separated by commas It is also possible that a result code has no value The extended syntax result codes have no numerical equivalent They are always issued in alphabetical form e Information text response may contain multiple lines separated by lt CR gt The TE detects the end of informational text responses by looking for a final result code response such as OK 2 CALL CONTROL There are two types of result code responses as outlined below Final Result Code A final result code indicates to the TE that execution of the command is completed and another command may be issued e f you type an implemented AT command you should get the result code OK e If you type an AT command that is not implemented or which had the wrong parameter or syntax you will get an error result code It is ERROR or for example lt command gt ERROR followed by an error code Final result codes are Value General meaning
210. dex gt lt cid gt account ame gt lt userid gt lt passwo CME ERROR lt err gt rd gt lt bearer gt bearer_set tings lf lt bearer gt 1 bearer_setti ngs lt pref_serv gt lt pap _chap gt Read the current AT ENAD ENAD list of lt index gt s with settings corresponding lt name gt lt userid gt lt bearer gt followed by the list of bearer dependent parameters If lt bearer gt 1 bearer_settings lt pref_ser v gt lt pap_chap gt lt cid gt lt lock_ state gt CME ERROR lt err gt Test if the AT ENAD ENAD list of supported command is lt index gt s max length of supported lt name gt max length of lt userid gt max length of 110 LZT 123 7590 bit 7 DATA TCP IP lt password gt 1 list of supported lt pref_serv gt s list of supported lt pap_chap gt s list of supported lt lock_state gt s CME ERROR lt err gt Description This command is used for defining an Internet Account Abortability Not abortable Defined values Table 1 lt index gt parameter lt index gt Description integer 1 10 Each Internet Account is given a unique index When a data account is created a corresponding ENAD account is created to complement it If the account is not changed then no username or password is used during the negotiation for an IP address see AT E2IPA command When accounts are created data account 1 relates across to ENAD account 1 these nu
211. ding from the ADC DACs AT E2I0 0 AD1 E210 0 AD1 62 OK e Write lt op gt 1 Sets an output to a specific value For digital sources lt val gt 0 or 1 and for the analog sources 0 255 If the signal is bi directional IO1 to 105 it must be configured as an output before writing is allowed If the output can be written to the signal is set to lt val gt and OK is returned otherwise ERROR is returned AT E2I0 1 101 1 OK or AT E2I0 1 DA1 100 OK e Configure lt op gt 2 The configuration operation is used for the bi directional signals IO1 to 105 They can be configured as input lt val gt 0 or output lt val gt 1 If the signal is not configurable ERROR is returned in place of OK Once set the signal remains configured even after a power cycle Example shown below AT E2I0 2 101 1 Set 101 as an output OK e Configure Check lt op gt 3 This operation reads the current configuration of the signal Returned lt val gt is current 134 LZT 123 7590 bit LZT 123 7590 R1F 12 INPUT OUTPUT signal state If the signal is configurable the current state and OK are returned if not ERROR is returned AT E210 3 101 E210 3 101 1 101 is currently set as an output OK Trigger lt op gt 4 Input signals can be set to send an unsolicited result code whenever a change in one of the inputs has been produced Setting a trigger lt va
212. ds apart 3 One shot presentation of the compact network location information 4 Enable compact network location information unsolicited result code There will be continuous unsolicited information responses lt m gt seconds apart 5 One shot presentation of the network location information verbose format including 16 BTSs coming from the Serving Cell signalling information 6 As n 5 format but there will be continuous unsolicited information responses lt m gt seconds apart 7 One shot presentation of the network information same information as in n 1 but no headers or lt CR gt lt LF gt line separators Neighbour cells from the Toplist 8 As n 7 format but there will be continuous unsolicited information responses lt m gt seconds apart lt m gt Description 1 255 Integer type giving time in seconds between unsolicited responses Default value is 5 lt mcc gt Description Integer type Three digits in decimal format The Mobile Country Code identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU lt mnc gt Description Integer type Two digits in decimal format The Mobile Network Code identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell 161 LZT 123 7590 R1F 14 NETWORK lt lac gt Description Integer type Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format lt ci gt Description Integer type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format lt bsic gt Descrip
213. dynamic switching from one feature to another is possible Using Embedded Applications Note When a particular I O feature is required the user sets the state of the relevant I O blocks by disabling one set before enabling others The radio device checks the state of the I O when the user requests a new function The new function is rejected if the current function is not released first Only the states of I O1 I O5 are retained for the next power up For example inputs remain as inputs and outputs remain as outputs The voltage of a defined output pin will still drop to 0 Volts in the radio device power down state 46 SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 5 15 1 LED IO6 Capabilities The LED function pin can be used as a general purpose digital I O when the flashing LED function is not required However this pin does not have an on board pull up resistor It is required that an external pull up or pull down resistor be provided by the host circuitry when either not used or when used as a digital input 5 15 2 l O If pins labelled I and O are not being used for an alternative function they may be used for general purpose inputs or outputs respectively The inputs have an on board 100k pull up resistor and the outputs are driven rail to rail at 2 75V levels 5 15 3 UART3 lO The UART3 pins have been given alternative functions as general purpose I O both pins may be used for either input or output However the TX pin has a
214. e lt st gt Description Integer GSM 03 40 TP status lt ct gt Description Integer GSM 03 40 TP command type Default value is 0 lt sn gt Description Integer GSM 03 41 CBM serial number 219 LZT 123 7590 bit LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT lt mid gt Description String type All different possible combinations of CBM message identifiers refer lt mid gt default is empty string e g 0 1 5 7 lt mid gt GSM 03 41 CBM message identifier in integer format lt page gt Description Integer format GSM 03 41 CBM page parameter bits 4 7 in integer format lt pages gt Description Integer type GSM 03 41 CBM page parameter bits 0 3 in integer format lt pid gt Description 0 255 Protocol Identifier in integer format Default value is 0 according to 07 05 section 9 2 3 9 lt dcs gt Description 0 255 Data coding scheme See GSM 03 48 UCS2 and compressed text not supported lt sca gt Description String type GSM 04 11 RP SC address Address Value field in string format BCD numbers or GSM default alphabet characters are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character set lt tosca gt Description Integer type GSM 04 11 RP SC address type of address octet in integer format 129 ISDN telephony numbering plan national international unknown 145 ISDN telephony numberi
215. e command is supported AT ESCN lt mode gt L lt passwd gt lt indexn gt lt asn gt lt type gt lt name gt lt v ercode gt lt send order gt CME ERROR lt err gt when mode 3 ESCN lt indexn gt lt asn gt lt type gt lt name gt lt vercode gt lt send order gt When mode 4 ESCN lt selindexn gt OK ERROR AT ESCN ESCN list of supported lt index gt s list of supported lt mode gt s list of supported lt send order gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description Command is used to e setup a credit card number in the ME e disable credit card calls e enable one of the credit card call services e query the settings for one of the services e query the active credit call access server lt mode gt Description 0 Settings for a credit card call lt passwd gt lt indexn gt lt asn gt lt type gt lt name gt lt vercode gt lt send order gt The four 4 parameters lt passwd gt lt indexn gt lt asn gt lt vercode gt are mandatory when lt mode gt 0 If all those are not submitted ERROR will be returned Disable credit card calling lt passwd gt If any other parameters are submitted they are ignored Enable one of the credit card call services lt passwd gt lt indexn gt If any other parameters are submitted they are ignored Query lt passwd gt lt indexn gt If any other parameters are submitted they
216. e interrogate or deactivate a Supplementary Service String can contain values 0 9 and 255 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 19 7 AT E2SSI M2M Supplementary Service Indications Description Command Possible Responses Set Supplementary AT E2SSIl lt op gt ERROR Service indications OK Show the current setting AT E2SSI E2SSI lt op gt Show if the command is AT E2SSI E2SSI list of supported supported lt op gt s ERROR Description This command allows the user to display the unsolicited response code E2SSI on network responses either command confirmation or error responses for Supplementary Services This can be used in conjunction with the AT CSSN command which gives responses on the network notification of SS status The default setting is OFF where responses are disabled lt op gt Description 0 Disable E2SSI indications Default value 1 Enable E2SSI indications Unsolicited Result codes E2SSI lt errorcode gt lt Opcode gt lt SS_Code gt lt BasicServChoice gt lt BasicServValue gt lt SS_Status gt lt ForwardedToNr gt lt NoReplyConditionTime gt lt CLI_RestrictionOption gt or E2SSI lt errorcode gt lt Opcode gt lt SS_Code gt lt BasicServChoice gt lt BasicServValue gt lt SS_Status gt lt SubscriptionOption gt lt errorcode gt Description 0 OK no error 1 SSI_LPASSWORD_ERROR 2 SSI_TOO_MANY_PARTS 3 SS
217. e URL is encapsulated in quotes and cannot exceed 32 characters Unsolicited Result codes None Execution Time Executed immediately not time critical Example AT E2IPRH www google co uk E2IPRH 123 123 123 123 OK 7 6 AT E2IPE M2M IP Last Error Description Command Possible Responses Request a Error on AT E2IPE or o ERROR Last IP Connection AT E2IPE E2IPE lt ErrType gt OK Shows if the AT E2IPE OK command is ERROR supported Description This command responds with the Error code for the last IP Connection This is useful to determine the cause of the last IP Connection release whether it was meant or due to an error Abortability This command may not be aborted 106 LZT 123 7590 bit 7 DATA TCP IP Defined values lt ErrType gt Description 0 IP OK No Error 1 IP Host not found 253 IP Error Receiving IP Data 253 IP Error Max number of retries 254 IP Error GPRS Connection Lost 255 IP Error General Failure Unsolicited Result codes None Execution Time Executed immediately not time critical Example AT E2IPE E2IPE 0 No Error OK 7 7 AT E2IPS M2M IP Setup IP Parameters LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Request Setup of IP AT E2IPS lt RetryTm ERROR Parameters for next gt lt NmRetry gt lt WaitT OK session m gt lt SendSz gt lt esc gt Read Current status AT E2IPS E2IPS of Parameters
218. e allowed range even during the maximum peak current An electrolytic capacitor should be placed close to the power supply pins of the radio device to supply the peak currents during burst transmission See 5 4 VCC Regulated Power Supply Input e See section 5 2 1 General Protection Requirements page 25 Grounds Note A ground connection is provided at the mounting hole next to the RF connector on the radio device see figure 5 1 page 21 Connect this ground point to the DGND pins of the radio device by the shortest low impedance path possible The purpose of this connection is to allow any ESD picked up by the antenna to bypass the radio device s internal ground path It is recommended that you use a cable with a maximum resistance of 5 m2 for the ground connection 59 HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE RADIO DEVICE Note AGND and DGND are connected at a single point inside the radio device They must not be joined together in your application Audio Use a coupling capacitor in ATMS line if the application does not use the radio device s bias voltage See also Figure 5 5 Microphone connections to the radio device page 33 Software Upgrade To upgrade the software the system connector must be accessible in your application The pins SERVICE TD2 RD2 and the power signals are used for this purpose Please contact customer support for more details 8 3 Antenna 8 3 1 General The antenna is the component in your sy
219. e electrical characteristics are given below The signal reference is DGND Mode SERVICE Voltage V Drive Capacity Min Typ Max Normal Operation 0 8 Service enable programming 1 9 2 75V 3 6 gt 1mA Absolute maximum voltage 13 5 5 12 Buzzer Pin Signal Dir Description 31 BUZZER O Buzzer output from radio device Connecting the BUZZER signal to an inverting transistor buffer followed by a piezoelectric transducer enables the radio device to play pre programmed melodies or sounds 5 13 LED Pin Signal Dir Description 33 LED O LED Output from radio device 44 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE The LED states shown below are hard coded LED indication Operational status No indication No power or in the OFF state Green steady Power on not connected to a network Green blinking Power on connected to a network The following circuit is recommended for connecting an LED VCC 330 a M 10k LED rt 8c817 GR47 48 10k DGND Figure 5 10 Electrical connections for the LED 5 14 General Purpose Digital I O Ports Pin I O port Default Description signal signal 21 101 101 Programmable Input Output 1 KEYRow2 22 102 102 Programmable Input Output 2 ADC5 23 103 103 Programmable Input Output 3 KEYRow3 24 104 104 Programmable Input Output 4 KEYRow4 13 105 105 Programmable Input Output 5 ADC4 33 106 LED Progr
220. e unit to AT E2IPL lt sck gt lt IPtype Listening on port lt IPport gt behave as a server gt lt IPport gt lt to gt ERROR Test if the AT E2IPL e E2IPL list of supported commana i lt sck gt list of supported lt IPtype gt list of supported supported lt IPport gt list of supported lt to gt CME ERROR lt err gt Description The IP listen function is used to allow other IP address to connect to it The command will only succeed when an IP Session is Active see AT E2IPA Note The use of this command is defined in the application note Using AT commands to control on SEM modules Abortability The command is abortable 109 LZT 123 7590 bit 7 DATA TCP IP Defined values Table 1 lt sck gt parameter lt sck gt Description 0 Reference number of the socket to be connected to The unit currently only supports a single socket Table2 lt IPtype gt parameter lt Ptype gt Description 0 UDP connectionless 1 TCP connection oriented Table 3 lt IPport gt parameter lt Pport gt Description 0 65535 Port to listen on Table 4 lt to gt parameter lt to gt Description 0 When listen entered do not enter command mode unless aborted 1 255 Time out in seconds 7 9 AT ENAD Ericsson Internet Account Define Description Command Possible Responses Define an internet AT ENAD lt index gt lt n ENAD lt in
221. e with AT CCLK lt dst gt Description 0 Standard time 1 Daylight saving time 1 hour 2 Daylight saving time 2 hours LZT 123 7590 R1F 44 3 CONTROL AND STATUS 3 15 AT EMAR Ericsson Master Reset Description Command Possible Responses Perform a master reset in the MS Show if the command is supported AT EMAR lt ME lock code gt AT EMAR e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command requests the MS to reset user data The user data in the MS will be reset to the default values This command also unlocks the MS lt ME lock code gt Description String Security code ME lock code must be verified before performing the master reset see also AT CLCK 3 16 AT E2RESET Restart module Description Command Possible Responses Perform a restart AT E2RESET OK ERROR Shows if the command is AT E2RESET OK supported or not ERROR Description This command restarts the module 3 17 AT EPEE Ericsson Pin Event LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Requests the MS to inform when the PIN code has been inserted Show the current setting Show if the command is supported AT EPEE lt onoff gt AT EPEE AT EPEE CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR EPEE lt onoff gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR EPEE list of
222. ed lt response_type gt Description 0 Response type shall be digits 0 9 and 1 Response type shall be SMS default alphabet 2 Response type shall be UCS2 Coded We currently do not support this option if you use it an error will be returned 3 Response type shall be Yes No response 237 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT lt user_response gt Description String type Field of 1 to 2 bytes length in string type format between Coding is defined in lt response_type gt Length shall be 2 bytes when coding is UCS2 Otherwise it shall be 1 byte Unsolicited Result Codes E2STKG lt coding gt lt prompt_text_length gt lt prompt_text gt Values follow GSM 11 14 standard 18 4 AT E2STKI lt coding gt Description 0 Text is coded in unpacked format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet as defined in GSM 03 38 with bit 8 set to 0 It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit Text is coded in packed format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet packed in 8 bit octets as defined in GSM 03 38 It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet lt prompt_text_length gt Description Integer type 0 235 Value indicating the maximum length of field lt prompt_text gt lt prompt_text gt Description String type Field of maximum length lt prompt_text_length gt in string type format between Coding is def
223. ed as for EFanp See GSM 04 08 section 10 5 4 7 for the allowed values lt SS_string gt Description String type SS string of format lt ton gt lt coding gt Description 0 Text is coded in unpacked format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet as defined in GSM 03 38 with bit 8 set to O It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit Text is coded in packed format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet packed in 8 bit octets as defined in GSM 03 38 It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet lt text_length gt Description Integer type 0 240 Value indicating the maximum length of field lt alpha_id gt LZT 123 7590 R1F 248 18 11 LZT 123 7590 R1F 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT lt alpha_id gt Description String type Field of string type format between Coding is according to EFanp as defined in GSM 11 11 FF In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha identifier or this is a null data object the ME shall give FF to indicate SS string sent so that the external application is informed The maximum length is fixed lt SS_return gt Description Integer type Field of 1 byte indicating the SS Return Result Operation code as defined in GSM 04 80 so that the external application is informed about the result of the SS operation AT E2STKU STK Send USSD Unsolicited Result Co
224. edded application It also allows the management of the active script and the deletion of scripts If there is no script active then all the NVM space is available for scripts Only an active script will be considered as non overwriteable Four operations are currently allowed Download lt cmd gt 0 With this command the number of the script to be downloaded and the length in number of lines 128 byte chunks is supplied as initial parameters After the lt CR gt the switch is made into script download mode Xmodem CRC protocol The data is then transferred across the serial interface using the Xmodem CRC protocol Transfer is terminated by sending 2 EOT bytes The first chunk of data sent contains the script information the subsequent chunks are script data Example AT E2APD 0 1 100 lt CR gt C Script downloaded here EOT 2 OK OK is only returned if the downloaded script is verified without errors otherwise an error code is reported The script is verified by checking the number of chunks received is as given by the 278 20 EMBEDDED APPLICATION command and that the script information given in the first chunk matches with the script information generated by the interpreter internal to the module The script that may previously have been in this slot will be rendered invalid even if the download fails Upload Script lt cmd gt 1 NOT YET SUPPORTED With this command it is possible to retri
225. efore powering up the developer s board and module The following configurations should be considered the baseline whenever attempting to resolve issues with the board or module Note that HW flow control is turned on Caution Ensure the Rotary Switch has been set to 4 prior to powering on the Developer s Board Failure to do so may result in damage to the module 14 1 Gx 47 48 Setup Switch Settings Rotary Switch Setting Audio Switch S201 Audio Switch S202 Flash Switch S101 SW104 4 Bypass Bypass DCD Table 2 Baseline Switch Settings for Gx 47 48 Jumper Settings X100 X101 X102 X400 X501 X502 X503 TP101 Supply VDIG Flash SIM TD RD Buzzer Test Source source Point select Internal 1 2 Normal Installed Sec Port Sec Port Installed Installed Table 3 Baseline Jumper Settings for Gx 47 48 X603 X601 X401 X402 X403 X406 X407 PCM RTC TO_IN DTR_PWR_ON PC Address PC Data PC Clk Internal Installed Installed Installed Uninstalled Installed Installed Table 4 Baseline Jumper Settings for Gx 47 48 74 LZT 123 7589 R2B USING THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT WIS DOEN 4ezzng 09X NO Hd YLG uf uo uni ssa1ppy Oz COEN ead Del 90X KA
226. elow If any of the items are missing contact your supplier immediately Description Manufacturer Part Qty Power Supply 12VDC Astrodyne SPU45 105 1 SE Solutions TR45A1211A02 Power Cord US Plug Allied 626 3520 1 Power Cord Euro Plug Allied 626 5206 1 Power Cord UK Plug Allied 626 5200 1 Serial Cable DB9MF Assman AK131 2 1 Hands Free 2 5mm Plug Sony Ericsson 1 HBH0043 015430 Antenna 900 1800 MHz Panorama Antennas 1 Ltd TDE 3SP Antenna 800 1900 MHz Panorama Antennas 1 Ltd TAP 3SP 69 Cable 40 pin to 30 pin ribbon interface DM XX Cable 40 pin to 40 pin ribbon interface CM xx GM xx Cable MMCxX rt angle to MMCX straight UDK Developer s Board INTRODUCTION TO THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT Sony Ericsson 2 1078 TVK 117 2403 Sony Ericsson 3 1078 TVK 117 2403 Sony Ericsson 1 1078 TVK 117 2403 ROA 117 2449 Nut 2 56 Hex Digi Key HD723 ND 2 Nut 4 40 Hex Digi Key HD724 ND 5 Rubber Feet Allied SJ 5303 6 Screw 2 56 1 2 Length Digi Key H701 ND 2 Screws 4 40 5 16 Length Digi Key H704 ND 18 Stand offs 4 40 250 O D 3 4 Length Digi Key 3481K ND 2 Stand offs 4 40 250 O D 5 8 Length Digi Key 1839K ND 4 Stand offs 2 56 156 O D 1 4 Length Digi Key 1801BK ND 2 Washer 2 56 Lock Inside Tooth Digi Key H728 ND 2 Washer 4 40 Lock Inside Tooth Digi Key H729 ND 12 Aluminum Heat Sink Thermal Pad Documentation CD Sony Ericsson SXA 1341627 Comrades
227. eplaces the 1 byte checksum in X Modem In this implementation the CCITT polynomial is used to generate the CRC X16 X12 X5 1 CRC 16 guarantees detection of all single and double bit errors all errors with an odd number of bits and over 99 9969 of all burst errors The easiest and fastest way to calculate the CRC is to use a lookup table The first byte the downloader sends is referred to as the NCGbyte in this case is capital C in ASCII 281 LZT 123 7590 R1F 20 EMBEDDED APPLICATION The Actual Transfer The uploader waits until the downloader sends a NCG byte The NCG byte is the signal that the downloader is ready to start If the downloader takes too long or an error occurs then the uploader will stop waiting or Time Out after 20 seconds If this happens then the file transfer must restart a CAN byte is sent by the module and an error code is output With each packet sent the uploader sends 1 SOH byte 1 byte 2 The packet number 1 byte 3 The 1 s complement of the packet number 1 byte 4 The packet 128 bytes 5 The high byte of the CRC 16 1 byte 6 The low byte of the CRC 16 1 byte The above six things are called the block The downloader 1 Ensures that the packet number sent matches the actual packet number that it is If the third block sent has a A as the second byte something is wrong gt CANCEL TRANSFER send CAN byte 2 Adds the packet number and the 1 s complement of it to
228. es CME ERROR lt err gt lt format gt lt oper gt OK ERROR CPOL lt index1 gt lt format gt lt oper1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CPOL lt index2 gt lt format gt lt oper2 gt CPOL CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR CPOL list of supported lt index gt s list of supported lt format gt s CME ERROR lt err gt e OK ERROR CPOL 176 14 17 LZT 123 7590 R1F 14 NETWORK Description Note This command is used to edit the SIM preferred list of networks Execute command writes an entry in the SIM list of preferred operators EFpiunsei If lt index gt is given but lt oper gt is left out entry is deleted If lt oper gt is given but lt index gt is left out lt oper gt Is put in the next free location If only lt format gt is given the format of the lt oper gt in the read command is changed ME may also update this list automatically when new networks are selected Read command returns all used entries from the SIM list of preferred operators Test command returns the whole index range supported by the SIM lt index gt Description 1 n integer type the order number of operator in the SIM preferred operator list value range returned by test command lt format gt Description 0 long format alphanumeric lt oper gt 1 short format alphanumeric lt oper gt 2 numeric lt oper gt lt oper gt Description string type Format determined by the lt f
229. escription 14 ON OFF l Square signal to turn on off the module 34 VIO O External power supply 3 5 1 Module ON OFF The module is powered ON OFF by grounding pulling low pin 14 as per figure 3 2 below The pin should then be released as it has an internal pull up to return it to the high state Note Driving with 2 75V or 3 6V is not permitted and restricts module functionality Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Units Voltage HIGH VCC By internal pull up Level FALSE only Voltage LOW 0 0 3 VCC Volts Level TRUE Pull up Internal pull up 39 KQ Resistance On Off VIO Mod powered towr Module power up Module power down Figure 3 20N OFF and VIO performance Where the times are defined as follows LZT 123 8081 Ric 21 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Time Description Min Typ Max Unit bag Time to start an ON OFF 1 1 5 S operation towr Time for module start up once 100 200 mS ON OFF signal has set to TRUE 3 5 2 External 2 75 V VIO The VIO has been derived from a 2 75 V regulator It is possible to use this output as a power supply at 2 75 V with a maximum of 75mA It will indicate that the module is alive and it could power external devices In this case the external applications do not need to implement a 2 75 volt regulator to adapt the incoming from module point of view serial data Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Units Output Voltage oa DU 2 70 2 75
230. esponses Request SIM Serial AT E2SSN lt SSN gt number Shows if the command is AT E2SSN OK supported ERROR Description This command requests the SIM serial number held in the ICCid field address 2FE2 on the SIM and returns all valid characters to the TE This field is detailed in GSM 11 11 section 10 1 1 lt SSN gt Description String without SIM serial number double quotes Examples LZT 123 7590 R1F AT E2SSN 8944110063503224707 OK where the raw data contained in the ICCid field on the SIM is 984411003605234207F7 Test command AT E2SSN OK 168 14 NETWORK 14 9 AT ESLN Ericsson Set Line Name Description Command Possible Responses Sets the line name tag in AT ESLN lt line gt the MS L lt name gt Show the current setting AT ESLN Show if the command is AT ESLN supported CME ERROR lt err gt e OK ERROR gt ESLN lt line1 gt lt name1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt ESLN lt line2 gt lt name2 gt e CME ERROR lt err gt lt OK ERROR e ESLN list of supported lt line gt s lt Iname gt e CME ERROR lt err gt e OK ERROR Sets the name tag for a selected line lt line gt Description 0 This means that the two lines will use the default name tags Le L1 and L2 Default value 1 Line 1 2 Line 2 lt name gt Description String Characters for name tag This parameter i
231. essage from a TE to the network SMS SUBMIT Message reference value lt mr gt is returned to the TE on successful message delivery Optionally when AT CSMS lt service gt value is 1 and there is network support lt scts gt is returned Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code If sending fails in a network or an ME error final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned This command is abortable The entered text GSM 03 40 TP Data Unit is sent to address lt da gt and all current settings refer Set Text Mode Parameters CSMP and Service Centre Address CSCA are used to construct the actual PDU in the ME TA The TA shall send a four character sequence lt CR gt lt LF gt lt greater_than gt lt space gt IRA 13 10 62 32 after the command line is terminated with lt CR gt after that text can be entered from the TE to the ME TA The DCD signal is in the ON state as text is entered The echoing of entered characters back from the TA is controlled by V 25ter echo command E 205 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT e The entered text should be formatted as follows if lt dcs gt set with CSMP indicates that GSM 03 38 default alphabet is used and lt fo gt indicates that GSM 03 40 TP User Data Header Indication is not set if TE character set other than HEX refer command Select TE Character Set CSCS in TS 07 07 ME TA converts the entered text i
232. est command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value lt n gt Description 0 Disable 1 Enable lt m gt Description 0 COLP not provisioned 1 COLP provisioned 2 unknown e g no network etc Intermediate Result codes COLP lt number gt lt type gt lt subaddr gt lt satype gt lt alpha gt Read Operator Names Description Command Possible Responses Request operator COPN COPN selection lt numeric1 gt lt alpha1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt COPN lt numeric2 gt lt alpha2 gt LJ CME ERROR lt err gt 174 14 NETWORK OK ERROR Description Command returns the list of operator names from the ME Each operator code lt numericn gt that has an alphanumeric equivalent lt alphan gt in the ME memory shall be returned This command can return several hundred names and can execute for up to 90 seconds Defined values lt numericn gt string type operator in numeric format lt alphan gt string type operator in long alphanumeric format 14 15 AT COPS Operator Selection Description Command Possible Responses Request operator AT COPS lt mode gt CME ERROR lt err gt selection L lt format gt OK lt oper gt ERROR Show the current setting AT COPS COPS lt mode gt lt format gt lt oper gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT COPS COPS list of supported supported lt sta
233. et Management e Vending Machines e Security and Alarm e Other telemetry applications 1 2 Features The module performs a set of telecom services TS according to GSM standard phase 2 ETSI and ITU T The functions of the module are implemented by issuing AT commands over the serial interface Supported AT commands are listed in section 5 these are defined LZT 123 8081 Ric GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION further in GSM 7 05 7 07 and the GR47 GR48 integrator s manual 1 2 1 Type of Mobile Station The GR4X family are normal dual band type of MS with the following characteristics GR47 GSM 900 E GSM 900 GSM 1800 Frequency Range TX 880 915 TX 880 890 TX 1710 1785 El RX 935 960 RX 925 935 RX 1805 1880 Channel spacing 200 kHz 200 kHz Number of channels 173 Carriers 8 TDMA GSM Channels 1 to 124 E GSM Channels 975 to 1023 374 Carriers 8 TDMA DCS Channels 512 to 885 Modulation GMSK GMSK TX Phase Accuracy lt 5 RMS Phase error burst lt 5 RMS Phase error burst Duplex spacing 45 MHz 95 MHz Receiver sensitivity at lt 102 dBm lt 102 dBm antenna connector Transmitter output Class 4 Class 1 power at antenna connector 2W 33 dBm 1W 30 dBm Automatic hand over between GSM 900 and GSM 1800 GR48 GSM 850 GSM 1900 Frequency Range MHz TX 824 849 TX 1850 1910 RX 869 894 RX 1930 1990 Channel spacing 200 kHz 200 kHz Number of channels Modulation TX Phase Accuracy
234. eve the specified script from the Module NVM The file is output in hex bytes terminated by lt CR gt lt LF gt OK Example AT E2APD 1 1 lt CR gt E2APD 1 lt Script Data gt OK This example requests script 1 to be uploaded Delete Script lt cmd gt 2 With this command the script which is defined is deleted from NVM If it is the inactive script it is deleted without affecting the active script This can be done while the application is running If the script is the running script and the application is running or paused then the command will return an error The application will need to be stopped before erasing the running script using AT E2APC Make Script Active lt cmd gt 3 With this command the script defined is made active If there is another script that is currently active and running the command will fail If it is not running then the active script will be made inactive and the new script will be made active If the script number provided is outside the valid script number range then no scripts are made active effective deactivation When one script is running it is possible to make the other script active This means that the next time the application is started the other script will be run This allows the possibility of hot swapping scripts If one script is running and the other is made active then the read function returns that there is no space for more scripts as neither an active or a ru
235. ex gt successful and SMS DELIVER CMGR lt tat gt lt oa gt lt alpha gt lt cts gt lt tooa gt fo gt lt pid gt lt dcs gt lt sca gt lt tosca gt lt length gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt data gt if text mode CMGF 1 command 216 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT successful and SMS SUBMIT CMGR lt stat gt lt da gt lt alpha gt lt toda gt lt fo gt lt pid gt lt dcs gt lt vp gt lt sca gt lt tosca gt lt length gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt data gt if text mode CMGF 1 command successful and SMS STATUS REPORT CMGR lt stat gt lt o gt lt mr gt lt a gt lt tora gt lt scts gt lt dt gt lt t gt if text mode CMGF 1 command successful and SMS COMMAND CMGR lt stat gt lt fo gt lt t pid gt lt mn gt lt da gt lt toda gt dength gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt cdata gt if text mode CMGF 1 command successful and CBM storage CMGR lt stat gt lt sn gt lt mid gt lt dcs gt lt page gt lt pages gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt data gt CMS ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the AT CMGR OK command is ERROR supported Description Returns messages with location index lt index gt from message storage lt mem1 gt to the TE About text mode parameters in Italics refer command Show Text Mode Parameters CSDH If the status of the message is re
236. f supported lt N2 gt s lt ver2 gt list of supported lt T4 gt s J OK ERROR 82 LZT 123 7590 R1E 5 DATA CSD HSCSD Description Radio link protocol RLP parameters used when non transparent data calls are originated may be altered with this command Available command subparameters depend on the RLP versions implemented by the device e g lt ver gt may not be available if device supports only versions 0 and 1 Read command returns current settings for each supported RLP version lt verx gt Only RLP parameters applicable to the corresponding lt verx gt are returned Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value If ME TA supports several RLP versions lt verx gt the RLP parameter value ranges for each lt verx gt are returned in a separate line lt iws gt Description 120 IWF to MS window size 0 496 lt mws gt Description 120 MS to IWF window size 0 496 lt T1 gt Description 48 Acknowledgment timer T1 10 ms 38 100 lt N2 gt Description 6 Re transmission attempts N2 0 255 lt T4 gt Description 5 Re sequencing period T4 10 ms 3 255 lt ver gt Description Integer RLP version When version indication is not present lt ver gt 0 is assumed 83 LZT 123 7590 R1E 5 DATA CSD HSCSD Example AT CRLP CRLP 61 61 48 6 0 CRLP 120 120 48 6 2 3 OK 84 6 Data GPRS
237. file can be modified by use of the AT E2APR command The AT E2EAMS command allows the user to e configure the whole profile specifying each audio parameter in a comma separated list e seta single parameter given by its parameter number e save the current profile to non volatile memory under the current profile number see AT E2APR The current audio settings can also be displayed by running the read command AT E2EAMS Default audio settings are given in AT E2APR Abortability This command may not be aborted Refer to the diagram below to understand which parts of the audio circuit are affected by the various parameters TxPCM 13bit or 16 bit TP GA Net Nett SS 8 z S e A Za ag amp Se Fo i D i oer RPCM D 13 bit or 16 bit Mei N Opcode used with command AT E2EAMS Figure 4 1 Audio diagram of the CODEC 66 LZT 123 7590 R1F 4 AUDIO N Unit Range 1 TxPGA 10dB to 7 5dB 2 RxPGA 10dB to 7 5dB 3 Sidetone 10dB to 25dB Gain 4 AuxGain Mute to 46dB 5 Mute to 46dB 6 OdB to 6dB 7 15dB to 11 25dB 11 25dB 8 Mute to 14dB 10 5dB 9 Diff MIC 10 Diff BEAR 11 13 or 16 bit 12 13 or 16 bit 13 Switching Handsfree 14 Local Audio Spkr only 15 TxAMP 70B to 0dB 16 Mic Supply 2V to 2 5V 17 Sidetone Default Values On Off Previously Volume 18 Noise Reduction 19 Ec
238. fine ssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 110 PAO AM eI EP OIG EE 113 Bi Data SD WE 115 8 1 AT CHSC HSCSD Current Call barameiers rennene 115 8 2 AT CHSD HSCSD Device barameters 116 8 3 AT CHSN HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration 117 8 4 AT CHSR HSCSD Parameters Henort 118 8 5 AT CHSU HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading 0 119 9 GPS Interoperability 2 120 9 1 AT EENMEA NMEA GPS Mode on UART2 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 120 9 2 AT E2NMPR Ericsson M2M Set NMEA GPS Port Rate 0 121 LR E A 123 10 1 AT E2FAX Ericsson M2M Fax Comm Baud Rate Modification 123 10 2 Low Level Fax Commande ssssnnnsssessserrrtrtntrerrrrrrrntttrnnnnenrr rt tnrreenn 124 5 LZT 123 7590 R1F 11 Identificati oMm EE 125 WT AT Attention Command ecennnncen ete ease eee wie ales 125 11 2 AT amp F Set to Factory Defined Configuration cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 125 11 3 ATAW Store User Eed 125 11 4 AT List all Supported AT Commande onnnnnnseneeeennnnnnereenrrnnr nnr enreeen 126 11 5 AT CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification cccceeeeeee cece ee 126 11 6 AT CGMM Read MS Model Jdentttcaton ccc ceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 127 11 7 AT CGMR Read MS Revision Identification ccccccececeeeseeeeeeeeeee 127 11 8 AT CGSN Read MS Product Serial Number Identification 128 11 9 AT GMI Read Manufacturer Identifi
239. for either input or output However the TX pin has a 100kQ pull down resistor to ground and the RX pin has a 100k pull up resistor to 2 75V This must be taken into consideration when designing the host circuit 3 17 4 lO ADC To increase analogue input capabilities the GR47 optimises the IO by multiplexing or sharing different features on single pins There are two digital IO pins which now have an additional ADC input When configured as digital IO the software will not read the voltages at the two new ADC inputs When configured as ADC inputs the software will configure the digital IO pins as input or high impedance tri state In this state any applied voltage between OV and 2 75V can be read as an 8 bit value Because the additional ADC inputs ADC4 and ADCS are common with digital IO the input circuit of the ADC is not the same as for the original circuits ADC1 3 It is important to understand the input structure of the pin so that the correct analogue voltage is read by the application The input structure is provided in figure 3 7 It consists of a 100kQ pull up to 2 75V followed by a series 1kQ and 10nF capacitor to ground which make a low pass filter with a LZT 123 8081 Ric 41 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3dB roll off at about 16kHz The input impedance of the analogue IC is 1MQ minimum POSSESS CSS sos SSeS Sess essa f i 2 75V 1 2 75V Se LE i f 100kQ 105 ADC4 Figure 3 7 Inp
240. ful with specified host now in online Data Mode DCDasserted lt lt Data Transfer gt gt NO_CARRIER Connection closed remotely back into off line command mode DCD Deasserted 7 3 AT E2IPC M2M IP Close Connection Description Command Possible Responses Request an IP AT E2IPC ERROR Connection Close OK E2IPC lt ErrNum gt ERROR Shows if the AT E2 IPC OK command is ERROR supported Description This command allows the closure of a currently open IP Connection This command can only be called in on line command mode during a currently active IP connection If successful the connection will be closed and it will not be possible to re enter online data mode until another connection is established Abortability This command may not be aborted 103 LZT 123 7590 bit 7 DATA TCP IP Defined values lt ErrNum gt Description 1 No Connection 2 Connecting 3 Connected 4 Connection Busy 255 Other Error Unsolicited Result codes None Execution Time Executed immediately not time critical Note It is recommended that if there is a problem at any time with the TCP IP connection and the application is trying to re establish the link that this command be used to ensure that all of the internal module buffers have been cleared down ZA AT E2IPI M2M IP Info Description Command Possible Responses Request IP AT E2IPl lt InfoType gt ERROR Information
241. g as seen by the served subscriber Calls hold their number until they are released New calls take the lowest available number Where both a held and a waiting call exists the above procedures shall apply to the waiting call i e not to the held call in conflicting situation Note The directory number case shall be handled with dial command D and the END case with hangup command H or CHUP 266 LZT 123 7590 R1F 19 11 LZT 123 7590 R1F 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES AT CLIP Calling Line Identification Description Command Possible Responses Request calling line AT CLIP lt n gt CME ERROR lt err gt identification OK ERROR Show the current setting AT CLIP e CLIP lt n gt lt m gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CLIP e CLIP list of supported supported lt n gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command refers to the GSM supplementary service CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation that enables a called subscriber to get the calling line identity CLI of the calling party when receiving a mobile terminated call Set command enables or disables the presentation of the CLI at the TE It has no effect on the execution of the supplementary service CLIP in the network When the presentation of the CLI at the TE is enabled and calling subscriber allows CLIP lt number gt lt type gt response is returned after every
242. gether to make sure that they add up to 255 If they don t gt CANCEL TRANSFER 3 Sets the CRC to OxFFFFFFFF and then calculates the CRC forthe 128 bytes of data 4 Compares the received CRC 16 with the calculated one 5 If everything looks ok then the downloader appends the bytes in the packet to the file being created sent The downloader then sends an ACK byte which tells the uploader to send the next block If the sums do not match then the downloader sends an NAK byte which tells the uploader to send the same block it is just sent over again When the uploader sends an EOT byte instead of an SOH byte the downloader sends a NAK byte If the uploader sends another EOT immediately after that the downloader sends an ACK byte and the transfer is complete The downloader can cancel the transfer at any time by sending a CAN byte The uploader can only cancel between blocks by sending a CAN byte It is recommended that you send anywhere between 2 and 8 consecutive CAN bytes when you 282 20 EMBEDDED APPLICATION wish to cancel as some programs will not let you abort if only 1 CAN byte is sent 283 LZT 123 7590 bit 21 Environmental 21 1 AT E2OTR Operational Temperature Reporting Description Command Possible Responses Enable disable AT E20TR lt n gt CME ERROR lt err gt Temperature Reporting ERROR e OK Read current setting AT E20TR E2OTR lt n gt lt stat gt lt temp gt OK ERROR Te
243. gh Logic Low Table 6 Description of Operation Mode Switch Settings When switches 1 through 6 are in the OFF position they are disconnected from the level shifters on the developer s board 77 LZT 123 7589 R2B USING THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT Hence the module determines the state of the signal at the System Connector Header Refer to the appropriate Integrator s Manual for a description of the signals 14 3 Serial interface The external host communicates with the module radio device through J501 which is a standard RS 232 9 pin interface see below The straight through serial cable provided connects from J501 DB 9 Female to the serial port of a PC DB 9 or DB 25 Female Din RS 232 Description 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 2 TXD Transmission Data 3 RXD Receiver Data 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 5 GND Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready 7 RTS Request to Send 8 CTS Clear to Send 9 RI Ring Indicator Table 7 RS 232 DB9 Pin out The primary connector J501 routes all the signals to the module interface while level shifting the appropriate ones The secondary connector J502 does not route all of the signals to the module The following table details the signal routing from J502 Pin RS 232 Routing 1 OD N O Om A W N DCD TXD RXD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS RI Not Connected to X502 Routes to CFMS System Connector Pin 39 or TD3 to X501 Routes to CTMS System Connector Pin 37 o
244. gine in an application created by the customer The radio device can send and receive data when a script is executed the script can be run internally from the radio device itself or from a micro controller A typical application involves a micro controller and a radio device in which the micro controller sends AT commands to the radio device via an RS232 communications link 2 2 Radio Devices in a Communication System LZT 123 7589 R2B Figures 2 1 and 2 2 illustrate the main blocks of a wireless communication system using the radio device Figure 2 1 shows the communication system when the script is embedded on the radio device and figure 2 2 shows the communication system when a micro controller is used They also show the communication principles of the system and the interface between the radio device and the application The definitions in the figures as used elsewhere in this manual are in accordance with the recommendations of GSM 07 07 e The MS mobile station represents the radio device and SIM card The radio device excluding SIM card is known as the ME mobile equipment e The DTE data terminal equipment is the controlling application This can be either an external host or an internal embedded application GR47 GR48 RADIO DEVICES e The DCE data circuit terminating equipment is the serial communication interface of the MS GSM NETWORK GR47 GR48 GSM 9 Si ENGINE 4 m z CH O zZ
245. gt lt alpha gt lt scts gt lt tooa gt lt fo gt lt pid gt lt dcs gt lt sca gt lt tosca gt lt length gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt data gt text mode enabled About parameters in italics refer to the show text mode command CSDH 3 Class 3 SMS DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using unsolicited result codes CMT lt oa gt lt alpha gt lt scts gt lt tooa gt lt fo gt lt pid gt lt dcs gt lt sca gt lt tosca gt lt length gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt data gt Text Mode enabled About parameters in italics refer to the show text mode command CSDH Messages of other data coding schemes result in indication as defined in lt mt gt 1 lt bm gt Description 0 Store message to BM or some manufacturer specific memory No CBM indications are routed to the TE 2 New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited result code CBM lt sn gt lt mid gt lt dcs gt lt page gt lt pages gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt data gt Text mode enabled 214 16 10 LZT 123 7590 R1F Example 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT lt ds gt Description 0 No SMS STATUS REPORTs are routed to the TE 1 SMS STATUS REPORTSs are routed to the TE using unsolicited result code CDS lt fo gt lt mr gt lt ra gt lt tora gt lt scts gt lt dt gt lt st gt Text mode enabled SMS STATUS REPORT is not stored in ME TA 2 SMS STATUS REPORTSs are routed to the TE us
246. gue Analogue Analogue Analogue 2 7V Analogue Analogue Received Data UART1 Data from DCE radio device to DTE host Transmitted data UART3 General purpose I O 7 Received data UART3 General purpose I O 8 Transmitted data UART2 Used for flashing the memory Received data UART2 Used for flashing the memory DSP PCM digital audio input DSP PCM digital audio output Codec PCM digital audio output Codec PCM digital audio input DSP PCM frame sync DSP PCM clock output Microphone Input positive Microphone Input negative Speaker output positive Speaker output negative Audio output from radio device Flash programming voltage for the MS Enable logger information if not flashing Audio input to radio device Analogue ground 5 2 General Electrical and Logical Characteristics LZT 123 7589 R2B Many of the signals as indicated in the table above are high speed CMOS logic inputs or outputs powered from a 2 75 V 5 internal voltage regulator and are defined as Digital 2 75 V Whenever a signal is defined as Digital 2 75 V the following electrical characteristics apply Parameter Min Max Units High Level Output Voltage Von lo 2mA 2 2 2 75 V 24 SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE Low Level Output Voltage VoL lo 2mA 0 0 6 Vv High Level Input Voltage Vin 1 93 2 75 V Low Level Input voltage Vi 0 0 5 V Note Unused pins can be left floating 5 2 1 General Pr
247. he radio device on and off open drain 15 SIMVCC Digital 3 V 5 V SIM card power supply Power output from radio device for SIM Card 16 SIMPRESENCE l Internal pull up SIM Presence open drain A 1 indicates that the SIM is missing a 0 that it is inserted 17 SIMRST O Digital 3 V 5 V SIM card reset 18 SIMDATA I Digital 3 V 5 V SIM card data 19 SIMCLK O Digital 3 V 5 V SIM card clock 20 DAC O Analogue Digital to analogue converter 21 101 H Digital 2 75V General purpose input output 1 KEYROW2 O Keyboard row 2 22 102 U Digital 2 75V General purpose input output 2 ADC5 O Analogue Analogue to digital converter 5 23 103 U Digital 2 75V General purpose input output 3 KEYROW3 O Keyboard row 3 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 LZT 123 7589 R2B 104 KEYROW4 VRTC ADC1 ADC2 ADC3 SDA SCL BUZZER OUT3 KEYCOL3 DSR LED 106 VIO TX_ON RI KEYCOL2 02 DTR KEYROW1 IN DCD KEYCOL1 01 RTS 109 CTS KEYCOL4 04 TD SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE O O00 O O ooo O00 Digital 2 75V Supply 1 8V Analogue Analogue Analogue 2 75V internal pull up 2 75V internal pull up Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Power Out 2 75 V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V Digital 2 75V General purpose input output 4 Keyboard row 4
248. herwise default is 129 Note In GSM there are two types of numbers 129 which are national and 145 which are international lt mr gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Service Centre Time Stamp in time string format refer lt dt gt 206 LZT 123 7590 bit 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT lt scts gt Description Integer GSM 03 40 TP Message Reference Example AT CMGF 1 OK AT CSMP 17 167 0 0 OK AT CMGS 447747008670 gt Test SMS CMGS 15 OK 16 7 AT CMSSSend From Storage LZT 123 7590 R1F PDU mode Description Command Possible Responses Send from storage AT CMSS lt index gt CMSS lt mr gt CMS ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CMSS OK supported ERROR Description Sends message with location value lt index gt from message storage lt mem2 gt to the network SMS SUBMIT or SMS COMMAND Reference value lt mr gt is returned to the TE on successful message delivery If sending fails in a network or an ME error final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned This command is abortable See AT CPMS Preferred Message Storage page 198 lt index gt Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory lt mr gt Description Integer type GSM 03 40 TP Message Reference in integer format 207 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVI
249. his S parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character generated by the DCE as part of the header trailer and terminator for result codes and information text along with the S3 parameter see the description of the V parameter for usage If the value of S4 is changed in a command line the result code issued in response to that command line will use the new value of S4 lt value gt Description 32 3 CONTROL AND STATUS 10 Formatting character Default value Note ASCII character 10 is equivalent to lt LF gt 0 to 127 Formatting character 3 6 ATS5 Command Line Editing Character BACKSPACE Description Command Possible Responses Request Command Line ATS5 lt value gt OK Editing Character ERROR Show the current setting ATS5 lt value gt Show if the command is ATS5 S5 list of supported supported lt value gt s Description This S parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character recognised by the DCE as a request to delete from the command line the immediately preceding character lt value gt Description 8 Line editing character Default value 0 to 127 Line editing character 3 7 ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control Description Command Possible Responses Blind dial delay control ATS6 lt dly gt OK Show the current setting ATS6 lt dly gt Show if the command is ATS6 S6 list of supported supported lt dly gt s Description Included for
250. ho E ee Max Cancelling olume 20 Analog Ring 255 Save Params LZT 123 7590 R1F 67 LZT 123 7590 R1F 4 AUDIO Examples AT E2EAMS E2EAMS 0 21 255 OK Current default profile is 0 AT E2EAMS E2EAMS 2 2 3 2 3 2 5 9 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 OK Sets current profile with these settings AT E2EAMS 0 2 1 2 0 0 2 5 9 2 2 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 OK Sets TxPGA gain to OdB AT E2EAMS 1 2 OK Turns analog ringing off AT E2EAMS 20 0 OK Save current profile to currently loaded profile in non volatile memory AT E2EAMS 255 OK 68 4 2 AT E2APR LZT 123 7590 R1F 4 AUDIO M2M Audio Profile Manipulation Description Command Possible Responses Request operation AT E2APR ERROR with audio profile lt op gt lt prnum1 gt OK Show the current setting Show if the command is supported E2APR lt TxPGA gt lt RxPGA gt lt SideToneGain gt lt AuxInGain gt lt MicInGain gt lt TxAGC gt lt Volume gt lt MaxVolume gt lt MicPath gt lt SpkPath gt lt TxPCM gt lt RxPCM gt lt HFAlgorithm gt lt LocalAudio gt lt TxGainLow gt lt MicVolt2V gt lt SideTone gt lt NoiseRed gt lt EchoCancel gt lt AnalogRing gt e OK L lt prnum2 gt AT E2APR E2APR current lt prnum gt ERROR AT E2APR e E2APR list of supported lt op gt s list of supported lt prnum1 gt s list of supported lt prnum2 gt
251. i e the current number of receive and transmit timeslots air interface user rate and channel coding lt rx gt Description 0 No HSCSD call is active See also note below 1 The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 1 2 The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 2 lt tx gt Description 0 No HSCSD call is active See also note below 1 The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 1 lt aiur gt Description 0 No HSCSD call is active See also note below 1 Current air interface user rate is 9 6 kbits s 3 Current air interface user rate is 19 2 kbits s lt coding gt Description 0 No HSCSD call is active See also note 115 8 DATA HSCSD Current channel coding is 9 6 kbits s TCH F9 6 8 2 AT CHSD HSCSD Device Parameters Description Command Possible Responses Show the current setting AT CHSD CHSD lt mclass gt lt maxRx gt lt maxTx gt lt sum gt lt codings gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CHSD CME ERROR lt err gt supported OK ERROR Description Shows information about HSCSD features supported by the ME TA lt mclass gt Description 2 Multislot class is 2 lt maxRx gt Description 2 Maximum number of receive timeslots that ME can use is 2 lt maxTx gt Description 1 Maximum number of transmit timeslots that ME can use is 1 lt sum gt Description 3
252. ible Responses Request operation to set AT E2NMPR lt pr gt ERROR data rate for GPS NMEA OK Port Show the current setting AT E2NMPR E2NMPR lt pr gt Show if the command is AT E2NMPR E2NMPR list of supported supported lt pr gt s ERROR Description This command allows the user to set the physical Data rate for the GPS NMEA port The port rate will be set for the GPS NMEA port only when NMEA is active see AT EENMEA lt op gt Description o 600 Baud rate 1 1 200 Baud rate 2 2 400 Baud rate 3 4 800 Baud rate 4 9 600 Baud rate Default value 5 19 200 Baud rate 6 38 400 Baud rate 7 57 600 Baud rate 8 115 200 Baud rate 9 230 400 Baud rate 121 LZT 123 7590 R1E 9 GPS INTEROPERABILITY 10 460 800 Baud rate Examples AT E2NMPR E2NMPR 0 10 OK Port rate currently set AT E2NMPR E2NMPR A OK Set GPS NMEA port rate to 4800 baud AT E2NMPR 2 OK 122 10 Fax 10 1 AT E2FAX Ericsson M2M Fax Comm Baud Rate Modification Description Command Possible Responses Request change of fax AT E2FAX lt RcV gt ERROR comm baud rate OK Show the current setting AT E2FAX E2FAX lt RcV gt ERROR Shows if the command is AT E2FAX E2FAX list of supported supported lt RcV gt s ERROR Description This command allows the modification of the factory default RS232 comm setting between standard 9600 baud and 19200 baud This is needed as the additi
253. igh Level Output 3V 2 7 3 0 V voltage Vou 5V 4 7 5 0 V SIMDAT Low Level Output 3V 0 0 2 V voltage Vo 5V 0 0 2 V SIMCLK High Level Output 3V 2 4 3 0 V SIMRST voltage Vou 5V 4 4 5 0 V SIMCLK Low Level Output 3V 0 0 35 V SIMRST voltage Vo 5V 0 0 3 V 5 10 1 SIM Detection SIMPRESENCE SIMPRESENCE is used to determine whether a SIM card has been inserted into or removed from the SIM card holder You should normally wire it to the card inserted switch of the SIM card holder but different implementations are possible When left open an internal pull up resistor maintains the signal high and means SIM card missing to the radio device When pulled low the radio device assumes a SIM card is inserted SIMPRESENCE is a Digital 2 75V CMOS input with the following electrical characteristics 43 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE Parameter Min Typ Max Units Pull up resistance at 2 75 V 100 kQ Low Level Input voltage SIM inserted 0 80 V High Level Input voltage SIM missing gt 1 93 2 75 V Note To meet regulatory approvals SIMPRESENCE must be implemented 5 11 Service Programming Pin Signal Dir Description 58 SERVICE l Flash programming voltage When the SERVICE input signal is active the radio device will e be reprogrammed if data is received through UART2 from a computer running Sony Ericsson reprogramming software e or it will output logging data on UART2 Th
254. ile lt cid gt Description Integer type Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition lt precedence gt Description 0 Subscribed from network value used 1 High priority 2 Normal priority 3 Low priority lt delay gt Description 0 Subscribed from network value used 1 4 Delay class lt reliability gt Description 0 Subscribed from network value used 1 5 Reliability class lt peak gt Description 0 Subscribed from network value used 1 Up to 1 000 8 kbits s 2 Up to 2 000 16 kbits s 91 6 DATA GPRS Up to 4 000 32 kbits s Up to 8 000 64 kbits s Up to 16 000 128 kbits s Up to 32 000 256 kbits s Up to 64 000 512 kbits s Up to 128 000 1 024 kbits s Up to 256 000 2 048 kbits s lt mean gt Description 31 Subscribed from network value used Best effort 100 0 22 bits s 200 0 44 bits s 500 1 11 bits s 1000 2 2 bits s 2 000 4 4 bits s 5 000 11 1 bits s 10 000 22 bits s 20 000 44 bits s 50 000 111 bits s 100 000 0 22 kbits s 200 000 0 44 kbits s 500 000 1 11 kbits s 1 000 000 2 2 kbits s 2 000 000 4 4 kbits s 5 000 000 11 1 kbits s 10 000 000 22 kbits s 20 000 000 44 kbits s 50 000 000 111 kbits s 6 8 AT CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile Requested Description Command Possible Responses Set quality of LZT 123 7590 R1F
255. in the system info messages 2 and 5 and via the AT E2NBTS command MCC MNC LAC CellID BSIC Ch RxL C1 C2 RxLFull RxLSub RxQFull RxQSub TA TN lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt lac gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt L lt rxl gt lt c1 gt lt c2 gt lt rxlFull gt lt rxlSub gt lt rxqfull gt lt rxqsub gt lt ta gt lt tn gt NeighBours Cells MCC MNC LAC CelllID BSIC Ch RxL C1 C2 lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt lac gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt c1 gt lt c2 gt lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt lac gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt c1 gt lt c2 gt lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt lac gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt c1 gt lt c2 gt OK E2EMM lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt rxlSub gt lt rxqsub gt lt ta gt lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt OK E2EMM lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt lac gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt c1 gt lt c2 gt L lt rxlFull gt lt rxlSub gt lt rxqfull gt lt rxqsub gt lt ta gt lt tn gt lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt lac gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt c1 gt lt c2 gt lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt lac gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt
256. in differential modes and digital audio interface with the possibility of accessing internal points within the digital audio lines Moreover the GR47 GR48 has an embedded echo canceller and noise suppression which provide high quality audio and can handle limited car kit speaker phone applications The module supports HR FR and EFR voice coding provided that EFR is available in the network The R5 software now also supports AMR for the US market The module supports the following data protocols for interfacing to the mobile network e General Packet Radio Service GPRS The modules are Class B Terminals which provides simultaneous activation and attach of GPRS and GSM services The GR47 GR48 modules are GPRS 4 1 devices which are capable of transmitting in one timeslot per frame uplink and receiving in a maximum of four timeslots per frame downlink e Circuit Switched Data CSD GR47 GR48 modules are capable of establishing a circuit switch data link at 9 6 kbps LZT 123 8081 Ric GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION e High Speed Circuit Switched Data HSCSD GR47 GR48 supports HSCSD communication with one timeslot per frame capacity in the uplink and two timeslots per frame capacity in the downlink 2 1 1 2 5 SIM Card The module supports the connection of an external SIM Card with 3V or 5 V technology via the 60 pin system connector The module does not have an internal SIM holder 1 2 6 Power consumption
257. inactive high if the module is in on line data mode 3 10 4 UART 2 TD2 RD2 The UART 2 consists of a full duplex serial communication This involves the transmission and reception lines The communication port shall work in one mode Operation and Maintenance mode Operation and Maintenance mode shall work in addition with the SERVICE signal On switching the module on if the SERVICE signal is active then two events can happen If no data is sent to the module then the logger is activated Otherwise the module shall be ready to be reprogrammed Timing and Electrical signal characteristics equal to UART 1 TD and RD except for maximum baud rate that could be increased to 921 kbps Transmitted Data 2 TD2 TD2 is input to the module used by the application system to send data on the UART 2 to the module The electrical characteristics shall be the same as TD Received Data 2 RD2 RD2 is an output used to send data on the UART 2 to the application system The electrical characteristics shall be the same as RD LZT 123 8081 Ric 34 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3 10 5 UART 3 TD3 RD3 The UART 3 consists of a full duplex serial communication This involves the transmission and reception lines Timing and electrical signals characteristics equal to UART 1 TD and RD Transmitted Data 3 TD3 TD3 is input to the module used by the application system to send data on the UART 3 to the module
258. index gt from the hierarchical phonebook lt gindex gt Description 1 10 The group index 15 7 AT ESDI Ericsson Delete Group Item Description Command Possible Responses Deletes the item in group AT ESDI lt gindex gt lt ind CME ERROR lt err gt lt gindex gt with position ex gt OK lt index gt ERROR Show if the command is AT ESDI CME ERROR lt err gt supported OK ERROR Description The command deletes the item with lt index gt in the group with lt gindex gt lt gindex gt Description 1 10 The groups index within the hierarchical phonebook lt index gt Description 1 15 The items index within the group 189 LZT 123 7590 bit 15 PHONEBOOK 15 8 AT ESGR Ericsson Group Read Description Command Possible Responses Lists the groups defined AT ESGR ESGR lt gindex1 gt in the hierarchical lt name1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt phonebook lt gindex2 gt lt name2 gt OK ERROR Shows if the command is AT ESGR OK supported Description This command lists the groups in the hierarchical phonebook lt gindex gt Description 1 10 The group index lt name gt Description String The group name 15 9 AT EG IR Ericsson Group Item Read Description Command Possible Responses Lists the items in the AT EGIR lt gindex gt EGIR lt index1 gt lt gindex gt group lt type1 gt lt itemindex gt lt CF
259. ined in lt prompt_coding gt M2M STK Get Input Description Command Possible responses Answer to the reception of GET INPUT Show if the command is supported AT E2STKI lt answer CME ERROR lt err gt gt lt response_type gt OK lt response_length gt ERROR lt user_response gt AT E2STKI E2STKI list of supported lt answer gt list of supported lt response_type gt lt response_length gt lt user_response gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description LZT 123 7590 R1F The ME passes the parameters within GET INPUT command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code 238 LZT 123 7590 R1F 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT E2STKI The external application sends AT E2STKI with the user response AT E2STKI allows the external application to send the appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code and before the timeout expires If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires an ERROR response is generated If lt answer gt parameter is not 0 a failure has occurred and no more parameters are sent If the extra parameters are sent the ME indicates ERROR Test command returns the list of supported values and lt prompt_text_length gt Values follow GSM 11 14 standard lt answer gt Description 0 OK Performed as required the text was displayed It corresponds to 00 command performed successfull
260. ines whether or not the DCE echoes characters received from the DTE during command state and online command state lt value gt Description 0 DCE does not echo characters during command state and online command state 1 DCE echoes characters during command state and online command state Default value 13 7 ATV DCE Response Format Description Command Possible Responses Set DCE response ATV lt value gt OK format ERROR Show the current setting ATV V lt value gt Show if the command is ATV V list of supported supported lt value gt s Description Select either descriptive or numeric response codes The ATV command sets the verbose numeric response codes and strips off the lt S3 gt lt S4 gt additions to the command response lt value gt Description 0 Display numeric result codes 1 Display verbose result codes Default value 146 LZT 123 7590 bit 13 8 ATZ Reset to Default Configuration LZT 123 7590 R1F 13 INTERFACE List of result codes ATV1I ATV 1 ATVO ATV 0 Description OK 0 Acknowledges execution of a command CONNECT 1 A connection has been established the DCE is moving from command state to online data state RING 2 The DCE has detected an incoming call signal from the network NO CARRIER 3 The connection has been terminated or the attempt to establish a connection failed ERROR 4 Command not recognized command line maximum length exceeded parameter value
261. ing unsolicited result code CDSI lt mem gt lt index gt Text mode enabled SMS STATUS REPORT is stored in ME TA Unsolicited Result codes CMT lt oa gt lt alpha gt lt scts gt lt tooa gt lt fo gt lt pid gt lt dcs gt lt sca gt lt tosca gt lt ength gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt data gt Text Mode enabled Refer to the show text mode command CSDH for information on the parameters in italics CMTI lt mem gt lt index gt CBM lt sn gt lt mid gt lt dcs gt lt page gt lt pages gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt data gt CDS lt fo gt lt mr gt lt ra gt lt tora gt lt scts gt lt dt gt lt st gt CDSI lt mem gt lt index gt Display cell broadcast messages AT CNMI 3 0 2 0 0 AT CMGR Read Message PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses Read message AT CMGR CMGR lt stat gt lt alpha gt lt length gt lt index gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt pdu gt e CMS ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the AT CMGR OK command is ERROR supported Description Returns message with location value lt index gt from preferred message storage lt mem1 gt to the TE Status of the message and entire message data unit lt pdu gt is returned If status of the message is received unread status in the storage changes to received read If reading fails final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned 215 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE
262. ing Level Get 77 4 13 AT ERIN Ericsson Ring Set EE 78 4 14 AT ERIP Ericsson Ring Signal Playback Commande 80 4 LZT 123 7590 R1F 95 Dieter DEE 81 5 1 AT CBST Select Bearer Service Type 81 5 2 AT CRLP Radio Link Protocol icc ccccnadzeatentecaadradndedtsadateadcadadaadtonetettdoaatoas 82 6 Data sbb 85 6 1 AT CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate cccceeeeeeeeeee 85 6 2 AT CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach gie eet sesteeeheeee eege 86 6 3 AT CGDATA Enter Data State 0 0 00 cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 87 6 4 AT CGDCONT Define PDP Context 87 6 5 AT CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting sess ccccccsscciddvss ENNEN EEN 88 6 6 AT CGPADDR Show PDP Address ooononeooneeeeeeeeeeee ee nnennnnnneenen eeen 89 6 7 AT CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile Minimum Acceptable 90 6 8 AT CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile Requested ee 92 6 9 AT CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status eee 95 6 10 AT CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages 96 6 11 AT E2GDV GPRse Ren EE 97 t vn Ke GA 99 TE AFE2PA M2 M IP e E rE e T E TEAT EErEE EEEE DEEE eee 99 7 2 AT E2IPO M2M IP cOnnecH pen 101 7 3 AT E2IPC M2M IP Close Connechon 103 ta APEZPI MAM P O een 104 7 5 AT E2IPRH M2M IP Resolve heet eessen 105 7 6 AT E2IPE M2M IP Last Error ee 106 7 7 AT E2IPS M2M IP Setup IP barameiers 107 7 8 AT E2IPLIP listen Servera ege 109 7 9 AT ENAD Ericsson Internet Account De
263. ing type ME number of format lt type gt lt type gt Description 129 145 161 128 255 ISDN telephony numbering plan national international unknown ISDN telephony numbering plan international number ISDN telephony numbering plan national number Other values refer to GSM 04 08 section 10 5 4 7 lt text gt Description string type Field of maximum length lt tlength gt character set as specified by the select TE character set command CSCS lt nlength gt Description integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field lt number gt lt tlength gt Description integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field lt text gt Example AT CPBR 1 99 CPBR 1 44123456789 145 Test Number CPBR 2 440987654321 145 Test number 2 CPBR 3 449876543210 129 Test Number 3 OK LZT 123 7590 R1F 194 15 PHONEBOOK 15 14 AT CPBS ME Storage Description Command Possible Responses Set phonebook storage Show the current setting Show if the command is supported AT CPBS lt storage gt L lt password gt AT CPBS AT CPBS CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR CPBS lt storage gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR CPBS list of supported lt storage gt s e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description Selects phonebook memory storage lt storage
264. ink the air interface user rate is 28 8 kbits s and the used channel coding is TCH F 14 4 lt mode gt Description 0 Disable reporting 1 Enable reporting Itermediate Result Codes CHSR lt rx gt lt tx gt lt aiur gt lt coding gt HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading Description Command Possible Responses Set HSCSD automatic AT CHSU lt mode gt OK user initiated upgrading ERROR on or off Show the current setting AT CHSU CHSU lt mode gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CHSU CHSU list of supported supported lt modes gt s OK ERROR Description Enables or disables the HSCSD automatic user initiated upgrade lt mode gt Description 0 Disable use of UP bit for upgrading Default value 1 Enable use of UP bit for upgrading 119 LZT 123 7590 R1F 9 GPS Interoperability This is only for use when using an external processor it cannot be used with embedded applications 9 1 AT EENMEA NMEA GPS Mode on UART2 LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Enable NMEA AT EENMEA lt mode gt OK commands on the UART ERROR CME ERROR lt err gt Show the current setting AT EENMEA EENMEA lt mode gt CME ERROR lt err gt Shows if the command is AT EENMEA EENMEA list of supported supported lt mode gt s e CME ERROR lt err gt Description This command enables transmission of NMEA commands from
265. ins is converted and stored in a register inside the radio device When the appropriate AT command is received by the radio device the digital value stored in the register is read Parameter Min Max Units Resolution 8 8 Bits Input voltage for 0000 0000 word 0 0 01x2 759 vV Input voltage for 1111 1111 word 0 99 x 2 75 2 75 vV Differential Non Linearity DNL 0 75 LSB Overall Non Linearity INL 0 60 LSB Absolute accuracy 1 5 LSB Input impedance 1 MQ Average supply current 1 mA continuous conversion External source impedance 50 kQ Tolerance on this internal voltage is 5 5 16 3 Analogue to Digital Converters 4 and 5 IOx ADCx LZT 123 7589 R2B To increase analog input capabilities the GR47 optimises the I O by multiplexing or sharing different features on single pins There are two ADC inputs which share system connector pins with digital I O signals When configured as digital I O the 49 Note SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE software will not read the voltages at the two new ADC inputs When configured as ADC inputs the software will configure the digital I O pins as input or high impedance tri state In this state any applied voltage between OV and 2 75V can be read as an 8 bit value Because the ADC inputs ADC4 and ADC5 are common with digital I O the input circuit of these ADCs is not the same as for the circuits ADC1 ADC2 and ADC3 It is important to understand the input structure of the pin so
266. invalid or other problem with processing the command line NO DIALTONE 6 No dial tone detected BUSY 7 Engaged busy signal detected NO ANSWER 8 Wait for Quiet Answer dial modifier was used but remote ringing followed by five seconds of silence was not detected before expiration of the connection timer CONNECT Manufacturer Same as CONNECT but includes lt TEXT gt specific manufacturer specific text that may specify DTE speed line speed error control data compression or other status Description Command Possible Responses Execute ATZ OK ERROR Execute ATZ lt profile gt OK ERROR Show if supported and ATZ Z list of supported list available parameter range lt profile gt s Description This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to their default values as specified by the user Consider hardware configuration switches or non volatile parameter storage if implemented when using this command 147 13 9 AT CMUX LZT 123 7590 R1F 13 INTERFACE Commands included on the same command line as the Z command will be ignored lt profile gt Description 0 Select the user profile to restore Switch to 07 10 Multiplex Protocol Description Command Possible Responses Switch to 07 10 Show the current setting Show if the command is supported AT CMUX lt transpar CME ERROR lt err gt ency gt lt subset gt lt port_speed gt
267. iption 0 This is a forwarded call MT call setup 1 This is a CUG call also lt index gt present MT call setup 2 Call has been put on hold during a voice call 3 Call has been retrieved during a voice call 4 Multiparty call entered during a voice call 5 Call on hold has been released this is not a SS notification during a voice call 6 Forward check SS message received can be received whenever 10 Incoming call has been forwarded 19 14 AT CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data Description Command Possible Responses Request unstructured AT CUSD lt n gt lt str gt CME ERROR lt err gt supplementary service OK data Show the current setting AT CUSD CUSD lt n gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CUSD e CUSD list of supported supported lt n gt s OK ERROR Description This command allows control of the Unstructured Supplementary Service Data USSD according to GSM 02 90 LZT 123 7590 R1F 271 LZT 123 7590 R1F 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES Both network and mobile initiated operations are supported Parameter lt n gt is used to disable enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code USSD response from the network or network initiated operation CUSD lt m gt lt str gt lt dcs gt to the TE In addition value lt n gt 2 is used to cancel an ongoing USSD session If lt n gt is not given then the default value 0 is taken When lt str gt
268. ironmental and EMC requirements Mounting hole ground connection System connector Figure 4 2 Radio Device viewed from above Please note the following e Mounting holes positioned at the corners make it possible to securely bolt the radio device into your application LZT 123 7589 R2B MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION e Keypad display microphone speaker and battery are not part of the radio device e The SIM card is mounted in your application external to the radio device e The System Connector is a 60 pin standard 0 05 in 1 27 mm pitch type The pins and their electrical characteristics are described in 5 System Connector Interface page 21 e Information about the Antenna Connector is found in 6 Antenna Connector page 53 4 2 Physical Dimensions 50 00 33 00 30 20 2 30 46 40 1 80 Figure 4 2 Dimensions of the Radio Device LZT 123 7589 R2B LZT 123 7589 R2B MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION Measurements are given in millimetres See also Technical Data page 66 20 SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 5 System Connector Interface 5 1 Overview Electrical connections to the radio device except the antenna are made through the System Connector Interface The system connector is a 60pin standard 0 05 in 1 27 mm pitch device The system connector allows both board to board and board to cable connections to be made Use a board board connector to connect the radio device direc
269. ital Output 2 Supported Operations 0 7 AD3 Analogue Digital Output 3 Supported Operations 0 7 AD4 Analogue Digital Output 4 Supported Operations 0 6 7 AD5 Analogue Digital Output 5 Supported Operations 0 6 7 DA1 Digital Analogue Input Supported Operations 0 1 7 lt val gt Description Read Write Configure Trigger 0 The logic value is I O signal is INPUT I O signal is NOT set FALSE to trigger 1 Logic value is TRUE UO signal is OUTPUT UO signal is set to trigger lt adc_val gt Description 0 255 The decimal value shall represent the analogue voltage it is hold on the I O Applicable only to A D or D A signals Unsolicited Result Codes E210 lt source gt lt io gt lt val gt LZT 123 7590 R1F 137 12 INPUT OUTPUT Scenario Cases Reading an UC AT Command Response Comment AT E2I0 0 I1 The TE is requesting for the logic value of l1 Digital Input 1 E210 0 11 1 The MS responds 11 has a TRUE OK logic value AT E2I0 0 AD1 The TE is requesting for the reading of AD1 value Analogue Input 1 E210 0 AD1 The MS responds AD1 has a EH decimal value of 87 In volts OK 2 75 0 9 256 87 0 841 V Writing in an Output AT Command Response Comment AT E210 1 01 1 The TE is requesting to write a TRUE logic to O1 Digital Output 1 OK The MS responds OK because the operation has been performed AT E210 1 13 0 The TE is requesting to write a FA
270. ity gt lt peak gt lt mean gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CGQMIN lt cid gt lt precedence gt lt delay gt lt reliability gt lt peak gt lt mean gt OK ERROR CGQMIN lt PDP_type gt list of supported lt precedence gt s list of supported lt delay gt s list of supported lt reliability gt s list of supported lt peak gt s list of supported lt mean gt s lt CR gt lt LF gt CGQMIN lt PDP_type gt list of supported lt precedence gt s list of supported lt delay gt s list of supported lt reliability gt s list of supported lt peak gt s list of supported lt mean gt s OK ERROR 90 LZT 123 7590 R1F 6 DATA GPRS Description Allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is checked by the MS against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate PDP Context Accept message The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the local context identification parameter lt cid gt Since this is the same parameter that is used in the CGDCONT command the CGQMIN command is effectively an extension to the CGDCONT command The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters each of which may be set to a separate value A special form of the set command CGQMIN lt cid gt causes the minimum acceptable profile for context number lt cid gt to become undefined In this case no check is made against the negotiated prof
271. l gt 1 will cause the unsolicited result to be sent when a change from the current signal state occurs signal must be unchanging when command is executed Clearing a trigger lt val gt 0 will clear a currently set trigger Configurable signals 101 to 105 must be set as inputs before they can be triggered Triggers are only applicable while the module is ON Power cycling will clear all current triggers If a signal is triggerable OK is returned and the trigger is set cleared otherwise ERROR is returned AT E210 4 105 1 Set trigger on 105 OK 105 changes state sometime later E210 3 105 1 105 triggered current state 1 Trigger Check lt op gt 5 Checks if a signal input is configured as a trigger Returned lt val gt shows the current trigger state 1 for triggered or 0 for not triggered If the signal is triggerable the current trigger status and OK are returned otherwise ERROR is returned AT E210 5 105 E210 5 105 1 105 is currently set to trigger OK Pinswitch lt op gt 6 Some of the IO lines are multiplexed and are only available after being switched in by use of this operation i e AT E210 6 12 OK Pinstatus lt op gt 7 returns lt val gt the pin status of the specified pin where 0 Pin Switched Out not available on connector until switched in see Pinswitch 135 LZT 123 7590 R1F 12 INPUT OUTPUT 1
272. l gt OK Disconnect Delay ERROR Control Show the current setting ATS10 lt val gt Show if the command is ATS10 10 list of supported supported lt val gt s Description Included for compatibility No functionality lt val gt Description 2 Remains connected for two tenths of a second Default value 1 254 Number of tenths of a second of delay 3 11 AT ECAM Ericsson Call Monitoring LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Set Call Monitoring on or off Show the current setting Show if the command is supported AT ECAM lt onoff gt AT ECAM AT ECAM CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR ECAM lt onoff gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR ECAM list of supported lt onoff gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command activates or deactivates the call monitoring function in the ME When this log function is activated in the ME the ME informs about call events such as incoming call connected hang up etc It is preferable that the current status shall always be sent with result code ECAV when activating the log function The purpose of this is two fold to gather relevant information for the call log in a TE 35 LZT 123 7590 R1F 3 CONTROL AND STATUS e to make it possible for the TE to display call state information for an ongoing call lt onoff gt Description 0 The call log functio
273. lemented Conditional IE Error Message not compatible with protocol state Recovery on timer expiry Protocol error unspecified Inter working unspecified Radio Path Not Available The network did not send a cause Max Random Access channels used Uplink failure Access barred Paging Rejected by the Base station No cell available SIM has been removed Ciphering Error No Ciphering key Reestablish not allowed Establish failure in MPH Data link error Phone is not off hook Reestablish in progress Establish error RR connection failure Forced registration failure GPRS detached GPRS suspended PDCH release 42 LZT 123 7590 R1F 3 CONTROL AND STATUS 231 GSM detached 255 Empty lt number gt A string containing the phone number of the party calling the module Mobile Terminated or the party called from the module Mobile Originated The lt number gt is only shown for state CALLING 1 and ALERTING 6 lt number gt Description String String of valid dial characters 0 9 A B and C lt type gt This is an integer identifying the type of number displayed in lt number gt The integer should be converted into a binary number for decoding using the tables below Bit8 Bit7 Bit Bit5 Description 0 0 0 0 Unknown number 0 0 0 1 International number 0 0 1 0 National number 0 0 1 1 Network specific number 0 1 0 0 Dedicated a
274. ling others This is most noticeable with the RS232 hardware flow control when switching on the keypad functionality in embedded applications only If full hardware flow control and handshaking is required there will be no available keypad column drivers and the keypad interfacing will be disabled If intermediate hardware flow control is selected RTS and CTS only the unused flow control pins DTR DCD RI DSR are made available to the keypad interface providing three discrete matrix column drivers If RS232 hardware flow control is switched off altogether the remaining keypad column driver is enabled allowing the full keypad matrix of 5 columns by 4 rows LZT 123 8081 Ric 40 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3 17 1 LED IO6 3 17 2 l O The LED function pin can be used as a general purpose digital IO when the flashing LED function is not required However this pin does not have an on board pull up resistor It is required that an external pull up or pull down resistor be provided by the host circuitry when either not used or when used as a digital input When not being used for an alternative function the pins labelled I and O may be used for general purpose inputs or outputs respectively The inputs have an on board 100k pull up resistor and the outputs are driven rail to rail at 2 75V levels 3 17 3 UART3 lO The UART3 pins have been given alternative functions as general purpose I O both pins may be used
275. lowing parameters are used Table 10 lt cid gt parameter lt cid gt Description integer Id number of a PDP Context as defined in AT CGDCONT There is a one to one mapping between an IA and a PDP context A certain context can thus not be reused in another IA When a certain PDP Context is associated with an Internet Account it is implied that the Quality of Service Profile with the same id number is also associated The Quality of Service Profile is defined with AT CGQREQ and AT CGQMIN Table 12 lt pref_serv gt parameter lt pref_serv gt Description 0 Automatic 1 Packet Domain Service only If set to O the phone will try to handle incoming CSD services e g phone calls 112 7 DATA TCP IP Table 13 lt pap_chap gt parameter lt pap_chap gt Description 0 Normal Only PAP allowed 1 Secure Only CHAP allowed 2 None No authentication scheme is used This parameter is used to choose which authentication scheme is to be used The lt lock_state gt parameter is set to 1 in the Internet Accounts that are predefined and not possible to alter via the AT commands No parameter values can be changed in an Internet Account If the user tries to change the parameter values ERROR is returned lt err gt parameter refer to CME ERROR Mobile Equipment Error Result Code 7 10 AT E2FT IP logging LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible responses Activ
276. lt RetryTm gt lt NmRetry gt lt W aitTm gt lt SendSz gt lt esc gt OK Shows if the AT E2IPS E2IPS list of supported command is lt RetryTm gt list of supported supported lt NmRetry gt list of supported lt WaitTm gt list of supported lt SendSz gt list of supported lt esc gt OK ERROR Description This command can be used to modify the way in which the Data received by the module is handled with respect to transmitting it across TCP UDP When Data is sent to the Module in online data mode the data is internally buffered until there is an amount of data that makes an IP packet send viable This 107 LZT 123 7590 R1F 7 DATA TCP IP packet size is defined by lt SendSz gt If lt SendSz gt is not received and no data is received for lt WaitTm gt 100ms then the data will be send as a packet anyway regardless of the packet size Retransmit intervals are controlled internally but will do this for lt NmRetry gt times If the data is still not sent by this time the socket session will be closed and revert to offline command mode with a NO CARRIER response The final parameter lt esc gt controls whether the module will look for an escape sequence in on line data mode this enables applications to use 3 wire RS232 communication rather than having to implement DTR By default this is off Abortability This command may not be aborted Defined values lt RetryTm gt Des
277. lt StartType gt Description 0 Start Now one shot Default 1 Start on next powercycle persistent 2 Restart from pause state Table 3 lt StopType gt parameter lt StopType gt Description 0 Stop and Reinitialise one shot Default 1 Stop on next powercycle persistent 2 Halt Pause Table 4 lt CtriByte gt parameter lt Active gt Description 0 255 CtriByte value from 0 255 Table 5 lt Active gt parameter lt Halted gt Description 0 Application is inactive 1 Application is active Table 5 lt Halted gt parameter lt Halted gt Description 0 Application is not Halted 1 Application is Halted Table 6 lt RunOnStartUp gt parameter lt RunOnStartUp gt Description 277 20 2 AT E2APD LZT 123 7590 R1F 20 EMBEDDED APPLICATION 0 Application is not run on module start up 1 Application is run on module start up Application Program Download Description Command Possible Responses Set Application Program AT E2APD lt cmd gt lt Scri ERROR Download ptNum gt lt length gt OK E2APD lt error gt ERROR Displays current settings AT E2APD E2APD lt ScriptNum gt lt AviSpace gt OK Shows if the command is AT E2APD E2APD list of supported supported lt cmd gt s list of supported lt ScriptNum gt s ERROR Description This command allows the user to download scripts to the module for execution as an emb
278. lt dt gt Description String GSM 03 40 TP Discharge Time in string format yy MM dd hh mm ss zz where characters indicate year month day hour minutes seconds and time zone lt st gt Description Integer GSM 03 40 TP Status lt ct gt Description Integer GSM 03 40 TP Command Type default 0 lt sn gt Description Integer GSM 03 41 CBM Serial Number lt mid gt Description String type All different possible combinations of CBM message identifiers refer lt mid gt default is empty string e g 0 1 5 7 LZT 123 7590 R1F 225 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT lt mid gt GSM 03 41 CBM Message Identifier in integer format lt page gt Description Integer format GSM 03 41 CBM Page Parameter bits 4 7 in integer format lt pages gt Description Integer format GSM 03 41 CBM Page Parameter bits 0 3 in integer format Example AT CMGF 1 OK AT CMGL CMGL REC UNREAD REC READ STO UNSENT STO SENT ALL OK 16 12 AT CMGD Delete Message Common for both PDU and Text modes Description Command Possible Responses Delete message AT CMGD lt index gt CMS ERROR lt err gt lt delflag gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CMGD OK supported ERROR Description Deletes message from preferred message storage lt mem1 gt location lt inde
279. lt err gt Description Note Selects the level of functionality lt fun gt in the MS Level full functionality results in the highest level of power drawn Minimum functionality results in the minimum power drawn Manufacturers may also specify levels of functionality between these two end levels Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound AT CFUN is interpreted as AT CFUN 0 lt fun gt Description 0 Minimum functionality Default value Note The ME is turned off 1 Full functionality 3 23 AT CIND Indicator Control LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Set Indicator Control AT CIND lt ind gt e CME ERROR lt err gt L lt ind gt OK ERROR Show the current AT CIND CIND lt ind gt lt ind gt setting CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the AT CIND CIND lt descr gt list of command is supported lt ind gt s supported lt descr gt list of supported lt ind gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK 50 3 CONTROL AND STATUS ERROR Description Used to set the values of ME indicators lt ind gt value 0 means that the indicator is off or in state which can be identified as off state 1 means that indicator is on or in a state which is more substantial than off state 2 is more substantial than 1 and so on If the indicator is a simple on off style
280. lt rxl gt lt c1 gt lt c2 gt lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt lac gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt c1 gt lt c2 gt OK 158 LZT 123 7590 R1F 14 NETWORK Reduced E2EMM lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt lac gt display mode lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt c1 gt lt c2 gt info as display L lt rxlFull gt lt rxlSub gt lt rxqfull gt lt rqsub gt mode but lt ta gt lt tn gt without text lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt lac gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt headings or lt c1 gt lt c2 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt lac gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt separators lt c1 gt lt c2 gt neighbour cells Be from top list lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt lac gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt c1 gt lt c2 gt OK Show the AT E2EMM E2EMM lt n gt current setting ERROR Show if the AT E2EMM _ E2EMM list of supported lt n gt s list of command is supported lt m gt s supported ERROR Description There are four presentation format modes Display Compact Verbose and Reduced Display and two response types one shot response or continuous unsolicited responses The purpose of the presentation format mode Display is to display the data in a readable form including headers and line breaks lt CR gt lt LF gt This format is however not well suited for machine decoding The for
281. ly 1 can be active 9 2 Implementation The radio device has up to 44k of space available for storage of two scripts in the scripting language Structures included in this language are e l f then else statements e While loops e For loops All hardware interfaces that are normally available to the radio device through the AT commands are available to the embedded application Further drivers have been written such as M bus keypad SPI and DC for use by the embedded application EA through the use of the I O pins 9 2 1 Limitations LZT 123 7589 R2B Since the radio device is processing the script using its own memory limitations are placed onto the scripts that are run e A direct comparison cannot be made to a fully compiled C program in terms of size but a gauge of script size is that if each line were 128 characters long in the script then the script could be 350 lines long e Processing power is something that needs to be considered as the script is run as a low priority process within the software However controller mode stops GSM operation and provides all the processing power for the script to be run See the M2mpower Application Guide for more details e Code cannot be ported directly from an existing application and loaded directly onto the radio device It must be re 63 EMBEDDED APPLICATIONS written in the Sony Ericsson Mobile script language so that the radio device interpreter can function correctly
282. m gt Description 0 CLIR not provisioned 1 CLIR provisioned in permanent mode 2 Unknown e g no network 3 CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted 4 CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed AT CSSN Supplementary Service Notification Description Command Possible Responses Presentation of AT CSSN lt n gt lt m gt CME ERROR lt err gt notification result codes OK from TA to TE ERROR Show the current setting AT CSSN CSSN lt n gt lt m gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CSSN CSSN list of supported supported lt n gt s list of supported lt m gt s CME ERROR lt err gt 269 LZT 123 7590 R1F 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES OK ERROR Description Note This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated notifications The set command enables or disables the presentation of notification result codes from TA to TE When lt n gt 1 and a supplementary service notification is received after a mobile originated call setup unsolicited result code CSSI lt code1 gt lt index gt is sent to TE before any other MO call setup result codes presented in this ETS or in V 25ter When several different lt code1 gt s are received from the network each of them shall have its own CSSI result code When lt m gt 1 and a supplementary service notification is received during a mobile terminated call setup or during a call or
283. mand is supported AT ESNU lt type gt lt number gt lt number type gt AT ESNU AT ESNU e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR ESNU lt type 1 gt lt number 1 gt lt number type 1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt ESNU lt type n gt lt number n gt lt number type n gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR ESNU list of supported lt type gt s e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command sets a lt type gt number in the format lt number type gt in the MS lt type gt Description 0 Voice L1 1 Voice L2 2 Fax 3 Data lt number type gt Description 129 Default value when dialling string does not include the international access code character 145 Default value when dialling string includes the international access code character lt number gt Description 0 9 Number LZT 123 7590 R1F 192 15 12 15 13 LZT 123 7590 R1F 15 PHONEBOOK AT CPBF Phonebook Find Description Command Possible Responses Show the current CPBF lt findtext gt CPBF setting lt index1 gt lt number gt lt type gt lt t ext gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CBPF lt index2 gt lt number gt lt type gt lt t ext gt CME ERROR lt err gt e OK e ERROR Show if the CPBF CPBF lt nlength gt lt tlength gt command is CME ERROR lt err gt supported OK ERROR
284. mat AT CMGF lt mode gt OK ERROR Show the current setting AT CMGF CMGF lt mode gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CMGF CMGF list of supported supported lt mode gt s OK ERROR Description This command tells the TA which input and output format to use for messages The lt mode gt parameter indicates the format of messages used with send list read and write commands and unsolicited result codes resulting from received messages Mode can be either PDU mode entire TP data units used or text mode headers and body of the messages given as separate parameters Test command returns supported modes as a compound value lt mode gt Description 0 PDU mode 1 Text mode 16 5 AT CMGW Write Message to Memory PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses Write message to AT CMGW lt length gt memory lt stat gt lt CR gt PDU is given lt ctrl ZIESC gt LZT 123 7590 R1F CMGW lt index gt CMS ERROR lt err gt e OK ERROR 201 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT Show if the command is AT CMGW OK supported ERROR Description Stores a message to memory storage lt mem2 gt Memory location lt index gt of the stored message is returned By default message status will be set to stored unsent but parameter lt stat gt allows other status values to be given ME TA manufacturer may choose to use different default
285. mats Verbose Compact and Reduced Display do not have headers or line breaks Verbose mode displays more parameters than the compact mode The response types give the user the choice of one a shot information or an unsolicited response with lt m gt seconds between each response Examples AT E2EMM 1 E2EMM Serving Cell MCC MNC LAC Cellld BSIC Ch RxL C1 C2 234 15 0016 0D91 2E 0081 085 00019 00019 Neighbour Cells MCC MNC LAC Cellld BSIC Ch RxL C1 C2 000 00 0016 4047 3A 0083 103 00001 00001 000 00 0016 423C 3A 0065 104 00000 00000 000 00 0016 2F21 21 0067 104 00000 00000 000 00 0016 8E3D 34 0077 104 00000 00000 000 00 0016 348A 10 0091 104 00000 00000 OK 159 LZT 123 7590 R1F 14 NETWORK AT E2EMM 3 E2EMM lt servcell mcc gt lt servcell mnc gt lt servcell ci gt lt servcell bsic gt lt servcell ch gt lt servcell rxl gt lt servcell rxiSub gt lt servcell rxqsub gt lt servcell ta gt lt neighborcell1 mcc gt lt neighborcell1 mnc gt lt neighborcell1 ci gt lt neighborcell1 bsic gt lt neighborcell1 ch gt lt neighborcell1 rxl gt lt neighborcell2 mcc gt lt neighborcell2 mnc gt lt neighborcell2 ci gt lt neighborcell2 bsic gt lt neighborcell2 ch gt lt neighborcell2 rxl gt lt neighborcelln mcc gt lt neighborcellnmnc gt lt neighborcellnci gt lt neighborcelln bsic gt lt neighborcelln ch gt lt neighborcelln rxl gt lt CR gt lt LF gt OK AT E2EMM 5 E2EM
286. mbers always reference each other Table 2 lt name gt parameter lt name gt Description string max 20 16 bit characters Each Internet Account has a friendly name Table 3 lt userid gt parameter lt userid gt Description string max 64 8 bit characters The user id to be used when setting up the connection Table 4 lt passwd gt parameter lt passwd gt Description string max 64 8 bit characters The password to be used when setting up the connection Note If the lt passwd gt parameter is left blank this shall be interpreted as a request for the lt userid gt and lt passwd gt parameters to be set dynamically 111 LZT 123 7590 bit Note Note Note Note LZT 123 7590 R1F 7 DATA TCP IP For security reasons the read command shall not return the value of the lt passwd gt parameter The empty place of the lt passwd gt parameter shall be indicated by two consecutive commas For practical information on how to use this command such as using usernames and passwords with in refer to the application note Using AT commands to control the TCP IP stack Table 5 lt bearer gt parameter lt bearer gt Description 0 Circuit Switched dial up Not Supported 1 Packet Domain service 2 Bluetooth Not supported 3 SMS Not supported This parameter is used to decide what bearer shall be used for the connection If lt bearer gt 1 the fol
287. means of the unsolicited result code E2STKG The external application then sends AT E2STKG with the user response Answer command allows the external application to send the appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code and before the timeout expires If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires an ERROR response is generated If lt answer gt parameter is not 0 a failure has occurred and no more parameters are sent If the extra parameters are sent the ME indicates ERROR Test command returns the list of supported values and the maximum value of lt prompt_text_length gt Values follow GSM 11 14 standard lt answer gt Description 0 OK Performed as required the text was displayed It corresponds to 00 Command performed successfully described in the GSM standard 1 Failed User Terminated Session the text was displayed as requested and the user wants to end the proactive session It corresponds to 10 Proactive session terminated by the user described in the GSM standard 2 Failed User requests backward move the text was displayed as requested and the user wants to go backwards in the session It corresponds to 11 Backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user 3 Failed No response from user the text was displayed and the user did not react It corresponds to 12 No response from user 4 Failed Screen is busy the text could not be display
288. meters Report Description Command Possible Responses Set HSCSD parameters AT CHSR lt mode gt CME ERROR lt err gt reporting on or off OK ERROR Show the current setting AT CHSR CHSR lt mode gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CHSR CHSR list of supported supported lt modes gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description LZT 123 7590 R1F With this command enabled the intermediate result code CHSR lt rx gt lt tx gt lt aiur gt lt coding gt is returned from TA to TE when an HSCSD call is being set up The result code represents the current negotiated or renegotiated HSCSD parameters If enabled the intermediate result code is transmitted at the point of the call setup negotiation where the ME TA has determined what type of HSCSD connection will be used Result code transmission is done after possible service CR error control ER and or compression DR reporting but before possible TE TA rate ILRR reporting and before 118 8 DATA HSCSD 8 5 AT CHSU the intermediate result code CONNECT is transmitted The format of the intermediate result code is CHSR lt rx gt lt tx gt lt aiur gt lt coding gt For the value definitions refer to AT CHSC HSCSD Current Call Parameters For instance for a non transparent HSCSD call result code CHSR 2 1 4 8 means that the call has two timeslots downlink one timeslot upl
289. mmand is AT E2ESC OK supported ERROR Description Defines a guard time for the escape sequence in GPRS and Circuit Switched Online Data Mode to return to online command mode i e if AT lt CR gt is received either as part of the data stream or a terminating string from the application and no further data is received for the duration of the guard time the module will go into on line command mode This guards against the module accidentally going into on line command mode The verbose format of AT lt CR gt is lt S2 gt lt S2 gt lt S2 gt AT lt S3 gt 155 13 INTERFACE lt gt gt Description 0 No guard time Default value 1 10 Guard time in seconds 156 LZT 123 7590 bit 14 Network 14 1 AT E2CD Ericsson M2M Cell Description LZT 123 7590 R1E Description Command Possible Responses Request network cell AT E2CD lt n gt ERROR description OK Show the current setting AT E2CD E2CD lt n gt lt lac gt lt ci gt lt ta gt ERROR Show if the command is AT E2CD E2CD list of supported supported lt n gt s ERROR Description Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code E2CD when lt n gt 1 or when there is a change in one of the network cell parameters E2CD lt lac gt lt ci gt lt ta gt Read command returns the status of result code presentation and several values which show the network cell parameters Location information lt lac gt lt ci gt
290. module should be looped back on each other as the chipset requires this at a hardware level 151 LZT 123 7590 bit 13 INTERFACE 13 13 13 14 AT ILRR Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting Description Command Possible Responses Defines DTE DCE AT ILRR lt value gt OK character framing ERROR Show the current setting AT ILRR ILRR lt value gt Show if the command is AT ILRR ILRR list of supported supported lt values gt s Description Specifies whether or not the extended format ILRR lt rate gt information text is transmitted from the DCE to the DTE The lt rate gt reported shall represent the current negotiated or renegotiated DTE DCE rate If enabled the intermediate result code is transmitted after any modulation error control or data compression reports are transmitted and before any final result code e g CONNECT is transmitted The lt rate gt is applied after the final result code is transmitted lt value gt Description 0 Disables reporting of local port rate ILRR is not transmitted Default value 1 Enables reporting of local port rate ILRR is transmitted AT IPR Cable Interface Port Command Description Command Possible Responses Defines fixed DTE rate AT IPR rate OK ERROR Show the current setting AT IPR IPR lt rate gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT IPR IPR list of fixed supported only lt rate gt s OK
291. mum length of field lt prompt_text gt 240 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT lt prompt_text gt Description String type Field of maximum length lt prompt_text_length gt in string type between Coding is defined in lt prompt_coding gt 18 5 AT E2STKL M2M STK Select Item Description Command Possible responses Answer to the AT E2STKL lt answer CME ERROR lt err gt reception of gt s lt user_response gt OK SELECT ITEM ERROR Show if the AT E2STKL E2STKL list of supported command is lt answer gt supported list of supported lt user_response gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description The ME passes the parameters within SELECT ITEM command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKL Command AT E2STKL allows the external application to send the appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code and before the timeout expires If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires an ERROR response is be generated If lt answer gt parameter is not 0 a failure has occurred and no more parameters are sent If the extra parameters are sent the ME indicates ERROR Values follow GSM 11 14 standard lt answer gt Description 0 OK Performed as required It corresponds to 00 command performed successfully described in the GSM standard 1 Failed User terminated session It corresponds to 10
292. n 6 2 AT CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Attach or detach MS to CGATT lt state gt CME ERROR lt err gt the GPRS packet OK domain packet domain ERROR service Show the current setting CGATT CGATT lt state gt OK ERROR Show if the command is CGATT e CGATT list of supported supported lt state gt s OK ERROR Description Note Note Used to attach the MS to or detach the MS from the GPRS packet domain service After the command has completed the MS remains in V 250 command state If the MS is already in the requested state the command is ignored and the OK response is returned If the requested state cannot be achieved an ERROR or CME ERROR response is returned Extended error responses enabled by the CMEE command are listed under CME ERROR Mobile Equipment Error Code page 13 Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the attachment state changes to detached This command has the characteristics of both the V 250 action and parameter commands Hence it has the read form in addition to the execution set and test forms The unit software is automatically hard coded to attach to a GPRS network therefore entering this command as part of the initialization sequence is not required lt state gt Description 0 Detached 1 Attached 86 6 DATA GPRS 6 3 AT CGDATA Enter Dat
293. n String In the case of SMS GSM 04 11 SC address followed by GSM 03 40 TPDU in hexadecimal format ME TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number e g octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A IRA 50 and 65 In the case of CBS GSM 03 41 TPDU in hexadecimal format lt mr gt Description Integer type GSM 03 40 TP Message Reference in integer format lt ackpdu gt Description 209 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT String GSM 03 40 RP User Data element of RP ACK PDU format is same as for lt pdu gt in case of SMS but without GSM 04 11 SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by double quote characters like a normal string type parameter Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Send command AT CMGC lt fo gt lt ct gt lt pid gt lt if PDU mode message mn gt lt da gt lt toda gt lt CR gt CMGF 1 and Text is entered lt ctrl Z ESC gt een successful lt mr gt lt scts gt if sending fails CMS ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the AT CMGC OK commands is ERROR supported Description Sends a command message from a TE to the network SMS COMMAND The entering of text is as specified in the send message command CMGS but the format is fixed to be a sequence of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which the ME TA converts into 8 bit octets refer to CMGS
294. n ATM 23 3 6 2 Audio From Mobile Station AFMS cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 25 3 7 Microphone le LEE 25 3 8 Speaker e NIE 26 39 Digita tel Pre RS ltl len el een nl en KEEK EEEE G 26 3 10 Re EE 28 LZT 123 8081 Ric 3 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3 10 1 UART 1 RS232 RD TD RTS CTS DTR DCD DSR and RI 30 3 10 2 Serial Data Signals RD Eeer Seeerei geheie 30 3 10 3 Control Signals RTS CTS DTR DCD RI DR 31 S104 UART 2 TD2 RD2Z ee ott eee Pe e 34 3 10 59 UART Nee 35 3 11 SIM Gard Eelere SEENEN ee 36 3 11 1 SIM Detection SIM Presence 37 3 12 Gerviceibrogrammmg 37 ee EE 38 3 14 LED38 3 15 EXON Burst Ltr c c cctesecdeatetect ced oiwal sebedacetadecent dadedecntetessaeinds 39 3 16 Real REEL 39 3 17 Ereegnes edd 40 SN WER BR e 41 cS a Ae ME 41 SV EE Ee 41 ST WOR DCH Ee 41 3 18 Keyboard interface embedded applications only 42 S216 1 Mee 42 918 2 Eege 42 Antenna ET Ee 44 AT Command Summary NENNEN 45 Embedded applications c cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaees 48 Oat EE 48 6 2 Implementation E 48 6 3 Other protocols supported AA 48 6 3 1 le Ein E 48 6 3 2 et OT eege 49 6 4 lande EE EE 49 6 4 1 M2mpower IDE Integrated Developers Environment 49 TCP IP stack Gammp nee nauan d akanan takaua neaku arraka k aitaka karraka kaira k akarra h arabi 50 Tal EUREN 50 7 2 Embedded application Implementaton nn neeeeeea 50
295. n is disabled off Default value 1 The call log function is enabled on Unsolicited result codes ECAV lt ccid gt lt ccstatus gt lt calltype gt lt processid gt lt exitcause gt lt number gt lt type gt lt ccid gt Description 1to7 Integer type A number which uniquely defines a call in the ME number of call control process There can not be two call id s with the same number simultaneously The maximum number of call control processes are 7 which are 5 multiparty members one call on hold and one waiting call lt ccstatus gt Description 0 Idle 1 Calling MO 2 Connecting MO 3 Active connection between A and B 4 Hold 5 Waiting MT 6 Alerting MT 7 Busy lt calltype gt Description 1 Voice 2 Data 128 Voice2 lt processid gt Description Integer Reported when returning to the Idle state lt ccstatus gt 0 8 H 08 CC Call Control 68 H 44 MM Mobile Management 36 3 CONTROL AND STATUS 69 H 45 MS Mobile Station 122 H 7A RR Radio Resources lt exitcause gt Description Integer Exit cause according to GSM 04 08 reported when returning to Idle state lt ccstatus gt 0 lt number gt Description String String type ME number of format specified by lt type gt Only valid for lt ccstatus gt 1 Calling lt type gt Description 129 145 161
296. nal Result Code gt Description CONNECT If connection is successfully established only valid for data connections CONNECT If connection is successfully established only valid for data lt text gt connections NO CARRIER Unable to establish a connection or the connection attempt was aborted by the user ERROR An unexpected error occurred while trying to establish the connection NO DIALTONE The ME is being used for a voice call or is not within coverage of the network BUSY The ME number called is engaged valid for data and voice connections OK Only valid for voice connections lt text gt Description 19200 Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits s HSCSD 9600 Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits s 4800 Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits s 22 2 CALL CONTROL 2400 Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits s Example ATD07747008670 OK 2 4 ATH Hang up Description Command Possible Responses Terminate the call ATH ERROR OK Description Note Note Signals the MS to terminate an active call This does not work for incoming calls to hang these up the AT CHUP command should be used If hanging up a call while a GPRS session is active the multiparty command should be used AT CHLD If it is not then the module software will internally hang all calls up and the application not be able to return to the session 2 5 ATL Monitor Speaker Loudness LZT 123 7590 R1F
297. ndard 246 18 9 AT E2STKE LZT 123 7590 R1F 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT lt ton gt Description Integer type Field of 1 byte indicating the Type of Number coded as for EFanp See GSM 04 08 section 10 5 4 7 for the allowed values lt dial_string gt Description String type ME number of format lt ton gt lt coding gt Description 0 Text is coded in unpacked format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet as defined in GSM 03 38 with bit 8 set to O It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit Text is coded in packed format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet packed in 8 bit octets as defined in GSM 03 38 It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet lt text_length gt Description Integer type 0 240 Value indicating the maximum length of field lt alpha_id gt lt alpha_id gt Description String type Field of string type between Coding is according to EFanp as defined in GSM 11 11 The maximum length is fixed STK Send Short Message Unsolicited Result Code E2STKE lt coding gt lt text_length gt lt alpha_id gt The ME passes the lt alpha_id gt within SEND SHORT MESSAGE command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKE This informs the external application that the ME is sending an SMS lt coding gt Description 0 Text is coded in unpacked
298. ndicating the maximum length of field lt alpha_id gt 0 240 lt itemn1 gt lt ltemn gt lt alpha_id gt Description String type Field of string type between Coding is according to EFanp as defined in GSM 11 11 The maximum length is fixed lt default gt Description Integer type The lt default gt parameter is a single byte between 1 and 255 It shows the default selected item within the list lt item_idn gt Description Integer type The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255 Each item lt itemn gt in the list shall have a unique identifier lt item_idn gt lt itemn gt Description 242 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT mm String type Field of string type between as defined in GSM 11 11 Coding is according to EFanp lt NbrOfltems gt Description Integer type Number of items to be presented in the following unsolicited results The maximum length is fixed 18 6 AT E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible responses Answer to the AT E2STKM lt answer gt CME ERROR lt err gt reception of SET lt on_off gt OK UP MENU ERROR Show if the AT E2STKM E2STKM list of supported command is lt answer gt list of supported supported lt on_off gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description The ME passes the parameters within SET UP MENU command to the external application so that the ST
299. nds are available to the embedded application Further drivers have been written such as M bus and PC for use by the EA through the use of the IO pins 6 3 Other protocols supported The unit supports other protocols which enable easier integration using solutions providers through the use of embedded application 6 3 1 Orange Connect A number of intrinsic functions have been implemented enabling easy application writing and interfacing to the M2M CONNECT server which is being offered by Orange LZT 123 8081 Ric 48 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION The intrinsic functions that are available offer easy use of configuration settings server queue management and XML 6 3 2 IBM MQTT This is a similar implementation to the Orange connect solution where intrinsic functions are being implemented which enable the unit to easily connect to the IBM broker program allowing the units to subscribe and unsubscribe from groups also to publish to those groups etc 6 4 Limitations Since the module is processing the script using its own memory limitations are placed onto the scripts that are run e Adirect comparison cannot be made to a fully compiled C program in terms of size but a gauge of script size is that if each line were 128 characters long in the script then the script could be 350 lines long e Processing power is something that needs to be considered as the script is run as a low priority process within the software An
300. neighborcell1 lac gt lt neighborcell1 ci gt lt neighborcell1 bsic gt lt neighborcell1 ch gt lt neighborcell1 rxl gt lt neighborcell1 c1 gt lt neighborcell1 c2 gt lt neighborcell2 mcc gt lt neighborcell2 mnc gt lt neighborcell2 lac gt lt neighborcell2 ci gt lt neighborcell2 bsic gt lt neighborcell2 ch gt lt neighborcell2 rxl gt lt neighborcell2 c1 gt lt neighborcell2c2 gt lt neighborcelln mcc gt lt neighborcelln mnc gt lt neighborcelln lac gt lt neighborcelln ci gt lt neighborcelln bsic gt lt neighborcelln ch gt 160 LZT 123 7590 R1F 14 NETWORK lt neighborcelln rxl gt lt neighborcelln c1 gt lt neighborcelln c2 gt OK The mode setting lt n gt in the set command has the combination listed in the table below When lt n gt 5 the shot information is the same as in lt n gt 1 but neighbouring cells which have to be up to 16 This is the information that comes from the Serving Cell through the BCCH reporting the BTS that are on the Serving Cell s surroundings lt n gt Description 0 Disable network monitoring unsolicited result code Default value 1 One shot presentation of the network location information Display mode with headers and lt CR gt lt LF gt line separators 2 Enable network location information unsolicited result code in Display mode like n 1 There will be continuous unsolicited information responses lt m gt secon
301. neral Electrical and Logical Characteristics eeeeeeeeeeeees 24 5 2 1 General Protection Heourements 25 5 39 JEE 25 5 3 1 Analogue Ground AGND EE 25 5 3 2 Digital Ground DGND cccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 26 5 4 VCC Regulated Power Supply Input 26 5 5 Battery Charging Input CHG_IN Reserved for future use 27 5 6 Turning the Radio Device ON OFF and the External Power Signal 28 5 6 1 VIO 2 75V SUPPIY dees tinue A ARRA EERTE 30 5 7 Analogue e e EE 31 5 7 1 Audio To Mobile Station ATM 31 5 7 2 Audio From Mobile Station AFMS ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 32 5 7 3 e Mere lee 33 5 7 4 Elle EE 34 0 0 PON Digital AUdIO EE 35 5 8 1 PCM Data eru E 36 5 9 Serial Data Interfaces AE 38 5 9 1 UART1 RS232 RD TD RTS CTS DTR DSR DCD and RI 39 5 9 2 Serial Data Signals RD TD 39 5 9 3 Control Signals RTS CTS DTR DSR DCD RI 40 5 9 4 ERR E EE EE 41 5 9 5 VART ERR RDI saa aeaa aa E A EAA RARE 42 5 10 SIM Card Related Signals 0 eeen 42 5 10 1 SIM Detection SIMPRESENCE ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 43 5 11 Service Programming EE 44 Ori EE 44 5 13 LED44 5 14 General Purpose Digital I O Ports eenen 45 5 15 Extended UO capabilities A 46 5 15 1 LEDHOG Capabilities fiscletlseledletledtletledlscletlseledlscletzas 47 519 27 e 47 ie Ee Sama OF ORG LEE EE 47 ASA REES 47 5 16 General Purpose Analogue I O Portes 47
302. ng plan international number 161 ISDN telephony numbering plan national number 128 255 Other values refer to GSM 04 08 section 10 5 4 7 lt vp gt Description 220 16 11 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT 0 143 TP VP 1 x 5 minutes i e 5 minute intervals up to 12 hous 144 167 12 hours TP_VP 143 x 30 minutes 168 196 TP VP 166 x 1 day 197 255 TP VP 192 x 1 week lt mn gt Description Integer type GSM 03 40 TP message number Note Prior to the R6 build of software the unit was only able to read upto 30 messages on a SIM messages in locations over 30 could not be seen or access In R6 this has been increased to 100 AT CMGL List Message PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses List message AT CMGL CMGL lt stat gt lt index gt lt stat gt lt alpha gt lt length gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt pdu gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CMGL lt index gt lt stat gt lt alpha gt lt length gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt pdu gt CMS ERROR lt err gt Show if the AT CMGL CMGL list of supported lt stat gt s command is supported Note Returns messages with status value lt stat gt from preferred message storage lt mem1 gt to the TE Entire data units lt pdu gt are returned If status of the message is received unread status in the storage changes to received read If listing fails final result code CMS ERROR lt
303. nning script can be overwritten until deactiveted deleted or stops running Abortability This command may not be aborted 279 LZT 123 7590 bit 20 EMBEDDED APPLICATION Defined values Table 7 lt cmd gt parameter lt cmd gt Description 0 Download Script to module 1 Upload Script from module 2 Delete Script 3 Make Script Active Table 8 lt ScriptNum gt parameter lt ScriptNum gt Description 0 1 255 Integer giving script number cmd is to operate on With activate command script numbers gt 0 1 will make no scripts active 255 indicates no script active Table 9 lt length gt parameter lt length gt Description 0 350 Length of Script in 128byte chunks Table 10 lt error gt parameter lt error gt Description 0 Download OK 1 Syntax error in code 2 Not enough space for script 3 Transfer cancelled 4 Transfer timeout 5 Miscellaneous structural error Table 11 lt Script Data gt parameter lt ScriptData gt Description Hex Data Data sent in Xmodem CRC packets 128bytes payload per packet Table 12 lt AviSpace gt parameter lt AviSpace gt Description Decimal value 0 350 Decimal value representing available swap space for a non active script Max Space ActiveScript Size LZT 123 7590 R1F 280 20 EMBEDDED APPLICATION 20 2 1 Xmodem CRC Protocol CCITT LZT 123 7590
304. nnneeeeenn 51 3 25 AT CLAN Set EE Ee 52 3 26 AT CMEE Mobile Equipment Error 53 3 27 AT CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 54 3 28 AT CPAS ME Activity Status i2sc c cece Reesseedionedd wee 55 3 29 ME e CW Control EE 57 3 30 AT CPWD Change Password neon el neu eeen 59 3 31 AT CR Service Reporting Control 61 3 32 AT CRC Cellular Result Code cccccccccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 61 3 33 AT CSAS Save Settings eenen 62 3 34 AT CSQ en e LEE 63 3 35 AT CTZU Automatic Time Zone Update 64 Ai POO spo vesceaasscsednabasssasanaseanaasaeaeasseaeapasaeaaasacbaseaanandeaeienenesegsnnaaessissanaas 65 4 1 AT E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification 05000000000naaa 65 4 2 AT E2APR M2M Audio Profile Manipulation nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenna 69 4 3 AT EALR Ericsson Audio Line Request sesesnnnnnnnereenrennnnrnnrreeennn nna 71 4 4 AT EAMS Ericsson Audio Mode Gelechon na 72 4 5 AT EARS Ericsson Audio Ring Gonal 73 4 6 AT E2PHFB Portable Handsfree Button Sense Enable 005 74 4 7 AT ELAM Ericsson Local Audio Mode ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 74 4 8 AT EMIC Ericsson Microphone Mode sssssssesssnnnnnnnerennnenrnnrnrrreeennnn nn 75 4 9 AT EMIR Ericsson Music Mute Indication Heouest 15 4 10 AT ESMA Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound 76 4 11 ATM Monitor Speaker Control 76 4 12 AT ERIL Ericsson R
305. nto GSM alphabet according to rules of Annex A backspace can be used to delete last character and carriage returns can be used previously mentioned four character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return entered by the user if TE character set is HEX the entered text should consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME TA converts to 7 bit characters of GSM alphabet e g 17 IRA 49 and 55 will be converted to character I GSM 23 if lt dcs gt indicates that 8 bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or lt fo gt indicates that GSM 03 40 TP User Data Header Indication is set the entered text should consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME TA converts into 8 bit octet e g two characters 2A IRA 50 and 65 will be converted to an octet with integer value 42 e Sending can be cancelled by giving lt ESC gt character IRA 27 e lt ctrl Z gt IRA 26 must be used to indicate the ending of the message body lt da gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Destination Address Value in string format BCD numbers or GSM default alphabet characters are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character refer command CSCS Type of address given by lt toda gt lt toda gt Description String type GSM 04 11 TP Destination Address Type of Address octet in integer format when first character of lt da gt is IRA 43 default is 145 ot
306. nvert digital to analogue signals and vice versa 5 16 1 Digital to Analogue Converter DAC The DAC is an 8 bit converter Conversion takes place when an AT command is sent to the radio device The radio device sends the resulting analogue value to the DAC pin Tolerance on this internal voltage is 5 DAC output electrical characteristics are given in the following table Parameter Limit Units Resolution 8 Bits Output voltage for code 0 2 75 x 0 05 0 05 V Output voltage for code 255 2 75 x 0 95 0 05 V Nominal step size 2 75 x 0 9 256 mV Absolute error lt 0 5 mV Output wide band noise and clock lt 0 5 mV ims feedthrough 0 1 1 MHz Power supply rejection ratio 50 Hz 10 kHz gt 40 dB Conversion rate 0 5 LSB lt 2 Load AND ms lt 50 Load B ms Output buffer impedance when disabled gt 50 kQ Output current source or sink EN mA Current consumption active lt 1 0 mA Tolerance on this internal voltage is 5 Referred to the ideal conversion characteristic See Figure 5 11 48 SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE DAC o 100 200pF DGND o A DAC D 10nF Int DGND o Figure 5 11 DAC loads 100k Load A Ik Load B 5 16 2 Analogue to Digital Converters 1 2 and 3 ADCx ADC electrical characteristics are shown in the table below The ADC is an 8 bit converter An analogue value applied to any of the ADC p
307. o transmitters 61 LZT 123 7589 R2B LZT 123 7589 R2B HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE RADIO DEVICE Path loss occurs as the strength of the received signal steadily decreases in proportion to the distance from the transmitter Shadowing is a form of environmental attenuation of radio signals caused by hills buildings trees or even vehicles This can be a particular problem inside buildings especially if the walls are thick and reinforced Multi path fading is a sudden decrease or increase in the signal strength This is the result of interference caused when direct and reflected signals reach the antenna simultaneously Surfaces such as buildings streets vehicles etc can reflect signals Hand over occurs as you move from one cell to another in the GSM network Your mobile application call is transferred from one cell to the next Hand over can briefly interfere with communication and may cause a delay or at worst a disruption 62 EMBEDDED APPLICATIONS 9 Embedded Applications The radio device has the capability to store and run customer written code in the form of a script during the processor s idle time through the use of an on board interpreter 9 1 Features Main features of embedded applications are as follows e C based scripting language Sony Ericsson specific e Over the air upgrade of scripts NOT GSM software e Library of intrinsic functions e 2 scripts can be stored in the memory at any time but on
308. o the columns whenever a key is depressed In order to avoid short circuits if multiple keys are pressed simultaneously the column drivers must be open collector This must be achieved with external transistors as the logic drive from the GR47 is rail to rail Suitable transistors for this interface are of the type with built in bias resistors between base and emitter The method of connection is shown in 3 8 below RN1107 TOOAY A Figure 3 8 Keyboard matrix connections LZT 123 8081 Ric 43 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 4 Antenna Connector The Antenna Connector is a hub for transmission of the Radio Frequency RF signals from the module to the external customer supplied antenna It is a MMCX connector that is mounted on the surface of the module Most dealers should be able to supply this type of connector This table provides the electrical characteristics at the antenna interface Parameter Limit Description Nominal impedance 50 Q SWR lt 2 1 Output Power 2 Watt peak Class 4 1 Watt peak Class 1 Static Sensitivity Better than 102 dBm Better than 102 dBm Extended GSM 900 GSM 1800 Extended GSM 900 GSM 1800 LZT 123 8081 Ric 44 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 5 AT Command Summary The AT standard is a line oriented command language AT is an abbreviation of ATtention and it is always used to start sending a command line from a TE to the T
309. o to N string parameters whose meanings are specific to the lt PDP_type gt 6 5 AT CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting Description Command Possible Responses Set command CGEREP lt mode gt e CME ERROR lt err gt lt bfr gt OK LZT 123 7590 R1F 88 6 DATA GPRS Show the current setting Show if the command is supported CGEREP CGEREP ERROR CGEREP lt mode gt lt bfr gt OK ERROR e CGEREP list of supported lt mode gt s list of supported lt bfr gt s OK ERROR Description Enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes CGEV XXX from MS to TE in the case of certain events occurring in the GPRS packet domain MS or the network lt mode gt Description 0 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the MS No codes are forwarded to the TE 1 Discard unsolicited result codes when MS TE link is reserved otherwise forward them directly to the TE lt bfr gt Description 0 MS buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when lt mode gt 1 or 2 is entered 6 6 AT CGPADDR Show PDP Address Description Command Possible Responses Show PDP addresses for specified CIDs Show if the command is supported CGPADDR lt cid gt L lt cid gt CGPADDR CGPADDR lt cid gt lt PDP_addr gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CGPAD DR lt cid gt lt PDP_addr gt LJ OK ERROR
310. of C 308 308 ns CLK 1230 5 S Hold time after falling edge of I CCLK 0 ns C Frequency IC CLK 400 kHz 5 High or low 1 C CLK 1 2 us S 3 Delay time after falling edge of C 100 ns Q o CLK Q Hold time after falling edge of I CCLK 0 ns x 5 18 TX_ON Burst Transmission Pin Signal Dir Description 35 TX_ON O GSM radio device to transmit Burst transmission is the time when a GSM transceiver unit is transmitting RF signals TX_ON indicates the radio device is going into transmission mode 5 19 Real Time Clock LZT 123 7589 R2B Pin Signal Dir Description 25 VRTC Voltage for the Real Time Clock The Real Time Clock RTC provides the main microprocessor with a time of day calendar and alarm and a one hundred year calendar Its accuracy is shown in the table below Parameter Min Typ Max Units RTC accuracy 250C 8 21 20 52 ppm s month RTC accuracy extreme 89 231 101 ppm s month temperatures 262 The Real Time Clock operates in two modes when connected to a separate power supply 51 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE e RTC normal mode the radio device is in ON or OFF mode and it is supplied with power VCC is applied e RTC back up mode VCC is disconnected and the RTC is maintained by a separate backup power supply connected to the VRTC input see Figure 5 13 below Backup power is provided by a capacitor golden capacitor or batte
311. ogress change is reported lt dir gt Description 0 Mobile Originated Call 1 Mobile Terminated Call lt ccstatus gt Description 0 IDLE 1 CALLING Mobile Originated outgoing call started 2 CONNECTING Mobile Originated outgoing call in the process of establishing a connection 3 ACTIVE Connection established between A and B 4 HOLD Connection put on hold 5 WAITING Mobile Terminated incoming call waiting 6 ALERTING Mobile Terminated incoming call ringing 7 BUSY 8 CALL FAILED See lt exitcause gt for reason lt calltype gt Description 1 Voice 2 Data 3 FAX 128 Voice 2 lt mpty gt Description 0 Call is not one of multiparty conference call parties 1 Call is one of multiparty conference call parties lt exitcause gt This is an integer value showing why the call ended Only reported when returning to the IDLE state The exit code is in most cases delivered directly from the network and therefore the codes can differ from operator to operator There may also be more exit codes than listed in the table below 40 LZT 123 7590 R1F 3 CONTROL AND STATUS lt exitcause gt Description 1 Unassigned unallocated number 3 No route to destination 6 Channel unacceptable 8 Operator determined barring 16 Normal call clearing 17 User busy 18 No user responding 19 User alerting no answer 21 Call rejected 22 Number changed 25 Pre emption 26 Non selec
312. on Enables or disables display of intermediate bearer capability reports during the handshake phase lt mode gt Description 0 Disable reporting Default value 1 Enable reporting Intermediate Result Codes CR lt serv gt 3 32 AT CRC Cellular Result Code Description Command Possible Responses Set Cellular Result Code AT CRC lt mode gt OK option ERROR Show the current setting AT CRC CRC lt mode gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CRC e CRC list of supported supported lt mode gt s OK ERROR Description Command controls whether or not e the extended format of incoming call indication e or GPRS network request for PDP context activation 61 LZT 123 7590 bit 3 CONTROL AND STATUS e or notification for VBS VGCS calls is used When enabled an incoming call is indicated to the TE with unsolicited result code CRING lt type gt instead of the normal RING Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value lt mode gt Description 0 Disables extended format 1 Enables extended format Unsolicited Result Codes CRING lt type gt 3 33 AT CSAS Save Settings Description Command Possible Responses Save Settings AT CSAS lt profile gt CMS ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the AT CSAS CSAS list of supported command is lt profile gt s supported CMS ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description
313. on of fax capabilities within the module require communication between fax applications and the module to run at a higher baud rate than the fax transmission baud rate In this case the fastest transmission rate is 9600 baud Once this command has been performed the user must then execute the AT amp F command to reset the module with the new RS232 comm s baud rate The AT E2FAX command allows the user to e Configure the RS232 Comm speed default factory profile specifying whether the speed should be 9600 baud standard or 19200 baud for FAX application comm This value will then be used once the AT amp F command is next used e Read what value this default factory profile has been set to lt RcV gt Description 0 Configure RS232 default setting to 9600 baud 1 Configure RS232 default setting to 19200 baud Example 123 LZT 123 7590 R1E 10 FAX AT E2FAX E2FAX 0 1 OK AT E2FAX E2FAX 0 Current default setting is 9600 baud OK AT E2FAX 0 OK Sets default RS232 setting to 9600 baud 10 2 Low Level Fax Commands The following table of low level fax commands are supported and used by the GR47 for fax operation AT FAA AT FBADLIN AT FBADMUL AT FBOR AT FBUG AT FCIG AT FCLASS AT FCQ AT FCR AT FDCC AT FDFFC AT FDIS AT FDR AT FDT AT FECM AT FET AT FK AT FLID AT FLNFC AT FLPL AT FMDL AT FMFR AT FMI AT FMINSP AT FMM AT FMR AT FPHCTO AT FPTS AT FRBC AT FREL AT FREV AT FRH AT
314. on sets and radios may cause electromagnetic interference e Never try to dismantle the radio device yourself There are no components inside the radio device that can be serviced by the user If you attempt to dismantle the radio device you may invalidate the warranty e To protect the power supply cables and meet the fire safety requirements it is recommended that the electrical circuits are supplied with a power regulator The power regulator should be placed as close to the terminals of the power supply as possible e Do not connect any incompatible component or product to the radio device Note Sony Ericsson does not warrant against defects non conformities or deviations caused thereby 56 LZT 123 7589 R2B HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE RADIO DEVICE e The connection disconnection method for the development board is by means of the DC power jack For this reason the mains supply should be situated close to the development board and be easily accessible 8 1 2 SIM Card e Before handling the SIM card in your application ensure that you are not charged with static electricity Use proper precautions to avoid electrostatic discharges The radio device must be switched off before the SIM card is installed in your application e When the SIM card hatch is opened the SIM card connectors lie exposed under the SIM card holder CAUTION Do not touch these connectors If you do you may release an electrical discharge that could
315. option that can be used to stop this controller mode this stops GSM operation and provides all processing power for the script to be run e Code cannot be ported directly from an existing application and loaded directly onto the module It must be re written in the SEM script language so that the module interpreter can function correctly 6 4 1 M2mpower IDE Integrated Developers Environment The IDE is a windows based package which allows the user to write simulate de bug and download their application into a module with the EA software The standard version is designed to run on Windows XP and 2000 other versions are available for 98 if required A guide is available for implementing applications using the developers kit and the EA functionality This is a required package to be able to implement an EA For further information please contact SEM customer support LZT 123 8081 Ric 49 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 7 TCP IP stack An on board IP TCP UDP stack has been integrated into the software negating the need for the customer to implement one in their own code base This is now available through AT commands and the embedded applications 7 1 AT command access Note Access via the AT commands is detailed in a separate application note and the breakdown of the commands in the integrators manual these are both available on the extranet The way the commands have been structured allows an application that
316. ora gt Description String type GSM 04 11 TP Recipient Address Type of Address octet in integer format default refer lt toda gt lt alpha gt Description String type Manufacturing specific Should be left empty but not omitted Le commas shall mark the place were it should be Used character set should be the one selected with command Select TE Character Set CSCS lt scts gt Description String type GSM 03 40 TP Service Centre Time Stamp in time string format refer lt dt gt lt length gt Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode CMGF 0 the length of the actual TP data unit in octets i e the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length lt data gt The entered text should be formatted as follows if lt dcs gt set with CSMP indicates that GSM 03 38 default alphabet is used and lt fo gt indicates that GSM 03 40 TP User Data Header Indication is not set if TE character set other than HEX refer command Select TE Character Set CSCS in TS 07 07 ME TA converts the entered text into GSM alphabet according to rules of Annex A backspace can be used to LZT 123 7590 R1F 218 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT delete last character and carriage returns can be used previously mentioned four character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return entered by the user if TE character set is
317. ority text Display high priority text lt clear_condition gt Description 0 Clear message after a delay 1 Wait for user to clear message lt coding gt Description 0 Text is coded in unpacked format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet as defined in GSM 03 38 with bit 8 set to O It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit Text is coded in packed format using the SMS default 7 bit coded alphabet packed in 8 bit octets as defined in GSM 03 38 It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet lt text_length gt Description Integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field lt text gt lt text gt Description string type Field of maximum length lt text_length gt in string type format between Coding is defined in lt coding gt 18 3 AT E2STKG M2M STK Get Inkey Description Command Possible responses Answer to the AT E2STKG e CME ERROR lt err gt reception of lt answer gt OK GET INKEY Show if the command is supported lt response_type gt lt user_response gt AT E2STKG E2STKG list of supported lt answer gt list of supported lt response_type gt lt user_response gt e CME ERROR lt err gt OK e ERROR LZT 123 7590 R1F 236 LZT 123 7590 R1F 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT Description The ME passes the parameters within GET INKEY command to the external application by
318. ormat gt setting AT CREG Network Registration Description Command Possible Responses Request network AT CREG lt n gt CME ERROR lt err gt registration OK ERROR Show the current setting AT CREG CREG lt n gt lt stat gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CREG e CREG list of supported supported lt n gt s e CME ERROR lt err gt OK 177 14 18 LZT 123 7590 R1F 14 NETWORK ERROR Description Set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code CREG lt stat gt when lt n gt 1 and there is a change in the ME network registration status Read command returns the status of result code presentation and an integer lt stat gt which shows whether the network has currently indicated the registration of the ME Controls the presentation of the unsolicited result code CREG lt n gt Description 0 Disable network registration unsolicited result code Default value Enable network registration unsolicited result code lt stat gt Description 0 Not registered ME is not currently searching for a new operator to register with Registered home network Not registered but ME is currently searching for a new operator to register with Registration denied Not detailed Registered roaming Example AT CREG CREG 0 1 OK AT ECPI Ciphering Indicator Description Command Possible Res
319. ot known or not detectable lt ber gt Description 0 7 As RXQUAL values in the table in GSM 05 08 subclause 8 2 4 99 Not known or not detectable Example AT CSQ CSQ 13 99 OK Note An alternative command to this is AT E2EMM as it gives more information and a precise reading in dBm 63 LZT 123 7590 bit 3 CONTROL AND STATUS 3 35 AT CTZU Automatic Time Zone Update LZT 123 7590 R1F Note Description Command Possible Responses Enable and disable AT CTZU lt onoff gt CME ERROR lt err gt automatic time zone OK update via NITZ ERROR Show the current setting AT CTZU CTZU lt onoff gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CTZU CTZU list of supported supported lt onoff gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Enables and disables the automatic time zone update via NITZ If setting fails in an ME error CME ERROR lt err gt is returned lt onoff gt Description 0 The automatic time zone update is disabled off Default value 1 The automatic time zone update is enabled on This is highly network dependent Most networks around the world have not implemented this and as such the unit will be unable to sychronise to network time 64 4 Audio Note E2EAMS and E2APR are new commands that replace the functionary offered by the EALR EAMS EARS and ELAM commands Use the new commands in new applications The old commands are inclu
320. otection Requirements e All 2 75 V digital inputs will continuously withstand and suffer no damage in the power on or power off condition when subjected to any voltage from 0 5 V to 3 47 V 3 3 V 5 e All 2 75 V digital outputs will continuously withstand a short circuit to any other voltage within the range 0 V to 3 V e All analogue outputs will continuously withstand a short circuit to any voltage within the range 0 V to 3 V e The SIM output signals and the SIMVCC supply will continuously withstand a short circuit to any voltage within the range 0 V to 4 1V Note Although the unit should be able to withstand the higher voltages the unit should not be driven at the levels as it will result in failures over time 5 3 Grounds Pin Signal Description 2 4 6 8 10 12 DGND Digital ground 60 AGND Analogue ground There are two ground connections in the radio device AGND analogue ground and DGND digital ground Pin assignments are shown in the table above Note AGND and DGND are connected at a single point inside the radio device They must not be joined together in your application 5 3 1 Analogue Ground AGND AGND is the return signal or analogue audio reference for ATMS Audio To Mobile Station and AFMS Audio From Mobile Station It is connected to the DGND inside the radio device only The application must not connect DGND and AGND 25 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE Paramete
321. patibility only It would normally cause the next D command to use pulses when dialling the number 24 LZT 123 7590 R1F 2 CALL CONTROL 2 8 ATT Select Tone Dialing Description Command Possible Responses Select tone dialing ATT OK Show if the command is ATT OK supported Description Command is ignored and is implemented for compatibility only It would normally cause the next D command to use tones when dialling the number 2 9 ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control Description Command Possible Responses Set call progress ATX lt n gt or ATX lt n gt OK monitoring control ERROR Show the current setting ATX X lt n gt Show if the command is ATX X list of supported supported lt n gt s Description Defines if the dial tone detection and busy tone detection are to be used during a call set up lt n gt Description 0 Body and dial tone detection off No line speed reported on connection 1 Body and dial tone detection off Report line speed on connection 2 Busy detection on and dial tone detection off Report line speed on connection 3 Busy detect off and dial tone on Report line speed on connection 4 Busy detect and dial tone detection on Report line speed on connection Default value Note If there is no network available the lt n gt parameter will decide if NO DIALTONE or NO CARRIER will be returned If the call recipient is busy the lt n gt pa
322. plicable In order to connect a LED in the external application the following scheme shall be followed The operation of the LED is hardcoded and is not controlled by the host application Via 220 Gg 2k2 LED K Bopi 10k Figure 3 5 Electrical connection for LED LZT 123 8081 Ric 38 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3 15 TX_ON Burst Transmission Pin Signal Dir Description 35 TX_ON O GSM module on transmission The TX_ON is a digital signal output This shall indicate that the module is going to transmit the burst Burst transmission is the time when a GSM transceiver unit is transmitting in its timeslot assigned by the network Dig 2 75 CMOS Output so general electrical characteristics are applicable 3 16 Real Time Clock The Real Time Clock provides the module with a time of day calendar with alarm and one hundred year calendar to the main microprocessor The real time clock operates with a separate power supply Therefore two modes of operation shall be distinguished e RTC Normal operation This is when the MS is powered Vcc present and it does not take into account if the MS is in OFF or ON e RTC Backup operation This operation is performed when the MS is not powered VCC OV In this case the RTC operation is maintained by the backup power supply e The backup power supply is a passive power supply capacitor golden capacitor battery etc which shall
323. plication cannot be reset until the module is power cycled The application can be restarted from the pause state which will re enable the process and allow it to run from the point it was stopped this may cause information to be lost This command will not affect the running of the application on subsequent powercycles The stop on next powercycle does not affect the current running of the application but will mean that it is not run at start up on the next module powercycle Write to CtrilByte lt cmd gt 2 This parameter sets a byte variable which is available in the system status register available to the script when it is running Just writing a valid value to this byte will set the APPS_AT_CTRL_TRIGGER flag in the application and the value written is stored in the APPS_AT_CTRL_BYTE variable These flags and variables can be read using intrinsic functions in the script and allows the script to be dynamically controlled by the AT command port This can be used to add breakpoints when debugging scripts and also allow runtime modification of the scripts operation Abortability This command may not be aborted 276 LZT 123 7590 bit LZT 123 7590 R1F 20 EMBEDDED APPLICATION Defined values Table 1 lt cmd gt parameter lt cmd gt Description 0 Stop application 1 Start application 2 Write to CtriByte available to read by a running script Table 2 lt StartType gt parameter
324. ponses Request activation of the AT ECPI lt switch gt OK ciphering indication CME lt error gt ERROR 178 LZT 123 7590 R1F 14 NETWORK Shows the current AT ECPI ECPI lt switch gt setting OK ERROR Show if the command is AT ECPI ECPI list of supported supported lt switch gt es values OK ERROR Description This command allows the external application to activate deactivate the ciphering indication The ciphering indication allows the external application to detect when the mobile connection becomes deciphered and thus unsecured Test command gives the current value of the lt switch gt parameter informing if the indicator is enabled or disabled The ciphering indicator feature may be disabled by the home network operator setting data in the administrative data field EFAD in the SIM as defined in GSM 11 11 If this feature is not disabled by the SIM then whenever a connection is in place which is or becomes deciphered an indication is given via the unsolicited result code ECPV lt ciphering gt lt switch gt Description 1 Ciphering indication is on The unsolicited result code ECPV is sent anytime the communication is unsecured and when it becomes secure again 0 Ciphering indication is off Disable the ciphering indication ECPV is not sent Unsolicited Result Codes ECPV lt ciphering gt Sent only when lt switch gt is set to 0 Unsolicited Resul
325. pported supported lt option gt s OK ERROR The command reports the amount of data the last GPRS session received and transmitted or it will report the total amount of data received and transmitted during all past GPRS sessions Also there is an option to clear the latter of these two counters The behaviour of the command is selected with the lt option gt parameter as described in the table below lt option gt Description 0 Report the amount data the last GPRS session transmitted and received in bytes 1 Report the accumulated amount of data of all previous GPRS sessions since the last execution of E2GDV 2 in bytes 2 Resets the data counters to 0 lt bytes gt Description 0 4294967295 Bytes of data transferred lt bytes gt will wrap around back to 0 after 4294967295 or 4GB 97 LZT 123 7590 R1F Note 6 DATA GPRS This command only provides an accurate count when used when used with an external TCP IP stack When used with the internal stack certain data is not counted which may be charged for i e IP address negotiation As a result the figure produced by the unit can only be used as a guide please talk to your service provider for details 98 7 Data TCP IP For more information on using these commands please refer to the application note Using AT commands to control on SEM modules 7 1 AT E2IPA M2M IP Activate Description Command Possible Responses Request AT E2I
326. prevents incorrect biasing or damage of the ATMS input The capacitor must have a value greater than shown below to avoid attenuation of low frequencies The ATMS input is a passive network followed by the transmit part of the CODEC LZT 123 8081 Ric 23 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Parameter Limit Application driving impedance 0 3 3 5 kHz lt 3000 AC coupling capacitance gt 1 uF Module input impedance 0 3 3 5 kHz gt 50KQ Low frequency cut off 3 dB 300 Hz 50 Hz High frequency cut off 3 dB gt 3500 Hz Maximum allowed input level 1 5V pp 530mV Output DC bias level Handsfree mode 2V Portable Handsfree mode 2V 0 1V Additional Gain in Portable Handsfree mode 28 5 dB Maximum input level at ATMS 245mV ims output at PCMO 3dBm0 The following table is with nominal PGA Programmable Gain Settings For more information see AT commands in the integrators manual Input Input Volts TXAGC dB AUXI1 Gain PCMO dBm0 mVims ATMS 245 0 13 3 Maximum input level at MICI GT Am ms output at PCMO 3dBm0 Input Input Volts TXAGC dB AUXI1 Gain PCMO dBm0 mVims MICI 61 4 0 25 3 Output at AUX02 for 3dBm0 at PCMI Input dBm0 RXPGA Volume AUX02 MVims Control dB PCMI 3dBm0 0 0 436 2 AC coupling capacitance must be supplied by the application unless a DC coupled microphone is used LZT 123 8081 Ric 24 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Output at BEAR for
327. r Limit Imax 12 5mA 5 3 2 Digital Ground DGND DGND is the reference or return signal for all system interface digital signals and is also the d c return for SERVICE and the power supply VCC Connect all DGND pins together in your application in order to carry the current drawn by the radio device Parameter Per Pin Total 5 Pins Imax lt 6 0mA lt 3 0A lavg lt 100mA lt 600mA 5 4 VCC Regulated Power Supply Input LZT 123 7589 R2B Pins Signal Description hy Shy Oh a E VCC regulated power supply input Power is supplied to the radio device VCC pins from an external source Connect all VCC pins together in your application in order to carry the current drawn by the radio device The electrical characteristics for VCC are shown in the table below Parameter Mode Limit Vcc supply voltage Nominal 3 6 V Tolerance including 3 4V 4 0 V ripple Over voltage limit 5 5 V Maximum ripple lt 100 mV lt 200 kHz lt 20 mV gt 200 kHz Maximum allowable voltage Burst transmission 200 mV drop Current drawn at full TX power lt 500 mA average lt 2 A peak 1Measured at system connector pins 26 Note SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE The radio device has no internal capacitance to supply the large current peaks during GSM burst transmission We recommend you follow these general guidelines e Fit alow ESR electrolytic capacitor close to the radio device gt 1 00
328. r RD3 Not Connected Ground Not Connected to J502 Pin 8 CTS through a 0 Ohm Resistor R535 to J502 Pin 7 RTS through a 0 Ohm Resistor R535 and N502 Pin 17 through a 0 Ohm Resistor R536 Not Connected Table 8 RS 232 DB9 J502 Routing Hardware Flow Control Mechanism is provided via the signals CTS DTR and RTS Flow control is used for CSD applications LZT 123 7589 R2B 78 LZT 123 7589 R2B USING THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT To activate or deactivate the Flow Control mechanism switch S501 must be set as presented in Table 7 and Table 8 respectively Switch Position Function DM xx CM 4x GM 41 GM GR 47 48 Position 1 DTMS ON ON ON ON Position 2 CTS ON ON ON ON Position 3 DTR ON ON ON ON Position 4 DFMS ON ON ON ON Position 5 RTS ON ON ON ON Position 6 DSR ON ON ON ON Position 7 Module_Pwr_En_B ON ON ON WAKE OFF Table 9 S501 Settings to enable HW Flow Control Switch Function DM xx CM 4x GM 41 GM GR Position 47 48 Position 1 DTMS ON ON ON ON Position 2 CTS OFF OFF OFF OFF Position 3 DTR ON ON ON ON Position 4 DFMS ON ON ON ON Position 5 RTS OFF OFF OFF OFF Position 6 DSR ON ON ON ON Position 7 Module_Pwr_En_B ON ON ON WAKE OFF Table 10 S501 Settings to disable HW Flow Control If you intend to use the serial interface using the header connector JP 301 provided on the developer s board notice that appropriate CMOS voltage levels as defined by VDIG in 3 3 Power Interface shall
329. r RTS and CTS Parameter Limit Time from Low to High level lt 2 us Time from High to Low level lt 2 us Request to Send RTS RTS is an input to the module The signals on this circuit are used to condition the DCE the module when used for data transmission purposes for data transmission Default level is OFF by internal pull up The exact behaviour of RTS is defined by the AT IFC command Software or hardware flow control can be selected Hardware flow control is the default This is a Dig 2 75 CMOS Input and general characteristics are applicable It is the duty of the application to pull RTS low logic levels to request communications with the module The module will respond by asserting CTS low and as such may be used as a notification as a module status ready for communication LZT 123 8081 Ric 31 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Parameter Limit Application driving impedance lt 100 O Input capacitance lt 2nF Input resistance pull down 100 kQ to DGND LZT 123 8081 Ric 32 Note GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Clear To Send CTS CTS is an output from the module The signals on this circuit are used to indicate that the DCE the module when used for data transmission purposes is ready to transmit data Default level is high The exact behaviour of CTS is defined by the AT IFC command Software or hardware flow control can be selected This is a Dig 2 75 CMOS Outp
330. rameter will decide if BUSY or NO CARRIER will be returned 25 LZT 123 7590 bit 2 CALL CONTROL 2 10 AT CHUPHang up Call Description Command Possible Responses Request hang up AT CHUP OK ERROR Show if the commands is AT CHUP OK supported ERROR Description 2 11 AT CMOD Causes the TA to hang up the current call of the ME If no call is present but an incoming call is notified then the incoming call shall be rejected Call Mode Description Command Possible Responses Request Call Mode AT CMOD lt mode gt OK ERROR Show the current setting AT CMOD CMOD lt mode gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CMOD e CMOD list of supported supported lt mode gt s OK ERROR Description LZT 123 7590 R1F Selects the call mode of further dialing commands D or for next answering command A Mode can be either single or alternating In this ETS terms alternating mode and alternating call refer to all GSM bearer and teleservices that incorporate more than one basic service voice data fax within one Call When single mode is selected the call originating and hang up procedures are similar to procedures specified in ITU T Recommendations V 25ter T 31 and T 32 In GSM there can be voice followed by data refer to GSM 02 02 alternating voice data refer to GSM 02 02 and alternating voice fax calls refer to GSM 02 03 Test command returns values
331. re The manual is composed of three parts Part 1 Overview This section provides a broad overview of the GR47 GR48 family and includes a list of abbreviations used in the manual Part 2 Integrating the Radio Device This section describes each of the signals available on the GR47 GR48 radio devices along with mechanical information The section also provides you with design guidelines and explains what is needed to commercialise an application from a regulatory point of view Part 3 Developer s Kit This section lists the contents of the Developer s Kit and provides the information to setup and use the equipment LZT 123 7589 R2B GR47 GR48 RADIO DEVICES 2 GR47 GR48 Radio Devices 2 1 About the GR47 GR48 Family Note Two radio devices make up the family GR47 and GR48 for use in the E GSM900 GSM1800 and GSM850 GSM1900 bands respectively This manual refers to the GR47 and GR48 as radio devices If there is a difference in the functionality of the radio devices the GR47 and GR48 information will be listed separately The products belong to a new generation of Sony Ericsson radio devices and are intended to be used in machine to machine applications and man to machine applications They are used when there is a need to send and receive data by SMS CSD HSCSD or GPRS and make voice calls over the GSM network The radio devices can either have applications embedded onto them or they can be used as the en
332. re Reset in 8 X606_1 Connection to Header X606 Pin 1 9 10_1 General Purpose Binary Input Output 1 10 10_2 General Purpose Binary Input Output 2 11 10_3 General Purpose Binary Input Output 3 12 IO A General Purpose Binary Input Output 4 13 VIO Input Output Voltage Reference 14 DGND Chassis Ground 15 10_5 General Purpose Binary Input Output 5 80 LZT 123 7589 R2B USING THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 ADC1 ADC2 ADC3 DAC DGND IO_6 TX_ON SDA SCL DGND x606_2 DFMS DTMS_C RTS_M CTS_M DSR_M RI_M DCD_SW DTR_M CTMS CFMS TD3 RD3 x606_3 X606_4 Output for A D Converter 1 Output for A D Converter 2 Output for A D Converter 3 Input for D A Converter Chassis Ground General Purpose Binary Input Output 6 Transmit on CC bus data line CC bus clock line Chassis Ground Connection to Header X606 Pin 2 Data from Mobile Station Data to Mobile Station Request to Send Clear to Send Data Set Ready Ring Indicator Data Carrier Detect Data Terminal Ready Secondary Data to Mobile Station Secondary Data from Mobile Station Transmit Data Receive Data Connection to Header X606 Pin 3 Connection to Header X606 Pin 4 Table 13 Pin out of 40 Pin Application Port X600 81 USING THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT 14 5 RF Interface A MMCxX connector J402 is provided on the Developer
333. rence expressed in quarters of an hour between the local time and GMT range 47 48 e g 6th of May 1994 22 10 00 GMT 2 hours reads 94 05 06 22 10 00 08 NOTE If the ME does not support time zone information then the three last characters of lt time gt are not returned by CCLK Example AT CCLK CCLK 00 01 01 22 54 48 00 OK AT CCLK 19 1 1 02 09 30 00 00 OK 3 21 AT CEER Extended Error Report Description Command Possible Responses Request an Extended AT CEER CEER lt report gt Error Report OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CEER OK supported ERROR Description Causes the TA to return one or more lines of information text lt report gt Typically the text will consist of a single line containing the failure information given by the GSM network in text format lt report gt Description characters The total number of characters including line terminators in the information text shall not exceed 2041 characters Text shall not contain the sequence 0 lt CR gt or OK lt CR gt 49 LZT 123 7590 bit 3 CONTROL AND STATUS 3 22 AT CFUN Set ME Functionality Description Command Possible Responses Set MS functionality AT CFUN lt fun gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK Show the current AT CFUN CFUN lt fun gt setting CME ERROR lt err gt Show if the command AT CFUN e CFUN list of is supported supported lt fun gt s e CME ERROR
334. replace the old PIN in the SIM Commands which interact with the ME that are accepted when the ME has a pending request for SIM PIN SIM PUK or PH SIM are CGMI CGMM CGMR CGSN CFUN CMEE CPIN L and M lt pin gt lt newpin gt Description string The range for the SIM PIN and the PH SIM PIN is 4 8 digits The SIM PUK consists of 8 digits lt code gt Description READY ME is not pending for any password SIM PIN ME is waiting SIM PIN to be given 57 LZT 123 7590 R1F 3 CONTROL AND STATUS SIM PUK ME is waiting SIM PUK to be given PH SIM PIN ME is waiting PHone to SIM card password to be given SIM PIN2 ME is waiting SIM PIN2 to be given This lt code gt is recommended to be returned only when the last executed command resulted in PIN2 authentication failure i e CME ERROR 17 if PIN2 is not entered correctly after the failure it is recommended that ME does not block its operation SIM PUK2 ME is waiting SIM PUK2 to be given This lt code gt is recommended to be returned only when the last executed command resulted in PUK2 authentication failure i e CME ERROR 18 if PUK2 and new PIN2 are not entered correctly after the failure it is recommended that ME does not block its operation BLOCKED The SIM cards is blocked for the user lt err gt Description 0 ME failure 5 PH SIM PIN required 10 SIM not inserted 11 SIM PIN required 12 SIM PUK required 13 SIM failure 14 SIM b
335. rn gt s ECIND 5 lt ind_no gt lt vn gt Description This command enables disables the unsolicited reporting of individual indicators The command also returns the current status of all or selected indicators An operating code has been assigned and hard coded 1 4 in the table above for each possible kind of operation using this command The same operating code is returned as the first parameter in the solicited and unsolicited responses Unsolicited reports for all indicators are default off The settings are persistent and will remain after a power cycle Ordinal number and Description lt ind_no gt 1 Signal strength indicator 0 5 2 Service indicator 3 SMS message waiting to be read 4 Call in progress indicator 5 SMS memory full 6 Roaming indicator 7 Voice message waiting line 1 8 Voice message waiting line 2 9 Fax message waiting line 1 10 Fax message waiting line 2 11 Email message waiting line 1 12 Email message waiting line 2 13 20 Reserved Parameter Description lt rn gt n 1 20 Indicator reporting state 0 no report 1 report 38 3 CONTROL AND STATUS lt vn gt n 1 20 lt on off gt Value for each indicator For signal strength values are 0 5 others O inactive 1 active O no report 1 report 3 13 AT ECLCC List Current Calls LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Set unsoliciting reporting on off
336. rofile The modification configuration manipulation and storage of audio profiles is achieved with the AT E2EAMS Audio Profile Modification and AT E2APR Audio Profile To Mobile Station ATMS ATMS is the analogue audio input to the radio device Internally the signal is sent to the CODEC COder DECoder where it is converted to digital audio in PCM Pulse Code Modulation format The encoded audio is sent to PCMOUT via the internal PCM bus ATMS provides a DC bias when it is used as the microphone input in Portable Handsfree applications All other sources must be a c coupled to avoid attenuation of low frequencies and to prevent incorrect biasing or damage to the ATMS input Use a capacitor greater than the value shown in the table below The ATMS input is a passive network followed by the transmit part of the CODEC Parameter Limit Application driving impedance 0 3 3 5 kHz lt 3000 AC coupling capacitance gt 1 uF Radio device input impedance 0 3 3 5 kHz gt 50 kQ Low frequency cut off 3 dB 300 Hz 50 Hz High frequency cut off 3 dB gt 3500 Hz 50 Hz Output d c bias level car kit mode DV 31 SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE Additional Gain in car kit mode 28 5 dB The following tables show the nominal PGA programming gain settings For more information see the relevant AT commands Maximum input voltage limit 245 MV ims Input Input MVims TXAGC dB AUX AMP PCMOUT d
337. ropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code and before the timeout expires If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires an ERROR response is generated Test command returns the list of supported lt answer gt Values follow GSM 11 14 standard lt answer gt Description 0 OK Performed as required the text was displayed and cleared as requested It corresponds to 00 Command performed successfully described in the GSM standard 1 Failed User Terminated Session the text was displayed as requested and the user wants to end the proactive session It corresponds to 10 Proactive session terminated by the user described in the GSM standard 2 Failed User requests backwards move the text was displayed as requested and the user wants to go backwards in the session It corresponds to 11 Backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user 3 Failed No response from user the text was displayed and although the clear condition was Wait for user to clear the user did not react It corresponds to 12 no response from user 4 Failed Screen is busy the text could not be displayed Unsolicited Result Codes LZT 123 7590 R1F 235 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT E2STKD lt priority gt lt clear_condition gt lt coding gt lt text_length gt lt text gt Values follow GSM 11 14 standard lt priority gt Description 0 1 Display normal pri
338. rr gt see sections 1 3 3 AT Response Syntax and 1 4 Error Codes are not listed under Possible Responses for each AT command e OK and ERROR are listed if these are the only possible responses 1 3 2 AT Command Syntax The AT standard is a line oriented command language Each command is made up of the following three elements e the prefix e the body e the termination character LZT 123 7590 R1F 2 CALL CONTROL The prefix consists of the letters AT which are derived from the first two letters of the word attention The body is made up of the command the parameter and if applicable the associated values Commands may be combined in the same command line Spaces between the individual bodies are ignored Basic Syntax Command The format of basic syntax commands is as follows AT lt command gt lt parameter gt lt CR gt Example ATL 0 lt CR gt sets the volume of the speaker Additional commands may follow a command on the same command line without any character being required for separation For the command D parameters see the description for the command in question A version of the basic syntax is AT lt command gt lt parameter gt Extended Syntax Command e AT lt command gt lt parameter gt e AT lt command gt lt parameter gt Example AT CFUN 0 lt CR gt powers down the module If several values are included in the command they are separated by commas It is also possible
339. rs and Connectors 76 LZT 123 7589 R2B USING THE UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER S KIT Operation Mode Settings Switch Position S501 Function ON OFF Position 1 DTMS ON Position 2 CTS ON Position 3 DTR ON Position 4 DFMS ON Position 5 RTS ON Position 6 DSR ON Position 7 WAKE ON Table 5 Baseline Dip Settings for Gx 47 48 14 2 Operation Mode Serial communication between the target module and the RS 232 level shifters is easily enabled disabled via dip switches S501 This allows testing of flow control HW or None This feature also allows the connection of your application s serial interface to the module while providing other connections such as power through the developer s board Switch Signal ON OFF Position 1 DTMS Normal Operation If External application is directly connected to System Connector Header Position 2 CTS HW Flow Control enable If External application is directly connected to System Connector Header Position 3 DTR Normal Operation If External application is directly connected to System Connector Header Position A DFMS Normal Operation If External application is directly connected to System Connector Header Position 5 RTS HW Flow Control enable If External application is directly connected to System Connector Header Position 6 DSR Normal Operation If External application is directly connected to System Connector Header Position 7 WAKE Signal is grounded Signal is floating Logic Hi
340. ry in your application and must be connected to the VRTC pin During RTC normal operation the back up source will be charged In back up mode the back up source must provide enough power for RTC operation Refer to the table for the amount of current required The following table shows voltage characteristics for both modes Parameter Min Typ Max Units Supply Voltage RTC normal mode 1 6 1 8 2 0 V charging the capacitor Supply Voltage RTC back up mode 1 0 1 8 2 0 V Capacitor provides the current Current drawn 5 0 10 0 yA If the voltage drops below 1 0 V in back up mode the RTC will stop working The following diagram shows the RTC connections VRTC Backup supply GR47 DGND Figure 5 13 RTC connections 52 ANTENNA CONNECTOR 6 Antenna Connector LZT 123 7589 R2B The radio device s antenna connector allows transmission of the radio frequency RF signals from the radio device to an external customer supplied antenna The connector is a micro miniature coaxial MMCX surface mounted component A number of suitable MMCX type mating plugs are available from the following manufacturers e Amphenol e Suhner e IMS Connector Systems The nominal impedance of the antenna interface is 500 53 KEYBOARD INTERFACE 7 Keyboard Interface To increase I O capabilities the radio device optimises the I O by multiplexing or sharing different features on single pins The I
341. s at a rate of 9 6 kbit s in standard AT mode or binary mode First received data AT or binary will determine the operation mode The GSM 07 10 multiplexing protocol is supported and is started on command in this case bit rates up to 460 kbit s are supported Serial Data From Module RD RD is an output used to send data on the UART 1 to the application system This is a Dig 2 75 CMOS Output and general characteristics are applicable Parameter Limit Application load resistance lt 100 KQ Application load capacitance lt 500 pF Serial Data To Module TD TD is input to the module used by the application system to send data on the UART 1 to the module This is a Dig 2 75 CMOS Input and general characteristics are applicable LZT 123 8081 Ric 30 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Parameter Limit Application driving impedance lt 100 Q Input capacitance 1 nF Input resistance pull down 100 KQ to 2 75 V 3 10 3 Control Signals RTS CTS DTR DCD RI DSR The control signals are active low and hence when a standard interface IC is used such as MAX3237 then standard RS 232 levels are obtained These signals together with DGND RD and TD form a 9 pin RS 232 data port with the exception of the voltage levels RTS and CTS shall be capable of transmitting at 1 10 of the data transmission speed for data rates up to 460 kbit s Byte oriented flow control mechanism Switching times fo
342. s board and routed to a SMA connector J401 This allows a standard cellular antenna with SMA connector to be used if the module has a non SMA connector mounted on it An MMCX to MMCX RF Jumper is provided to connect from the module to J402 14 6 Audio Interface LZT 123 7589 R2B Analog audio is routed to from the Developer Kit in two ways and is controlled by switches S201 and S202 1 Viaa2 5mm stereo jack at J201 S201 set to Pre Amp and 202 is ONT Used with hands free set 2 Via ATMS and AFMS S201 set to Bypass and S202 is OFF 3 The Gx 47 48 platform does not require the external pre amp Set S201 to Bypass and S202 to OFF Analog audio is provided on pins 7 and 10 of the system connector header as presented below Pin Signal Description 7 AFMS Audio Output From Module referenced to AGND 10 ATMS Audio Input to Module referenced to AGND 9 AGND Analog Reference Digital audio is provided on pins 17 18 19 and 20 of the system connector header The application must ensure providing the correct levels on the PCM signals according to the Digital Audio section of the appropriate Integrator s Manual The PCM signals available in the system connector header are presented below Pin Signal Description 17 PCMCLK PCM Clock Output from module 18 PCMSYNC PCM Frame Sync Output from module 19 PCMULD PCM Voice Input to module 20 PCMDLD PCM Voice Output from module 82
343. s commands from TA TE Ringing ME is ready for commands from TA TE but the ringer is active Call in progress ME is ready for commands from TA TE but a call is in progress Not in call Mobile oriented call in progress This is a sub state to call in progress Mobile terminated call in progress This is a sub state to call in progress lt mode gt Description 1 Allows the CPAS to return Ericsson specific lt pas gt values such as 129 130 and 131 Example AT CPAS CPAS 0 3 4 129 130 131 OK AT CPAS CPAS 0 OK 56 3 CONTROL AND STATUS 3 29 AT CPIN PIN Control LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Request PIN Control AT CPIN lt pin gt lt newpi CME ERROR n gt lt err gt OK ERROR Show the current setting AT CPIN CPIN lt code gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CPIN CME ERROR supported serr gt e CPIN supported lt code gt s OK ERROR Description Note Sends the password to the ME which is necessary to make the ME operational SIM PIN SIM PUK or PH SIM If the PIN is to be entered twice the TA autonomously repeats the PIN If no PIN request is pending no action is taken towards the ME and an error message CME ERROR lt err gt is returned to the TE If the PIN required is PUK the second pin is required This second PIN lt newpin gt is used to
344. s optional when lt line gt is set to 0 lt name gt Description Integer Maximum number of characters to use in lt name gt string 20 LZT 123 7590 R1F 169 14 NETWORK 14 10 14 11 AT CIMI Subscriber Identification Description Command Possible Responses Read IMSI AT CIMI lt IMSI gt e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CIMI OK supported ERROR Causes the TA to return lt IMSI gt identifying the individual SIM attached to the ME lt IMSI gt Description string without International Mobile Subscriber Identity double quotes Example AT CIMI 23415741 1545420 OK AT CLCK Facility Lock Description Command Possible Responses Request facility lock AT CLCK lt fac gt when lt mode gt 2 and lt mode gt lt passwd gt command successful lt class gt CLCK lt status gt lt class1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CLCk lt status gt lt class2 gt e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command AT CLCK e CLCK list of supported is supported lt fac gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK Description The command is used to lock unlock or interrogate an ME ora network facility lt fac gt A password is normally needed to carry out such actions Call barring facilities are based on GSM supplementary services refer to GSM 02 88 The interaction of these with 170 LZT 123 7590 R1F LZT 123 7590 R1F 14
345. single line containing the name of the product but manufacturers may choose to provide more information if desired lt model type gt Description String type A unique ASCII character digit string always 10 characters long Spaces are used when the number of characters digits is less than 10 lt model name gt Description String type Model name for the transceiver unit for example GR47 Example AT CGMM 6100501 BVGR47 OK 11 7 AT CGMR Read MS Revision Identification Description Command Possible Responses Request MS revision AT CGMR lt revision gt identification string CME ERROR lt err gt Show if the command is AT CGMR OK supported ERROR This command causes the MS to return a string containing information about the software version 127 LZT 123 7590 bit 11 IDENTIFICATION lt revision gt Description String type An ASCII string containing date year month day hour minute plus KRC number Example R5B009 CXC 1122528 11 8 AT CGSNRead MS Product Serial Number Identification Description Command Possible Responses Request product serial AT CGSN e lt sn gt number CME ERROR lt err gt Show if the command is AT CGSN OK supported ERROR Description This command causes the MS to return the IMEI International Mobile station Equipment Identity which identifies the individual ME lt sn gt Description String The IMEISV which is
346. smission speed for data rates up to 460 kbit s byteoriented flow control mechanism Note When hardware flow control is not used in communications between the application and the radio device RTS and CTS must be connected to each other at the radio device Switching times for RTS and CTS The table below shows the switching times Parameter Limit Time from Low to High level lt 2us Time from High to Low level lt 2 US Request to Send RTS Used to condition the DCE for data transmission The default level is high by internal pull up The application must pull RTS low to enable data transmission from the radio device Similarly the radio device asserts CTS low indicating it is ready to receive data transmission from the host Parameter Limit Application driving impedance lt 100 40 LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE Input capacitance lt 2nF Input resistance pull up 100 kQ to DGND Clear To Send CTS CTS is asserted by the DCE to indicate that the host DTE may transmit data When CTS is high the host DTE is not permitted to transmit data The table below shows the load characteristics for this signal Parameter Limit Application load capacitance lt 500 pF Application load resistance gt 1MoO Data Terminal Ready DTR DTR indicates that the DTE is ready to receive data It also acts as a hardware hang up terminating calls when switched high The sign
347. st if the command is AT E20TR E2OTR list of supported supported lt n gt s e OK ERROR Unsolicited response E2OTR lt stat gt Description LZT 123 7590 R1E The AT E2OTR command enables or disables Operational Temperature unsolicited reports When reporting is enabled the unsolicited response E2OTR is sent every time the module gets in and out of operational temperature range The unsolicited response reports the current operational temperature status in or out of range as defined in the table below If the reporting is enabled a report will always be sent at start up even if there has not been a change A transition from 40C to 41C or from 85C to 86C will cause an unsolicited report with an out of range indication if the module was in range A transition from 40C to 39C or from 85 to 84C will cause an unsolicited report with an in range indication if the module was out of range The report setting is persistent and will remain after a power cycle 284 LZT 123 7590 R1F 21 ENVIRONMENTAL Table 1 lt n gt parameter lt n gt Description 0 Disable Operational Temperature Reporting 1 Enable Operational Temperature Reporting Table 2 lt stat gt parameter lt stat gt Description 0 Out of range 1 In range Table 3 lt temp gt parameter lt temp gt Description 50 to 100 Integer Temperature in degree Celcius 285 Appendix A 22 Alph
348. steiataltiecla pie Meine Clie bie eet ied esti tase 69 13 2 Assembling the Developer s Board 70 13 3 DEENEN 71 13 4 Assembly inStructiOnS nccn60c cee hee hoe hone hoe ee ee 71 13 5 E ue 72 13 6 GX 47 48 Family Connection cc eeecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaaees 72 14 Using the Universal Developer s Kit ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneees 74 14 1 GX 47 49 SOLU EE 74 14 2 Operation Englebert nama eae ee 77 NEE 78 14 4 Engine Application Port 40 Pin Connector ADOU 80 14 5 RF JEE ereecht 82 146 Audio rte e 82 5 LZT 123 7589 R2B 14 7 Keypad Connector GA10 enea 83 14 8 Flashing IT VANS oo oss 2 2 tt tists tenet tsa teeth paened oenetah eae etutoale 83 14 9 GEET et 84 Let e COMICON EE 84 14 11 Power DO WI EE 84 6 LZT 123 7589 R2B 1 Introduction 1 1 Target Users The GR47 and GR48 radio devices are designed to be integrated into machine to machine or man to machine communications applications They are intended to be used by manufacturers system integrators applications developers and developers of wireless communications equipment 1 2 Prerequisites It is assumed that the person integrating the radio device into an application has a basic understanding of the following GSM networking Wireless communication and antennas aerials AT commands ITU T standard V 24 V 28 Micro controllers and programming Electronic hardware design 1 3 Manual Structu
349. stem that maintains the radio link between the network and the radio device Since the antenna transmits and receives electromagnetic energy its efficient function will depend on e the type of antenna for example circular or directional e the placement of the antenna e communication disturbances in the vicinity in which the antenna operates In the sections below issues concerning antenna type antenna placement antenna cable and possible communication disturbances are addressed In any event you should contact your local antenna manufacturer for additional information concerning antenna type cables connectors antenna placement and the surrounding area You should also determine whether the antenna needs to be grounded or not Your local antenna manufacturer might be able to design a special antenna suitable for your the application 8 3 2 Antenna Type Make sure that you choose the right type of antenna for the radio device Consider the following requirements e the antenna must be designed for the dual frequency bands in use 60 LZT 123 7589 R2B HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE RADIO DEVICE E GSM900 GSM1800 for the GR47 and GSM 850 GSM1900 for the GR48 e the impedance of the antenna and antenna cable must be 500 e the antenna output power handling must be a minimum of QW e the VSWR value should be less than 3 1 to avoid damage to the radio device 8 3 3 Antenna Placement The antenna should be placed
350. store SIM dependent Phone book capacity 100 DAC Parameter Value Units Resolution 8 bit Output voltage swing for Code 00pEx 0 138 0 1 V Output voltage swing for Code FFrex 2 61 0 2 V LZT 123 8081 Ric 53 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Nominal Step Size 9 668 0 1 mV Linear Code Range 8 247 8H F7H LSB Absolute Error during Linear Range 100 mV Conversion Speed lt 100 us ADC Parameter Value Units Resolution 8 bit Input voltage for Code 004 0 01 0 01 V Input voltage for Code FFy 2 75 0 1 V Nominal Step Size 10 742 mV Accuracy 3 LSB Input Impedance gt 1 MQ Conversion Time to within 0 5bit lt 100 us LZT 123 8081 Ric 54 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 9 Contact details To contact customer support please use the details below Customer Support Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications UK Ltd M2MCom 1 Lakeside Road Systems Union House Aerospace Park Farnborough Hampshire UK GU14 6XP E mail M2Msupport EMEA APAC sonyericsson com M2Msupport Americas sonyericsson com M2Minfo sonyericsson com LZT 123 8081 Ric 55 GR47 GR48 Integrator s Manual Q Sony Ericsson CE The GR47 described in this manual conforms to the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment R amp TTE directive 99 5 EC with requirements covering EMC directive 89 336 EEC and Low Voltage directive 73 23 EEC The product fulfils the requirements according to 3GPP TS 51 010 1 EN 301 489 7 and EN6
351. supported lt mode gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR lt mode gt Description 0 Answer mode is not set to Any key or Auto off 1 Any Key mode on 2 Auto mode on 4 11 ATM Monitor Speaker Control Description Command Possible Responses 76 LZT 123 7590 bit 4 AUDIO Set monitor speaker control Show the current setting Show if the command is supported ATM lt speaker gt ATM ATM OK ERROR M lt speaker gt M list of supported lt speaker gt s Description Define the activity of the speaker This command is ignored by the modem and is only included for compatibility lt speaker gt Description 0 Off during the entire call Default value 1 3 Different on modes 4 12 AT ERIL Ericsson Ring Level Set LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Sets ring volume for the ring signals used for incoming voice L1 and L2 fax and data calls AT ERIL lt volume gt lt c all type gt lt place gt AT ERIL e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR e ERIL Show the current setting lt volume1 gt lt call type1 gt lt place1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt ERIL lt volume n gt lt call type n gt lt place n gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT ERIL supported ERIL list of supported lt volume gt s list of supported lt call type g
352. supported lt onoff gt s e CME ERROR lt err gt OK 45 3 CONTROL AND STATUS ERROR Description The command requests the MS to report when the PIN code has been inserted and accepted lt onoff gt Description 0 Request for report on inserted PIN code is not activated off Default value 1 Request for report on inserted PIN code is activated on 3 18 AT CALA Set Alarm Description Command Possible Responses Set an alarm time in the ME Show the current setting Show if the command is supported AT CALA lt time gt lt n gt lt type gt lt text gt L lt recurr gt lt silent gt AT CALA AT CALA CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR CALA lt time1 gt lt n1 gt lt type1 gt lt tex t1 gt lt recurr1 gt lt silent1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CALA lt time2 gt lt n2 gt lt type2 gt lt tex t2 gt lt recurr2 gt lt silent2 gt J CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR CALA list of supported lt n gt s list of supported type gt s lt tlength gt lt rlength gt list of supported lt silent gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description The command sets an alarm time in the ME An array of different alarms can be set and each may be recurrent If alarm setting fails ERROR lt err gt is returned When the alarm is timed out and executed the unsolicited result code CALV lt n gt
353. supported by the TA as a compound value 26 2 CALL CONTROL Note CMOD is set to zero after a successfully completed alternating mode call It is set to zero also after a failed answering The power up factory amp F and user resets Z also set the value to zero This reduces the possibility that alternating mode calls are originated or answered accidentally lt mode gt Description 0 Single mode Default value In order to avoid accidental originating or answering of alternating calls is lt mode gt set to single mode in following cases after a successfully completed alternating mode call after a unsuccessful answering after successfully execution of the commands amp F and Z 2 12 AT CVHU Voice Hang Up Description Command Possible Responses Set Command CVHU lt mode gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK Show the current setting CVHU CVHU lt mode gt Show if the command is supported CME ERROR lt err gt CVHU CVHU list of supported lt mode gt s Description Selects whether ATH or drop DTR causes a voice connection to be disconnected or not Voice connection also includes alternating mode calls that are currently in voice mode Note When lt mode gt 2 this command must be viewed in conjunction with the V 25ter command amp D or amp D will be ignored lt mode gt Description 0 Drop DTR ignored but OK response given ATH disconnects 1
354. t AT E210 ERROR OK E210 lt op gt lt io gt lt val gt lt adc_val gt OK E2I0 list of supported lt lO gt s list of supported lt ip gt s list of supported lt op gt s list of supported lt adc gt s list of supported lt dac gt list of supported lt val gt s list of supported lt adc_val gt s ERROR Description The module has the following digital I Os nine configurable GPIOs four input only and four output only The module also has five ADCs and one DAC All of these signals are controlled by the AT E2IO command dependent on whether they are available not used by UART1 or UART3 or switched in at the time see notes below A list of available IO and the default usage is shown below lt O gt Description 101 Pin 21 default muxed with 12 102 Pin 22 default muxed with ADC5 103 Pin 23 default muxed with 13 also used as UART3 CTS 104 Pin 24 default muxed with 14 also used as UART3 RTS 105 Pin 13 default muxed with ADC4 106 Pin 33 LED as default 107 Pin 43 default muxed with UART3 Tx when UART3 is opened 107 is disabled 108 Pin 44 default muxed with UART3 Rx when UARTS is opened 108 is disabled 132 LZT 123 7590 R1F Note 12 INPUT OUTPUT 109 Pin 45 UART1 RTS as default 11 Pin 37 UART1 DTR as default 12 Pin 21 muxed with 101 13 Pin 23 muxed with 103 14 Pin 24 muxed with 104 01 Pin
355. t lt pid gt and lt dcs gt nor lt length gt lt toda gt or lt tooa gt in CMT CMGL CMGR result codes for SMS DELIVERs and SMS SUBMITs in text mode for SMS COMMANDs in CMGR result code do not show lt pid gt lt mn gt lt da gt lt toda gt lt length gt or lt cdata gt Show the values in result codes AT CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters Only Applicable to Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Set the text mode parameters Show the current setting Show if the command is AT CSMP lt fo gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK L lt vp gt lt pid gt lt des gt gt ERROR AT CSMP CSMP lt fo gt lt vp gt lt pid gt lt dcs gt CME ERROR lt err gt AT CSMP e CSMP List of supported lt fo gt s list of supported lt vp gt s list of supported lt pid gt s list of 227 16 15 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT supported supported lt dcs gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK e ERROR Description Used to select values for additional parameters needed when SM is sent to the network or placed in a storage when text format message mode is selected It is possible to set the validity period starting from when the SM is received by the SMSC lt vp gt is in range 0 255 The lt pid gt parameter identifies the higher protocol being used or indicates interworking with a certain type of telematic service
356. t D O RN1107 1OOAA RN1107 Figure 7 1 Keyboard matrix connections Note This matrix pattern may be repeated up to 5 columns and 4 rows one column will use a ground connection as a virtual column driver Examples of suitable transistors are Brand Part Number Toshiba RN1107 as shown On SEMI DTC114YET1 Philips PDTC114YE ROHM DTC114YETL 55 LZT 123 7589 R2B HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE RADIO DEVICE 8 Hints for Integrating the Radio Device This chapter gives you advice and helpful hints on how to integrate the radio device into your application from a hardware perspective Please read and consider the information under the following headings before starting your integration work e Safety advice and precautions e Installation of the radio device e Antenna 8 1 Safety Advice and Precautions 8 1 1 General e Always ensure that use of the radio device is permitted The radio device may present a hazard if used in proximity to personal medical electronic devices As a rule the radio device must not be used in hospitals airports or planes e You are responsible for observing your country s safety standards and where applicable the relevant wiring rules e Never use the radio device at a gas station refuelling point blasting area or in any other environment where explosives may be present e Operating the radio device close to other electronic devices such as antennas televisi
357. t lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt ci gt lt bsic gt lt ch gt lt rxl gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt CR gt lt LF gt OK ERROR Show if the AT E2NBTS E2NBTS list of command is supported lt ch gt s supported ERROR Description The set command shall provide with the ARFCNs lt ch gt and the BSIC the BSIC is a cell colour code to the MS in order to monitor those channels belonging to the neighbour cells instead of the ones that come through the air interface in the serving cell information broadcast channel It is possible to update that information with up to 16 neighbour cells If less than 16 lt ch gt s are provided then the assigned 180 14 NETWORK channels shall substitute the last previous channel given either by the BCCH or by another AT E2NBTS commana if it is not in the list yet Therefore lt ch1 gt lt bsic1 gt will substitute BTS 16 in the MS lt ch2 gt lt bsic2 gt to the BTS 15 and so on If any of the lt ch gt s is already in the top list then it is skipped The read command displays the data of every neighbour cell including the following parameters MCC MNC Cell ID BSIC Channel and Rx Level lt ch gt Description 0 1023 It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF Channel which identifies a BCCH
358. t and Text Modes Description Command Possible Responses Set preferred message storage Show the current setting Show if the command is supported AT CPMS lt mem1 gt L lt mem2 gt lt mem3 gt AT CPMS AT CPMS CPMS lt used1 gt lt total1 gt lt used2 gt lt to tal2 gt lt used3 gt lt total3 gt CMS ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR CPMS lt mem1 gt lt used1 gt lt total1 lt mem2 gt lt used2 gt lt total2 lt mem3 gt lt used3 gt lt total3 gt CMS ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR e CPMS list of supported lt mem1 gt s list of supported lt mem2 gt s list of supported lt mem3 gt s OK ERROR Description Selects memory storage lt mem1 gt lt mem2 gt and lt mem3 gt to be used for reading writing etc If chosen storage is not appropriate for the ME but is supported by the TA final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned Test command returns lists of memory storage supported by the TA lt mem1 gt Description string type Memory from which messages are read and deleted commands List Messages CMGL Read Message CMGR and Delete Message CMGD ME ME message storage 198 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT SM SIM message storage Default value lt mem2 gt Description string type Memory to which writing and sending operations are made commands Send Message from Storage
359. t 1 32 DSR O Data Set Ready UART 107 KeyCOL3 O Key column 3 03 O General purpose output 3 38 DCD O Data Carrier Detect UART1 109 KeyCOL 1 O Key column 1 01 O General purpose output 1 36 RI O Ring Indicator UART1 125 KeyCOL 2 O Key Column 2 02 O General output 2 45 TD2 l Transmitted Data UART2 46 RD2 O Received Data UART2 43 TD3 l Transmitted Data UART3 44 RD3 O Received Data UART3 The serial channels consisting of three UARTs are asynchronous communication links to the application or accessory units LZT 123 7589 R2B 38 Note SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE e UART1 has RS 232 functionality and is used for all on and off line communication e UART2 behaves as a general purpose serial data link For example it can be used for GPS downloading software and receiving logging information e UARTS3 behaves as a general purpose serial data link It is the only UART that can be used by the embedded application Digital 2 75V CMOS input output electrical characteristics apply The standard character format consists of 1 start bit 8 bit data no parity and 1 stop bit In all there are 10 bits per character 5 9 1 UART1 RS232 RD TD RTS CTS DTR DSR DCD and RI Note UART1 signals conform to a 9 pin RS232 V 24 serial port UART1 signal levels do not match standard RS232 V 28 levels The relationship between the levels is shown in the table below RS232 level RD TD RTS CTS DTR D
360. t Codes ECPV Ciphering Indicator SYNTAX Unsolicited Result code Description Response When Set command informs ECPV lt ciphering gt When AT ECPI enables it the the TE whena ECPV lt ciphering gt is sent communication is during a connection whenever unsecured due to the the communication is not fact that the network is enciphered If a connection not enciphering the becomes secure after that communication the ECPV lt ciphering gt is sent again to indicate that 179 14 19 LZT 123 7590 R1F 14 NETWORK now the communication is enciphered lt ciphering gt Description 0 The connection is secured The network enciphers the communication 1 The connection is unsecured The network does not encipher the communication AT E2NBTS Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS Description Command Possible Responses Set Neighbour AT E2NBTS lt ch1 gt lt bsic1 gt lt ch2 ERROR Cells to gt lt bsic2 gt lt ch3 gt lt bsic3 gt lt ch4 gt lt OK monitor bsic4 gt lt ch5 gt lt bsic5 gt lt ch6 gt lt bsi c6 gt lt ch7 gt lt bsic 7 gt lt ch8 gt lt bsic8 gt L lt ch9 gt lt bsic9 gt lt ch10 gt lt bsic10 gt lt ch11 gt lt bsic11 gt lt ch12 gt lt bsic12 gt L lt ch13 gt lt bsic13 gt lt ch14 gt lt bsic14 gt lt ch15 gt lt bsic15 gt lt ch16 gt lt bsic1 6 gt JIM Show the AT E2NBTS E2NBTS current setting lt mcc gt lt mnc gt lt ci g
361. t gt long alphanumeric lt oper gt short alphanumeric lt oper gt numeric lt oper gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description Forces an attempt to select and register the GSM network operator lt mode gt Description 0 Automatic lt oper gt field is ignored 1 Manual lt oper gt field present 3 Set only lt format gt for read command COPS do not attempt registration de registration lt oper gt field is ignored this value is not applicable in read command response 175 LZT 123 7590 bit Example AT COPS 14 16 AT CPOL LZT 123 7590 R1F 14 NETWORK 4 Manual automatic lt oper gt field present if manual selection fails automatic mode lt mode gt 0 is entered lt format gt Description 0 Automatic lt oper gt field is ignored 2 Numeric lt oper gt lt oper gt Description string type Format determined by the lt format gt setting lt stat gt Description 0 Unknown 1 Available 2 Current 3 Forbidden COPS 2 UK VODAFONE UK Vodafone 23415 COPS 3 UK Orange PCS Ltd Orange 23433 COPS 3 T Mobile UK T Mobile UK 23430 COPS 3 02 UK O2 UK 23410 OK Preferred Operator List Description Request operator selection CPOL lt index gt Shows the current setting Show if the command is supported Command Possible Respons
362. t is 129 lt index gt Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory LZT 123 7590 R1F 203 16 6 AT CMGS LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT Send Message PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses Send message AT CMGS lt length gt CMGS lt CR gt lt mr gt lt ackpdu gt PDU is given lt ctrl CMS ERROR lt err gt ZIESC gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CMGS OK supported ERROR Description Sends a message from a TE to the network SMS SUBMIT Message reference value lt mr gt is returned to the TE on successful message delivery Optionally when AT CSMS lt service gt value is 1 and there is network support lt ackpdu gt is returned Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code If sending fails in a network or an ME error final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned This command is abortable lt length gt must indicate the number of octets coded in the TP layer data unit to be given i e SMSC address octets are excluded The TA shall send a four character sequence lt CR gt lt LF gt lt greater_than gt lt space gt IRA 13 10 62 32 after command line is terminated with lt CR gt after that PDU can be given from TE to ME TA The DCD signal is in the ON state as PDU is given The echoing of given characters
363. t s L list of supported lt place gt s CME ERROR lt err gt e OK ERROR Description Used to set the volume for the ring signals used for incoming voice Line 1 Line 2 fax and data calls The parameter lt place gt controls the ring level set for different types of modes The signal volume is specified as step with an increasing volume for each signal or as a selected level Line 1 is the default for lt call type gt if the parameter is not given 77 4 AUDIO lt volume gt Description 0 Off 1 6 Volume setting not increasing ring 129 134 Volume setting increasing ring lt calltype gt Description 1 Line 1 2 Line 2 3 Fax 4 Data 5 Alarm Not supported lt place gt Description 0 Hand held 1 Car mounted 4 13 AT ERIN Ericsson Ring Set Description Command Possible Responses Sets ring type for AT ERIN CME ERROR lt err gt incoming voice L1 and lt sound type gt OK L2 fax and data calls lt call type gt ERROR and alarm Show the current setting AT ERIN ERIN lt sound type1 gt lt call type1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt ERIN lt sound type n gt lt call type n gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT ERIN ERIN list of supported supported lt sound type gt s list of supported lt call type gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR LZT 123 7590 R1F 78 LZT 123 7590 R1F
364. tSync gt s ERROR Description This command allows the user to send data via an SPI bus The SPI bus is made up from the IO pins 101 Clock 102 Data In 1O3 Data Out and O2 RI Sync optional The bus works with the GR47 being the SPI master The clock is generated by the GR47 and on each clock cycle data is both transmitted on the Data Out pin and received on the Data in pin The Sync pin optional can be used as a chipselect pin for latching the data after a number of bytes have been sent The 153 LZT 123 7590 R1F 13 INTERFACE initial state of the Sync pin can be set so it is toggled from that state Once the SPI bus is enabled the lOs that are used can not be used for any other purpose until the SPI is disabled This means the AT E2IO command cannot modify these pins and if the Sync pin is activated RI will not be output Three operations can be made on the SPI bus SPI Enable lt op gt 255 This command is entered to set up the SPI bus and to enable the relevant signals The byte format is defined here the number of bytes output between toggling the Sync pin high and low The Initial state of the Sync pin is also defined If the byte format is set to zero 0 then the Sync pin is not used and is not controlled by the SPI Example AT E2SPI 255 2 1 lt CR gt OK This command sets the SPI bus active and the Sync pin is made toggle every 2 bytes of output data The initial state of the S
365. tatus 1 Audio hand over Accessory hands over control of both the audio lines and the call to the ME 2 Audio demand Accessory demands control of both the audio lines and the call lt resp gt Description 0 Disable ATMS and AFMS 1 Enable ATMS and disable AFMS 2 Disable ATMS and enable AFMS 71 4 AUDIO 3 Enable ATMS and AFMS 4 4 AT EAMS Ericsson Audio Mode Selection LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Sets the audio AT EAMS lt internal_voice_alg mode for the gt lt noise_reduction gt application L lt side tone gt L lt short_echo_canceling gt L lt ATMS_gain gt L lt class gt L lt ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_ from_class gt L lt AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_ from class Show the AT EAMS current setting Show if the AT EAMS command is supported e OK ERROR EAMS lt internal_voice_alg gt lt noise_reduction gt lt side_tone gt lt short_echo_canceling gt lt AFMS_gain gt lt class gt lt AT MS_sensitivity_deviation_fro m_class gt lt AFMS_sensitivit y_deviation_from_class gt EAMS list of supported lt internal_voice_alg gt s lt noise_reduction gt s lt side_tone gt s lt short_echo_canceling gt s lt AFMS_gain gt s gt lt class gt s lt ATMS_sensitivity_deviatio n_from_class gt s lt AFMS_sensitivity_deviatio n_from_class gt s Included for compatibility Description No functionality lt internal_voice_alg
366. ted user clearing 27 Destination out of order 28 Invalid number format incomplete number 29 Facility rejected 30 Response to STATUS ENQUIRY 31 Normal unspecified 34 No circuit channel available 38 Network out of order 41 Temporary failure 42 Switching equipment congestion 43 Access information discarded 44 requested circuit channel not available 47 Resources unavailable unspecified 49 Quality of service unavailable 50 Requested facility not subscribed 55 Incoming calls barred within the CUG 57 Bearer capability not authorized 58 Bearer capability not presently available 63 Service or option not available unspecified 65 Bearer service not implemented 68 ACM equal to or greater than ACMmax 69 Requested Facility not yet implemented 70 Only Restricted Digital information bearer capability is 41 LZT 123 7590 R1F 3 CONTROL AND STATUS 79 81 87 88 91 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 111 127 150 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 226 227 228 229 230 available Service or option not implemented unspecified Invalid Transaction Identifier value User not member of CUG Incompatible Destination Invalid transit network selection Semantically incorrect message Invalid mandatory information Message type non existent or not implemented Message type not compatible with protocol state Information element non existent or not imp
367. ternational Telecommunication Union Telecommunications Standardisation Sector Mobile Equipment Micro Minature Coax Mobile Originated Mobile Station Mobile Terminated Pulse Code Modulation Protocol Data Unit Radio Link Protocol Radio Frequency Reserved for Future Use Real Time Clock Service Discovery Protocol Short Message Service Subscriber Identity Module Transport Control Protocol To Be Defined User Datagram Protocol LZT 123 8081 Ric 10 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 2 Mechanical Description 2 1 Interface Description The picture below presents the conceptual mechanical design of the GR47 GR48 The GR47 GR48 are protected with AISI 304 Stainless Steel covers suitable to fulfill the environmental and EMC requirements Dimensions the position of the different connectors and mounting holes are shown in figure 2 2 Mounting Hole System Connector Figure 2 1 GR 47 48 view from the underside LZT 123 8081 Ric 11 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 2 2 Physical Dimensions 50 00 33 00 30 20 46 40 1 80 Figure 2 2 Physical dimensions of GR 47 48 The measures are given in millimetres See also chapter 6 Technical Data LZT 123 8081 Ric 12 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3 System Connector Interface 3 1 Overview The electrical connections to the module except the antenna are made through the System Connector Interface The connector shall allow
368. the CSP The services are grouped into service groups with a maximum of 8 services in a group For each service group a bit mask tells which services are available bit 1 Unused bits are set to 0 lt service Description group gt Byte Each service group has a corresponding number service group code lt services gt Description byte Bit mask 8 bits indicating the services within the service group Bit 0 unused or unavailable service Bit 1 available service 165 14 NETWORK 14 6 AT EPNR Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Read entries in SIM preferred list Show if the command is AT EPNR lt format gt L lt index1 gt lt index2 AT EPNR EPNR lt index1 gt lt oper1 gt EPNR lt index2 gt lt oper2 gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR EPNR list of supported supported lt index gt s list of supported lt format gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description This command is used to read the SIM preferred list of networks EF pimnsev lt index1 gt Description integer Start index gt 0 lt index2 gt Description integer Stop index gt 0 lt format gt Description 2 Numeric lt oper gt lt oper gt Description string String indicates the code for the operator E g GSM Sweden Europolitan 24008 3 2 PCS 3
369. the module is able to connect to the APN it will return a CONNECT At this point PPP IP packets should be sent by the application to negotiate an IP address The easiest way of doing this whole thing is to create a windows dial up networking session with the dial string 99 1 after creating the data account on the module It is not possible to initiate a GPRS session from the network at present The reason for this is that unless a PDP context has been setup it has not been assigned an IP address by the GGSN DHCP server and as a result it cannot be addressed other than through its ME number defeating the object of using IP This is specified in GSM 7 60 or 3GPP 27 060 More detailed notes on this are contained in the application notes which can be obtained from the extranet or from customer support 1 7 1 On board TCP IP stack The TCP IP stack on board the module is accessible via the AT commands these commands are broken down in section 7 for details on how to use these please refer to the Using AT commands to control the on board TCP IP stack with GR47 48 this is available through the extranet or from customer support quote GR47 48 Application Note LZT 123 7631 LZT 123 7590 R1F 2 Call Control 2 1 AT CPIN PIN Control 2 CALL CONTROL See 3 29 AT CPIN PIN Control 2 2 ATA Answer Incoming Call Description Command Possible Responses Answer an incoming call ATA CONNECT CONNECT lt text gt NO C
370. the old script id is stored as a Last Known Good Script until it is overwritten or deleted If the module is reset and on startup the application runs and then hits a runtime error the module will delete the offending script and reinstitute the last good script The module will then restart and run the old script This behaviour only occurs if the script is set to run on startup 275 20 EMBEDDED APPLICATION The final option allowed lets the application restart from a Pause state see the Stop command Stop Application lt cmd gt 0 This parameter sets the application to stop This will only work if the application is currently running There are three options the application can be requested to stop and restart can be forced to halt pause or stopped on the next powercycle of the module The stop and restart function sends a signal to the application which it will read when it handles system signals The handler to this function will clear down the current interpreter instance and respond to the signal that the application has restarted If there is no response to this signal within 1 second then the command will respond that it is unsucessful This command will not affect the running of the application on subsequent powercycles The halt function does not request anything of the application it just stops the application process and renders it inactive by force This is pause mode as the ap
371. the user of the DCE to identify the specific model of device Typically the text will consist of a single line containing the name of the product but manufacturers may choose to provide any information desired lt model gt Description string type The total number of characters including line terminators in the information text returned in response to this command shall not exceed 2048 characters Note that the information text shall not contain the sequence 0 or OK so that DTE can avoid false detection of the end of this information text 11 11 AT GMR_ Read Revision Identification Description Command Possible Responses Request revision AT GMR lt revision gt identification Show if the command is AT GMR OK supported ERROR Description This command returns a manufacturer specified software revision name in a text string lt revision gt Description string type The total number of characters including line terminators in 129 LZT 123 7590 bit 11 12 LZT 123 7590 R1F 11 IDENTIFICATION the information text returned in response to this command shall not exceed 2048 characters Note that the information text shall not contain the sequence 0 or OK so that DTE can avoid false detection of the end of this information text Example AT GMR R2A009prgCXC1 122112 ATI Identification Information Description Command Possible Responses Execute ATl
372. time out 340 No CNMA acknowledgment expected 500 Unknown error 511 Other values in range 256 511 are reserved 16 2 CALL CONTROL 512 Manufacturer specific 1 5 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands For many of the more complicated commands examples are provided after the command s description Always refer to the detailed description of the command in question to check valid parameter values AT command syntax and Response syntax 1 6 SMS Text Mode SMS text mode allows users to send SMSs without having to understand how PDUs are constructed This section describes how to carry out basic operations in text mode and explains the steps that need to be taken Basic transmission of SMS A script which sets the module up is shown below AT CSMP 17 167 Set text mode parameter OK AT CMGF 1 Switch the module to text mode OK AT CMGS 07787154042 Sending an SMS gt Test SMS The text must be ended as in PDU mode with a control Z character ASCII 26 Confirmation that the SMS has CMGS 204 been sent successfully Note the following points 1 Once the CSMP and CMGF commands have been carried out they will not need to be initialized for this session 2 These parameters are saved in NVRAM using the SW command Notification of SMS New message indications are similar to the PDU mode as shown below LZT 123 7590 R1F LZT 123 7590 R1F 2 CALL CONTROL AT CNMI 3 1 OK CMTI SM 2 A
373. tion Integer type One byte Base Stations Identification code in hexadecimal format lt ch gt Description 0 1023 It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF Channel which identifies the BCCH carrier lt rxl gt Description Integer type Received Signal Strength level in dBm measured on idle mode lt rxifull gt Description Integer type Received Signal Strength level in dBm The Rx Level is taken in the Downlink and statistically is applied to 100 TDMA frames of the TCH or during a SACCH multiframe lt rxlsub gt Description Integer type Received Signal Strength level in dBm The Rx Level is taken from the DownLink signal and the average is applied to subset of SACCH frames lt rxqfull gt Description 0 BER lt 0 1 1 0 26 lt BER lt 0 30 2 0 51 lt BER lt 0 64 3 1 0 lt BER lt 1 3 4 1 9 lt BER lt 2 7 5 3 8 lt BER lt 5 4 6 7 6 lt BER lt 11 0 7 BER gt 15 0 162 LZT 123 7590 R1F 14 NETWORK lt mcc gt Description Integer type Three digits in decimal format The Mobile Country Code identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU lt rxqsub gt is the parameter that indicates the quality in the received signal on dedicated mode The measurement average is applied to a subset of a SACCH multiframe lt rxqsub gt Description 0 BER lt 0 1 1 0 26 lt BER lt 0 30 2 0 51 lt BE
374. tivation and status query are supported When querying the status of a network service lt mode gt 2 the response line for not active case lt status gt 0 should be returned only if service is not active for any lt class gt Parameter lt n gt is used to disable or enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code CCWA lt number gt lt type gt lt class gt lt alpha gt lt CLI validity gt to the TE when call waiting service is enabled The command is abortable when the network is interrogated The interaction of this command with other commands based on other GSM UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM UMTS standards Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value lt n gt Description 0 Disable 1 Enable 263 LZT 123 7590 bit LZT 123 7590 R1F 19 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES lt mode gt Description 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Query status lt classx gt Description integer Sum of integers each representing a class of information Default value is 7 1 Voice L1 2 Data 4 Fax 8 Short message service 16 Data circuit sync 32 Data circuit async 64 Dedicated packet access 128 Dedicated PAD access lt status gt Description 0 Not active 1 Active lt number gt Description String type String type ME number of forwarding address in format specified by lt type gt lt type gt Description Integer form
375. tive list of the cades available 3 26 AT CMEEMobile Equipment Error Description Command Possible Responses Request GSM Mobile AT CMEE lt n gt OK Equipment Error Control ERROR Show the current setting AT CMEE CMEE lt n gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CMEE CMEE list of supported supported lt n gt s OK ERROR Description Disables or enables the use of result code CME ERROR lt err gt as an indication of an error relating to the functionality of the ME When enabled ME related errors cause CME ERROR lt err gt final result code instead of the regular ERROR final result code ERROR is returned normally when error is related to syntax invalid parameters or TA functionality For more information refer to tCME ERROR Mobile Equipment Error Code page 13 LZT 123 7590 R1F lt n gt Description 0 Disable CME ERROR lt err gt result code and use ERROR instead Default value 1 Enable CME ERROR lt err gt result code and use numeric lt err gt values see page 14 2 Enable CME ERROR lt err gt result code and use verbose lt err gt values see page 14 53 3 27 AT CMER LZT 123 7590 R1F 3 CONTROL AND STATUS Mobile Equipment Event Reporting Description Command Possible Responses Set ME Activity AT CMER lt mode gt CME ERROR lt err gt Status L lt keyp gt lt disp gt OK lt ind gt lt bfr gt ERROR
376. tly to a PCB and a board cable connector to connect the radio device via a cable Figure 5 1 below shows the numbering of the connector pins A ground connection is provided at the mounting hole next to the RF connector on the radio device as shown below Connect this ground point to the DGND pins of the radio device by the shortest low impedance path possible The purpose of this connection is to allow any antenna ESD strikes to bypass the radio device s internal ground path Ground connection Pin 60 Pin 2 Figure 5 1 Radio Device viewed from underneath The following table gives the pin assignments for the system connector interface and a short description for each signal 21 LZT 123 7589 R2B LZT 123 7589 R2B SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE Note Under the heading Dir in the table radio device input and output signals are indicated by the letters and O respectively Pin Signal Name Di Signal Type Description 1 VCC Supply Power supply 2 DGND Digital ground 3 VCC Supply Power supply 4 DGND Digital ground 5 VCC Supply Power supply 6 DGND Digital ground 7 VCC Supply Power supply 8 DGND Digital ground 9 VCC Supply Power supply 10 DGND Digital ground 11 CHG_IN RFU Battery charge Battery charging power 12 DGND Digital ground 13 105 0 Digital 2 75V General purpose input output 5 ADC4 l Analogue Analogue to digital converter 4 14 ON OFF l Internal pull up Turns t
377. to enter commands with no values Additional commands may follow an extended syntax command on the same command line if a semicolon IRA 3B is inserted after the preceding extended command as a separator Read Command Syntax The read command is used to check the current values of parameters Type after the command line e AT lt command gt e AT lt command gt e AT lt command gt Example AT CSCS lt CR gt show current character set lt CR gt IRA lt CR gt information text response lt CR gt OK lt CR gt final result code response LZT 123 7590 R1F 2 CALL CONTROL Test Command Syntax The test command is used to test whether the command has been implemented or to give information about the type of subparameters it contains Type after the command line e AT lt command gt e AT lt command gt Example AT CPAS lt CR gt shows supported values for the response Note parameters lt CR gt CPAS 0 3 4 129 130 131 lt CR gt supported values lt CR gt OK lt CR gt final result code If the indicated lt parameter gt is not recognized the result code ERROR is issued Possible responses are indicated both as lt command gt list of supported lt parameter gt and in most cases the actual range of the parameter values 1 3 3 AT Response Syntax LZT 123 7590 R1F The default mode response shown below is in text mode See the command ATV for further
378. type gt AT ESVM AT ESVM CME ERROR lt err gt ESVM lt line1 gt lt index1 gt lt onoff1 gt lt number1 gt lt type1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt ESVM lt line1 gt lt index2 gt lt onoff2 gt lt numbe r2 gt lt type1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt ES VM lt line2 gt lt index1 gt lt onoff 1 gt lt number1 gt lt type1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt ESVM lt line2 gt lt inde x2 gt lt onoff2 gt lt number2 gt lt t ype1 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt CME lt err gt ESVMilist of supported lt line gt s list of supported lt index gt es list of supported lt onoff gt s lt nlength gt list of supported lt type gt s CME lt err gt Description The number to the voice mail server is set with this command L1 can have two voice mail numbers and if ALS is active L2 can have two voice mail numbers The numbers can be different or the same One number index 1 is for the home network and the other index 2 is for roaming The unit changes voice mail number automatically The parameters lt number gt and lt type gt can be left out if the parameter lt onoff gt is set to 0 Abortability This command may not be aborted lt index gt Description 1 Home network voice mail number 2 Roaming voice mail number lt line gt Description 1 Line 1 187 LZT 123 7590 R1F 15 PHONEBOOK 2 Line 2 lt onoff gt Description 0
379. ue 1 Checking an Input Trigger AT Command Response Comment AT E210 5 11 The TE is requesting the trigger state of the Input 1 E210 5 11 1 The MS responds that 11 has its OK trigger active LZT 123 7590 R1F 139 12 INPUT OUTPUT 12 2 AT E2U3 Ericsson M2M UART 3 Control LZT 123 7590 R1F Description Command Possible Responses Request operation AT E2U3 lt op gt lt rate gt ERROR lt CR gt Tx data lt ctrl OK ZIESC gt E2U3 lt CR gt lt LF gt Rx data Show if the command is AT E2U3 OK supported ERROR Description Provides the following options for control of the UART 3 interface e Open connection Opens the Uart 3 driver to Rx and Tx data e Transmit Data The TA prompts for data entry and up to 250 text characters can be entered Entry is terminated by the lt ctrl Z gt character or the lt ESC gt character cancels the command e Receive Data The TA responds with E2U3 lt CR gt lt LF gt followed by the contents of the Uart 3 receive buffer e Close connection Closes the Uart 3 driver and frees resources Defined values lt op gt parameter OP Description 0 Close UART3 connection 1 Open UARTS3 connection 2 Transmit Data to UART3 3 Receive Data from UART3 lt rate gt parameter lt rate gt Description Discrete integer The lt rate gt value is the rate in bits per second at which the value UARTS interface will operate The follo
380. ue of indicator Only those indicator events which are not caused by CIND shall be indicated by the TA to the TE 54 3 CONTROL AND STATUS lt bfr gt Description 0 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when lt mode gt 1 3 is entered Unsolicited Result Codes CKEV lt key gt lt press gt ClEV lt ind gt lt value gt 3 28 AT CPAS ME Activity Status Description Command Possible Responses Execute ME Activity AT CPAS lt mode gt CPAS lt pas gt Status e CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Show if the command is AT CPAS CPAS supported list of supported lt pas gt s CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description Returns the activity status lt pas gt of the ME It can be used to interrogate the ME before requesting action from the ME When the command is executed without the lt mode gt argument the command returns lt pas gt values from 0 to 128 for supported values see table below When on the other hand the command is executed with the lt mode gt argument set to 1 the command may return Ericsson specific lt pas gt values from 129 to 255 for supported values see the table below 55 LZT 123 7590 bit LZT 123 7590 R1F 3 CONTROL AND STATUS Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound value refer to GSM 07 07 lt pas gt Description 0 3 129 130 131 Ready ME allow
381. uence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return entered by the user if TE character set is HEX the entered text should consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME TA converts to 7 bit characters of GSM alphabet e g 17 IRA 49 and 55 will be converted to character IT GSM 23 if lt dcs gt indicates that 8 bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or lt fo gt indicates that GSM 03 40 TP 224 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT User Data Header Indication is set the entered text should consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME TA converts into 8 bit octet e g two characters 2A IRA 50 and 65 will be converted to an octet with integer value 42 sending can be cancelled by giving lt ESC gt character IRA 27 lt ctrl Z gt IRA 26 must be used to indicate the ending of the message body lt fo gt Description First octet of SMS DELIVER in integer format First octet of SMS_ SUBMIT in integer format First octet of SMS STATUS REPORT in integer format First octet of SMS COMMAND in integer format lt mr gt Description Integer GSM 03 40 TP Message Reference lt ra gt Description String GSM 03 40 TP Recipient Address Value field BCD or GSM default alphabet are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character set refef command CSCS Type of address given by lt tosca gt
382. usy 15 SIM wrong 16 Incorrect password 24 Text string too long 25 Invalid characters in text string 100 Unknown Example AT CPIN 0000 OK 58 3 30 AT CPWD LZT 123 7590 R1F 3 CONTROL AND STATUS Change Password Description Command Possible Responses Request facility lock AT CPWD lt fac gt e CME ERROR lt err gt lt oldpwd gt OK lt newpwd gt ERROR Show if the command is AT CPWD CPWD supported lt fac1 gt lt pwdlength1 gt lt fac2 gt lt pwdlength2 gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK ERROR Description Sets a new password for the facility lock function defined by command Facility Lock CLCK Test command returns a list of pairs which present the available facilities and the maximum length of their password lt fac gt Description PS PH SIM lock ME to SIM card ME asks password when other than current SIM card inserted SC SIM lock SIM card SIM asks password in ME power up and when this lock command issued P2 SIM PIN2 AQ BAOC Barr All Outgoing Calls refer GSM 02 88 clause 1 Ol BOIC Barr Outgoing International Calls refer GSM 02 88 clause 1 Al BAIC Barr All Incoming Calls refer GSM 02 88 clause 2 IR BIC Roam Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home country refer GSM 02 88 clause 2 Ox BOIC exHC Barr Outgoing International Calls except to Home Country refer GSM 02 88
383. ut and general characteristics are applicable If only software flow control is to be used it becomes necessary to assert RTS low or to connect RTS to CTS at the module Parameter Limit Application load capacitance lt 500 pF Application load resistance gt 1MQ Data Terminal Ready DTR DTR is an input to the module Signals from the DTE on this circuit indicate the DTE is ready to transmit and receive data DTR also acts as a hardware hang up so that calls are terminated if DTR is OFF high Default level is ON low The exact behavior of DTR is defined by the AT amp D command This is a Dig 2 75 CMOS Input and general characteristics are applicable Data Carrier Detect DCD DCD is an output from the module An ON low signal shall indicate that a valid carrier data signal is being received by the DCE module The exact behavior of DCD is defined by the AT amp C command This is a Dig 2 75 CMOS Output and general characteristics are applicable Ring Indicator RI LZT 123 8081 Ric 33 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION RI is an output from the module An ON low signal indicates a ringing signal is being received by the DCE module This is a Dig 2 75 CMOS Output and general characteristics are applicable DSR Data Set Ready The DSR signal must be switched on using the at amp s command If DSR is enabled it will indicate an active state low if the module is in command mode and
384. ut circuit for combined digital IO and ADC pins 3 18 Keyboard interface embedded applications only To increase IO capabilities the GR47 optimises the IO by multiplexing or sharing different features on single pins The IO has been extended to allow simple interfacing of a matrix keypad 3 18 1 lO KEYROW When configured for keypad operation the software will configure the digital IO pins as input or high impedance tri state In this state the keypad matrix row can be read from the KEYROW4 inputs These pins have a 100kQ pull up to 2 75V and the rows are considered activated when the voltage is pulled low by the external keypad switches 3 18 2 KEYCOL The keypad matrix column drivers share functionality with the RS232 hardware flow control signals When configured for keypad operation the software will configure the hardware flow control to either intermediate or off LZT 123 8081 Ric 42 GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION With intermediate flow control the number of keypad column outputs is limited to three with flow control switched off the number of keypad column outputs is increased to four In addition to the keypad column outputs itis possible to use a direct ground connection as an additional column driver which is interpreted as column zero Thus it is possible to create a variety of keypad matrix sizes from single column to five columns wide Finally a standard keypad matrix directly connects the rows t
385. ve gt Description IP Session Inactive IP Session Active Unsolicited Result codes None Execution Time Executed immediately not time critical Example AT E2IPA E2IPA 0 1 0 10 OK LZT 123 7590 R1F 100 7 2 AT E2IPO 7 DATA TCP IP AT E2IPA E2IPA 0 OK AT E2IPA 1 1 OK Activate PDP Context with id 1 AT E2IPA E2IPA 1 OK IP Session Active AT E2IPA 1 2 Try activating an invalid context E2IPA 002 Error code denotes problem ERROR IP Session Inactive M2M IP cOnnect Open Description Command Possible Responses Request an IP AT E2IPO lt IPType gt ERROR Connection lt IPAddr gt lt IPPort gt CONNECT E2IPO lt ErrNum gt ERROR Displays current IP AT E2IPO E2IPO lt Open gt Connection Status OK ERROR Shows if the AT E2IPO E2IPO list of supported command is lt IPType gt s list of supported supported lt IPAddr gt s list of supported lt IPPort gt s OK ERROR Description LZT 123 7590 R1F This command allows the unit to connect to another IP address and enter on line data mode thereby allowing data to be transferred to between the two IP addresses transparently The command allows either TCP or UDP connections If an error occurs during the negotiation with the IP address the unit will return an ERROR with an associated error number otherwise it will return CONNECT If at any point the unit deems that the conne
386. vice gt lt mt gt lt mo gt lt bm gt OK ERROR CSMS list of supported lt service gt s OK ERROR Description Selects messaging service lt service gt It returns the types of messages supported by the ME lt mt gt for mobile terminated messages lt mo gt for mobile originated messages and lt bm gt for broadcast type messages If the chosen service is not supported by the ME but is supported by the TA final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned lt service gt Description 0 GSM 03 40 and 03 41 The syntax of SMS AT commands is compatible with GSM 07 05 Phase 2 version 4 7 0 Phase 2 features which do not require new command syntax may be supported e g correct routing of messages with new Phase 2 data coding schemes 2 127 Reserved lt mt gt Description 0 Mobile terminated messages not supported 1 Mobile terminated messages supported lt mo gt Description 0 Mobile originated messages not supported 1 Mobile originated messages supported 230 16 17 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT lt bm gt Description 0 Broadcast messages not supported 1 Broadcast messages supported lt err gt Description 0 127 GSM 04 11 Annex E 2 values 128 255 GSM 03 40 subclause 9 2 3 22 values 300 ME failure 302 Operation not allowed 304 Invalid PDU mode parameter 310 SIM not inserted 311 SIM P
387. wing rates are supported 1200 2400 4800 9600 140 12 INPUT OUTPUT 19200 38400 57600 115200 230400 460800 Examples Open channel at 9600 baud AT E2U3 1 9600 OK Transmit data to UART 3 AT E2U3 2 gt Tx data lt ctrl Z gt OK Receive data from UART 3 AT E2U3 3 E2U3 Rx data OK Close UART 3 channel AT E2U3 0 OK 12 3 AT E2RS232 Ericsson RS232 control mode Description Command Possible Responses Select RS232 control AT E2RS232 lt Val gt ERROR mode OK Read Command status AT E2RS232 E2RS232 lt Val gt OK ERROR Show if the commands is AT E2RS232 E2RS232 list of supported supported lt Val gt e OK 141 LZT 123 7590 bit 12 INPUT OUTPUT e ERROR Description On GR47 the RS232 control lines on UART 1 are multiplexed with general purpose IO lines as follows RTS 109 CTS 04 DCD 01 RI 02 DSR 03 DTR IN1 This command allows the user to select 3 different levels of RS232 control such that the some of the control lines may be used as IO The following table shows the role of the control IO pins with respect to the mode selected with this command Table 1 RS232 control pin usage Mode Rs232 control lines Extended IO lines Description 0 Tx Rx RTS CTS Full RS232 control DCD RI DSR DTR 1 Tx Rx RTS CTS 01 O2 O3 IN1 Hardware flow control only 2 Tx Rx 01 O2 O3 IN1 109 RS232 control off 04 all lines used for IO
388. write only Note The ATD command is used only for dialing It is not possible to generate arbitrary DTMF tones using the ATD command 28 LZT 123 7590 R1F 2 CALL CONTROL Note The AT VTS command is used only during a voice call lt DTMF gt Description ASCII An ASCII character string with entries in the set 0 9 and character string separated by commas Each entry is interpreted as a single ASCII character Example The string 8 9 sends two DTMF tones 8 followed by 9 P is a further valid character which allows a pause of the same width of the tones to be inserted Example atd01252551624 OK attvts 1 p 2 p 3 OK 29 3 Control and Status 3 1 ATQ Result Code Suppression Description Command Possible Responses Set Result Code ATQ lt value gt OK Suppression ERROR Show the current setting ATQ Q lt value gt Show if the command is ATQ Q list of supported supported lt value gt s Description Determines whether or not the DCE transmits result codes to the DTE When result codes are being suppressed no portion of any intermediate final or unsolicited result code header result text line terminator or trailer is transmitted lt value gt Description 0 DCE transmits result codes Default value 1 Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted 3 2 ATSO Automatic Answer Control Description Command Possible Responses Automatic answer A
389. x gt If lt delflag gt is present and not set to 0 the ME shall ignore lt index gt and act according to the definition of lt delflag gt in the table shown below If lt delflag gt is omitted only the entry in lt index gt will be deleted If deleting fails final result code CMS ERROR lt err gt is returned Test command shows the valid memory locations lt index gt Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory LZT 123 7590 R1F 226 16 13 16 14 LZT 123 7590 R1F 16 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES POINT TO POINT lt delflag gt 0 4 Description Delete the message specified in lt index gt Default Delete all messages from preferred message storage including unread messages ignore lt index gt AT CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters Only Applicable to Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Set the show text mode AT CSDH lt show gt CME ERROR lt err gt OK Show the current setting AT CSDH CSDH lt show gt CME ERROR lt err gt Show if the command is AT CSDH CSDH list of supported supported lt show gt s OK e CME ERROR lt err gt Description Controls whether detailed header information is shown in text mode result codes lt show gt Description 0 Do not show header values defined in commands AT CSCA and AT CSMP lt sca gt lt tosca gt lt fo gt lt vp g
390. y described in the GSM standard 1 Failed User terminated session the text was displayed as requested and the user wants to end the proactive session It corresponds to 10 proactive session terminated by the user described in the GSM standard 2 Failed User requests backward move the text was displayed as requested and the user wants to go backwards in the session It corresponds to 11 backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user 3 Failed No response from user the text was displayed and the user did not react It corresponds to 12 No response from user 4 Failed Screen is busy the text could not be displayed lt response_type gt Description 0 Response type shall be digits 0 9 and 1 Response type shall be SMS default alphabet 2 Response type shall be UCS2 Coded We currently do not support this option If you use it an Error will be returned 3 Response type shall be Yes No response lt response_length gt Description Integer type 0 160 Value indicating the length of response field lt user_response gt It shall be an integer within the range between lt min_length_response gt and 239 LZT 123 7590 R1F Note 18 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT lt max_length_response gt lt user_response gt Description String type Field of length between lt min_length_response gt and lt max_length_response gt in string type form
391. y standard Texas Instrument DSP It is the same format as the one used between the CODEC and the DSP The DSP is the source of the bit clock PCMCLK and the frame synchronisation PCMSYNC The data bits in PCMULD and PCMDLD shall be aligned so that the MSB in each word occurs on the same clock edge LZT 123 8081 Ric 27 3 10 Serial Data GR47 GR48 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Pin Name 41 42 39 40 37 38 36 45 46 43 44 TD RD RTS 109 CTS KeyCOL4 04 DTR KeyROW1 1 01 DCD KeyCOL1 04 RI KeyCOL2 02 TD2 RD2 TD3 RD3 Dir UO G ff O O O OO OO O O Description RS232 CCITT N Serial data to module 103 Serial data from module 104 Request To Send 105 General purpose UO 9 Clear To Send 106 Key column 4 General purpose output 4 Data Terminal Ready 108 2 Keyboard column 1 General purpose I O 1 Data Carrier Detect 109 Key column 1 General purpose output 1 Ring Indicator 125 Key column 2 General output 2 UART 2 Data Transmission UART 2 Data Reception UART 3 Data Reception UART 3 Data Transmission The serial channels are used as asynchronous communication links between an application system or accessory units connected to the Module They consist of three UART s UART 1 This has full RS232 and is used for all on and off line communication UART 2 May be used for interfacing to a GPS unit downloading software receiving logging information etc UA
392. ync pin is HIGH SPI Send Receive lt op gt 1 32 This command sends from 1 32 bytes of data across the enabled SPI bus Data is sent MSB first from the first byte to the last byte Example AT E2SPI 8 170 170 85 85 170 170 85 85 lt CR gt OK This command sends 8 bytes 170 170 85 85 170 170 85 85 across the SPI bus Bytes are in decimal format SPI Disable lt op gt 0 This command is sent to disable the SPI functionality and restore use of IO pins to other applications The SPI bus must be disabled before being enabled with a new set of parameters AT E2SPI 0 OK lt op gt Description 0 Disable SPI bus 1 32 Send receive 1 32 bytes 154 13 16 LZT 123 7590 R1F 13 INTERFACE 255 Enable SPI bus lt byteformat gt Description 0 No Sync Pin function 1 32 Sync is toggled every 1 32 bytes sent received lt InitSync gt Description 0 Sync Pin initial state LOW 1 Sync Pin initial state HIGH lt byte x gt lt byte X DS Description AT E2ESC 0 255 decimal value denoting the byte value to be sent lt active gt Description 0 SPI bus is active pins are controlled by SPI 1 SPI bus is not active pins are not controlled by SPI M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time Description Command Possible responses Set GPRS online AT E2ESC lt gt gt OK command guard time ERROR Show the current setting AT E2ESC E2ESC lt gt gt Show if the co

GR 47/GR 48 Technical Description - conrad

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents